Chevron Hse Guidlines

Health, Safety and Environmental Guidelines Table of Contents: Safe Operations
Table of Contents:
Safe Operations
Safe Operations: Safety

SO.1 Chemical Storageand Handling
SO.2 Confined Space Entry
SO.3 Lockout and Tagout
SO.4 Personal Protective Equipment
SO.5 General Work Permits
SO.6 (Reserved for Safety Systems Testing and Maintenance)
SO.7 Contractor Health, Safety and Environmental Program
SO.8 (Reserved for Cranes and Hoists: Training, Operation,
Inspection and Maintenance)
SO.9 (Reserved for Explosives Storage, Handling and Disposal)
SO.10 Water Safety
SO.11 Aircraft Safety
SO.12 Electrical Worker Safety
SO.13 (Reserved for Facility Lighting)
SO.14 Managing Process Safety
SO.16 Motor Vehicle Safety
Safe Operations: Fire
SO.31 Fire Systems: Testing and Maintenance
SO.32 Halon in Fire Suppression
SO.33 Fuel: Storage and Handling
SO.34 Liquefied Petroleum Gas: Storage and Handling
SO.35 Hot Work
SO.36 Hot Tapping
Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. June 1999

Health, Safety and Environmental Guidelines Table of Contents: Safe Operations
Safe Operations: Health

SO.61 Medical Care
SO.62 Food and Galley Hygiene
SO.63 Potable Water Standards
SO.64 Pest Control
SO.65 Hazard Communication
SO.66 Respiratory Protection
SO.67 Hearing Conservation
SO.68 Exposure Monitoring Plan
SO.69 Laboratory Safety and Industrial Hygiene
SO.70 Hydrogen Sulfide, H2S
SO.71 NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material) Handling and Disposal
SO.72 Asbestos
SO.73 Handling Refractory Ceramic Fibers
Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. June 1999

Health, Safety and Environmental Guidelines:
Safe Operations: Safety Chemical Storage and Handling
Guideline SO.1
Chemical Storage
and Handling
Purpose
This guideline addresses proper storage and handling practices for chemicals commonly
used in oil and gas exploration and production operations.
Content
General Overview SO.1-1
Guideline SO.1-2
I. Isolation and Containment SO.1-2
II. Labeling and Packaging SO.1-3
III. Safe Handling and Use SO.1-3
IV. Fire Protection SO.1-4
V. Employee Training SO.1-5
Resources SO.1-6
General Overview
This guideline applies to chemicals generally used in oil and gas exploration and
production operations, such as lubricating oils, hydraulic oils, solvents, demulsifiers,
corrosion inhibitors, paints, biocides, herbicides and drilling mud additives. All
Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.1 - 1 November 1997

Chemical Storage and Handling Safe Operations: Safety
chemicals should be stored, transported and used in a manner that protects human health
and the environment.
Potential hazards associated with all chemicals should be identified by means of material
safety data sheets or equivalent information. All chemicals should be isolated and
contained to minimize employee exposure and release to the environment. Chemicals
which might react with each other should be separated by distance or physical barriers.
Chemicals should be stored in appropriate containers, and containers labeled with the
contents and appropriate hazard warnings. Local procedures should be developed for
handling and using hazardous chemicals, and employees should receive training on all
aspects of chemical safety.
For more information on storage and handling of laboratory chemicals, refer to Health,
Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.69 Laboratory Safety and Industrial Hygiene.
For more information on labeling, material safety data sheets and chemical inventories,
refer to Health, Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.65 Hazard Communication.
Guideline
I. Isolation and Containment

A. Isolation
1. Chemical storage and handling areas should be centralized to the extent possible
to allow the use of bulk chemical storage tanks and to reduce the need for drums
and manual handling.
2. Chemicals should be stored in locations where there is minimal exposure and
risk from fires or other incidents at adjacent facilities. Storage facilities should
also be located where spills and runoff from fire fighting activities are an
adequate distance from rivers or other sensitive watercourses, and do not pose a
threat to fresh water aquifers.
3. Chemicals should not be stored, mixed or handled in areas where runoff could
enter surface waters.
4. Appropriate identification and warning signs should be placed in areas where
chemicals are stored or handled. The markings should inform employees of
proper safe practices (i.e., personal protection for caustics).
B. Containment
1. Physical separators such as berms or adequate distances should be used to
separate chemicals and materials that when combined with one another may
bring about a fire, explosion or the production of a flammable or poisonous gas.
The following classes of chemicals should be stored separately and have
individual containment:
a. Fire Hazards
November 1997 SO.1 - 2 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

b. Corrosives
c. Oxidizers
d. Explosives
e. Poisons
To determine the proper classification of a chemical, refer to the container label
or the Material Safety and Data Sheet (MSDS).
2. For chemical drums and other portable chemical containers of 250-gallon or less
capacity, drip pans or other containment should be provided under valves, pipe
and tubing connections and chemical pumps. For fixed or portable bulk
containers larger than 250 gallons, impervious spill containment capable of
accommodating 110 percent of the contents of the single largest container should
be provided.
II. Labeling and Packaging

A. Labeling
1. Material Safety Data Sheets should be available on-site for all chemicals,
whether in storage or in use. Refer to Health, Safety and Environmental
Guideline SO.65 Hazard Communication. for additional information on MSDSs
and chemical container labeling.
2. All chemical containers should have a label, tag or other marking showing the
name of the material (as shown on the MSDS) and any appropriate warnings. If
the label becomes damaged or is removed, it should be replaced.
B. Packaging
1. Chemicals should be transported and stored in packaging commensurate with the
manufacturer's methods and practices. In general, chemicals should be kept in
the manufacturer's original packaging whenever possible. If packaging becomes
damaged, it should be repaired or the contents transferred to new packaging, so
as to minimize worker or environmental exposure to the substance.
2. Chemical packaging and containers should be protected from deterioration
caused by wind, water or sunlight during transport and storage.
3. Containers should be transported and stored on pallets (or in bulk containers) so
as to minimize possible damage, spill or deterioration. Containers should be
kept covered where necessary to prevent damage.
III. Safe Handling and Use

Chemicals should be stored, handled and used according to manufacturers
recommendations and the precautions. Based on the manufacturers recommendations,
local procedures should be developed for safe storage and handling of chemicals. Details

of local procedures will depend on the hazards of the chemicals, and may include
information such as:
Step-by-step instructions for transport, storage and use
Appropriate first aid actions
Posting of warning and caution signs
Posting of safety instructions and procedures
Use of personal protective equipment, such as goggles, full face shields, gloves,
respiratory protection, rubber boots and protective suits
Refer to Health, Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.4 Personal Protective
Equipment for additional information on use of personal protective equipment.
IV. Fire Protection

NFPA 30 provides guidelines for fire protection of flammable and combustible liquids
stored in drums, containers and portable tanks. (A copy of NFPA 30 is located in the
Chevron Fire Protection Manual)
A. Classifications
1. "Flammable" liquids are categorized as Class 1A, 1B, or 1C and have a flash
point less than 100F. Examples include some biocides, herbicides and corrosion
inhibitors.
2. "Combustible" liquids are categorized as Class II, IIIA, or IIIB and have a flash
point greater than 100F. Examples include some solvents, demulsifiers, paints
and lube oils. Check the MSDS or product label to determine the liquid class.
Storage requirements vary for the different liquid classes.
B. Liquid Storage Restrictions

Small quantities of flammable and combustible liquids should be stored in cabinets.
Larger quantities may be stored within a general purpose warehouse, in a separate
liquid storage room, or in a safe outside area.
Up to 120 gallons of flammable and combustible liquids may be stored in a
"Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinet." No more than 60 gallons may be Class I or
II. Up to three cabinets may be located in a single area. (NFPA 30, 4-3)
According to NFPA 30, liquids may be stored outside storage cabinets with the
following restrictions:
1. Within a general purpose warehouse, flammable and combustible liquids should
be separated by 8 feet from other combustible materials. The storage area should
be sprinklered. Class 1A containers are not permitted and Class IB & 1C are
permitted only in 1-gallon containers (maximum 660 gal). Class II liquids are
permitted in 5-gallon or smaller containers (maximum 1,375 gal). Class IIIA,

IIIB containers or drums are permitted in maximum quantities of 2,750 gal and
13,750 gal respectively. (NFPA 30, 4-5.2)
2. When liquids are stored in a separate "Liquid Storage Room", one wall of the
room should be on the exterior of the building to aid in emergency response if a
fire occurs. A two-hour rated fire wall should separate the room from the rest of
the building. The room should be sprinklered, with curbs or grated trenches to
control spills. (NFPA 30, 4-4)
3. Up to 1,100 gallons of flammable and combustible liquids may be stored
outdoors adjacent to a building, as long as the building wall has a 2-hour fire
rating and there are no openings in the wall within 10 feet of the liquid storage.
The area should be graded or curbed to divert spills away from the building.
(NFPA 30, 4-7)
C. Fire Protection and Control

Sufficient hose reels (1 -1/2" or less) should be provided to cover all liquid storage
areas. For warehouses and storage rooms, the total water supply should be sufficient
for inside uses plus 500 gpm for outside hoses. Storage areas should be protected
with at least one 20-pound Class B portable fire extinguisher, located at the door.
(NFPA 30, 4-8)
D. Transfer and Dispensing

Flammable and combustible liquids should not be transferred or dispensed in general
purpose warehouses. If transfer and dispensing of liquids is done in a liquid storage
room, the room should be electrically classified Class I, Div. 2 and mechanical
ventilation should be used. When Class I or II liquids are transferred by gravity from
a bulk container, a self closing valve should be used. (NFPA 30, 4-5.2, 4-4.2, 5-4.3.2)
V. Employee Training
Employees should receive training on proper chemical use and handling as it relates to
their job. This training can be combined with the training described in Health, Safety
and Environmental Guideline SO.65 Hazard Communication. Topics that should be
addressed include:
What chemicals are being used and where
Availability of information on the chemicals (from MSDSs and local procedures)
Physical and health risks of chemicals in the work area, either by individual
chemicals or by category (acids, solvents, etc.)
Methods to detect the presence or release of chemicals (odor, visual, instrumentation)
Protective measures such as work practices, emergency procedures, personal
protective equipment and personal hygiene practices
Proper use and care of protective equipment
Emergency procedures for chemical substance spill/release

First aid procedures for chemical exposures

The proper procedures to dispose of packaging material, wastes, etc.
Resources
Kutubu Petroleum Development Project, Hazardous Substance Control Plan
Construction, 1992.
Environmental Guidelines Manual, Chevron USA, Inc., Production Department, Western
Region, 1992.
ANSI/NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, National Fire Protection
Association, 1996.

Safe Operations: Safety Confined Space Entry
Guideline SO.2
Confined Space Entry
Purpose
This guideline provides information about:
Entering and working within confined spaces
Developing specific, detailed procedures for working inside enclosed equipment and
areas
Contents
Guideline SO.2-2
I. Definitions SO.2-2
II. Responsibilities SO.2-5
III. Training SO.2-6
IV. Pre-Entry Considerations SO.2-7
V. Entry and Standby Requirements SO.2-15
VI. Post-entry Requirements SO.2-18
Resources SO.2-19
Appendix:
Confined Space Entry Flowchart SO.2-21

Confined Space Entry Safe Operations: Safety
General Overview
This guideline pertains to general and special confined spaces the definitions,
responsibilities, training, pre-entry planning, permitting, cleaning, testing, and more
based upon the information in publications listed under Resources. These procedures are
not intended to supersede local instructions, standards, or procedures.
The flowchart in the appendix of this guideline may be used as a checklist to verify that
existing procedures are adequate for all elements critical to an operation.
This guideline does not apply to entering atmospheres Immediately Dangerous to Life
and Health (IDLH), including asphyxiating atmospheres containing inert gases. Until
proved otherwise, however, untested confined spaces should be considered as being
IDLH. Entries involving IDLH atmospheres require local management's authorization to
initiate special entry procedures.
Note that an atmosphere containing a gas concentration exceeding the recognized
exposure limit is not automatically considered IDLH.
Guideline
I. Definitions
A. Confined Space
1. Configurations
A confined space:
a. Makes access and egress difficul, and
b. Allows for the existence or potential build-up of a hazardous atmosphere
(flammable, toxic, oxygen deficient).
2. Examples
Examples of confined space include but are not limited to:
a. Trenches and pits over five feet deep
b. Tanks
c. Roofs of floating roof tanks when the roof is five feet or more below the tank
shell
d. Open shafts
e. Tunnels
f. Vessels
g. Reactors

h. Vaults
i. Columns
j. Ducts
k. Restricted passageways
B. Recognized Exposure Limit (REL)

An exposure standard for chemical or physical hazards is defined as one that is:
1. Adopted by a government agency with jurisdiction over the work operation
2. Adopted by the Chevron Exposure Standards Committee
3. Recommended by a consensus or scientific organization (such as the American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists), based on sound scientific
judgment
C. Entry
Entry into a confined space should be classified as either general or special.
1. General Entry
An entry should be considered general when testing establishes that:
a. It contains neither significant hazards nor the risk of developing them.
b. Ventilation is adequate.
c. Oxygen levels are between 19.5 percent and 23.5 percent.
d. Toxic materials (such as H2S, chlorine, ammonia, benzene) do not exceed
RELs.
e. Flammable gases or vapors do not exceed 10 percent of the lower explosive
limit (LEL).
f. Other air contaminants which may be present have warning properties (odor;
taste; eye, nose, or throat irritation; etc.) below the REL.
2. Special Entry
An entry should be considered special when testing establishes that:
a. A significant hazard exists or has the potential of developing but at levels
below IDLH.
b. Ventilation is insufficient to remove dangerous air contamination.
c. Flammable gases or vapors are present or anticipated in excess of 10 percent
of the Lower Explosive Level (LEL).
Note: Entry is prohibited above 20 percent of the LEL.

d. Oxygen deficiency (<19.5 percent) or enrichment (>23.5 percent) exists or

may develop.
Note: Entry is prohibited below 16 percent and above 23.5 percent.
e. Toxic materials such as H2S, chlorine, benzene, carbon monoxide, ammonia
are present or may become present in concentrations greater than the REL
but less than the IDLH level.
D. Atmospheres
1. Hazardous
A hazardous atmosphere is one that may cause a person injury or illness due to
the presence of one or more of the following:
a. Flammable or combustible vapor
b. Toxic substances in concentrations exceeding safe limits
c. An oxygen deficiency or enrichment
d. Ionizing radiation
e. Heat
f. Noise
2. Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH)
IDLH is any condition that would
a. Pose an immediate or a delayed threat to life
b. Cause irreversibly adverse health effects
c. Interfere with an individual's ability to escape the IDLH area unaided
3. Other Atmospheres
For guidelines about atmospheres not covered here, refer to the applicable
material safety data sheet (MSDS); TLV booklet; or contact local HSE groups.
E. Personnel
1. The Supervisor
A supervisor is the companys representative, responsible for the facility's
operation.
2. The Person-in-Charge
The person-in-charge is the company's employee or contract person directing the
tasks of the workers performing in the confined space.

II. Responsibilities
A. The Supervisor
For each entry, a supervisor requesting that work be carried out in a confined space
should assure that:
1. Employees and contractor personnel involved with the entry are trained
adequately in:
a. Safe entry procedures
b. Rescue methods
c. Testing of space
d. Safety requirements
2. All applicable, workplace, hazard evaluations have been identified on the permit.
These hazards should include but are not limited to:
a. Oxygen
b. Toxic materials such as H2S, chlorine, benzene, carbon monoxide, ammonia
c. Physical agents such as heat, noise, ionizing radiation
d. Rotating equipment
e. Flammable gases and vapor tests
3. All permits are issued properly, as described in the Pre-Entry Considerations
section of this guideline.
4. Workers are provided with proper protective and safety equipment as listed on
the entry permit.
5. Workers follow proper isolation procedures as outlined in this guideline.
B. The Person-in-charge
The person-in-charge should assure that:
1. Workers have completed proper isolation procedures including any necessary:
a. Locking
b. Blocking
c. Tagging
2. Confined space entry procedures and permit requirements are followed and
include:
a. Assessing hazards and identifying conditions through testing and
inspection in the space to be entered

b. Validating with the supervisor the classification (general or special) of the

space according to the criteria under Definitions, above
c. Determining that necessary protective and safety equipment is on-site and
verifying that it is listed on the entry permit
d. Signing and dating the entry permit which includes specifically the permit's
duration
e. Posting the entry permit at the entrance(s) to the confined space
f. Reviewing atmospheric test results
g. Identifying and discussing physical agents and entry-permit requirements
with all personnel
h. Verifying that standby and entry personnel understand the rescue plan
3. Appropriate standby personnel are present whenever people are within a
confined space.
4. Entry and standby personnel are using or wearing the necessary protective and
safety equipment.
5. The person-in-charge or the standby monitors the job as specified on the permit
during the entire period that workers are inside the confined space.
C. Personnel Involved With the Entry

Personnel involved with the entry should comply with the requirements of applicable
permits and the provisions of local procedures for entering a confined space.
III. Training
A. In General
Training for personnel who will work in confined spaces should be based on both:
1. Written procedures on confined spaces developed by facility management
2. Detailed instructions of the specific job plan as it relates to the space to be
entered
B. Entry Personnel
Training and appropriate documentation for entry personnel should include but not
be limited to:
1. Respiratory protection
2. Detailed entry procedures, including the entry permit system
3. Preparations for working in a confined space
4. Hazard identification, evaluation, and control

5. Protective equipment
6. Standby and emergency requirements, including detailed rescue procedures
7. Life line, safety belt, and harness operations, as appropriate
C. Gas Tester
Training for personnel selected to perform gas testing of confined spaces should
include the following:
1. All procedures for entry personnel, above
2. The use, limitations, calibration, and inspection of testing equipment
3. Potential conditions which may affect the testing procedure which include, but
are not limited to:
a. Interfering compounds
b. Testing the equipment's condition, reliability, and calibration
D. Standby Personnel
Training for standby personnel should include:
1. All procedures for entry personnel, above
2. Fire regulations and hot work procedures (see also Health, Safety and
Environmental Guideline SO.35 Hot Work, in this manual)
3. Operating the warning signal system
4. CPR and first aid
IV. Pre-Entry Considerations

A. Personnel Information and Plans
Personnel should avoid entering confined spaces if the work can be accomplished
outside. If entry is unavoidable, entry plans should include:
1. Identifying Hazards
Each confined space may present unique hazards; therefore, systematic approach
should be used to identify all potential hazards by:
a. Checking the area surrounding the confined space to identify hazards, such
as drifting vapors from other tanks, drains, power, and equipment
b. Keeping exhaust and fuel vapors from entering the space by locating engines
and motors for portable, powered equipment both downwind and to the side
of confined-space openings

2. Training
Ensure that all workers participating in confined space operations have been
trained in both confined space and emergency procedures.
3. Pre-entry Setup
Before entering a confined space, establish and carry out a plan for the space,
based on existing and potential hazards, which involves:
a. Isolation
b. Cleaning
c. Ventilating
d. Entering
4. Rescue Plan
Establish a rescue plan identifying escape routes and emergency egress methods
and, before entry begins, review it with all personnel involved.
B. Permitting
When performing a confined space entry, establish and follow an entry permit
system. The tags shown in Figure SO.2-1, and Figure SO.2-2 can be obtained from
Chevron's stationery warehouse in Dublin, California.
1. Permit Procedures
a. Post a permit at all entrances.
b. Prohibit entry into the confined space until the entry permit is completed and
posted.
c. Allow personnel to enter a confined space only after they check the entry
permit to ensure the space is safe for entry.

Fig. SO.2-1 Safe Entry Permit Front Back

Fig. SO.2-2 Special Entry Permit Front Back

2. Permit Information
The permit should contain the following information:
a. The equipment to be entered
b. The location to be entered
c. Identification of possible hazards, including past and present service
d. Atmospheric or other test results and documentation
e. Isolation of the space
f. Requirements for special and personal protective equipment
g. Duration of the permit
h. Approval signature authorizing entry
C. Isolation/Lockout
Isolation, for the purposes of this guideline, includes all steps necessary to ensure
that the conditions within a confined space do not or cannot change during the time
the space is occupied. Isolation generally includes blinding, lockout, blockout, and
tagout requirements.
1. Isolation
Isolation ensures that substances are not reintroduced to the space through any
connected piping or ducting. The means of isolation may include one or all of
the following:
a. Installing blinds at the flange closest to the space
b. Disconnecting piping/ducting and moving it out of alignment; capping or
securely plugging the open ends
c. Installing double-block valves and bleeding the space between the valves to
a safe location
Note 1: Double block and bleed is not allowed for confined space entry
except with the approval of local management.
Note 2: A single valve is never acceptable as a positive means of isolation.
2. Lockout
Lockout ensures that electrically energized equipment is prevented from starting,
and the means of lockout may include one or more of the following:
a. Placing the main breaker switch in the off position and installing a padlock
through the switch
b. Removing the fuses

c. Disconnecting the leads between the operated equipment and load side of the
main breaker
3. Blockout
Blockout ensures that no one can actuate or move mechanically operated or
physically movable equipment; and the means of blockout may include one or
more of the following:
a. Releasing all hydraulic or pneumatic pressure from lines or containers
b. Venting de-pressurized systems
c. Securing movable equipment by applying devices such as, blocks under, bars
through, or chains around it
4. Tagout
Tagout means identifying any lockout or blockout device and the reason for it in
such a way that it alerts every person involved in the confined space entry.
D. Ventilation
Ventilation not only removes contaminants but also helps to cool the space. Adequate
natural or mechanical ventilation should be provided to ensure that atmospheric
concentrations are brought down below RELs, particularly when testing reveals an
above-REL level of air contamination or an oxygen deficiency.
When time allows, ventilate spaces naturally by opening the space several days prior
to entry.
Air eductors should be placed at the top of tanks or vessels. Air hoses used should be
both electrically conductive and electrically continuous within the confined space.
E. Cleaning
Before entering a confined space, it should be cleaned:
1. Before opening, by emptying, flushing or purging the space to remove
flammable or toxic substances
2. After opening, by cleaning the space from the outside as thoroughly as possible
F. Pre-entry Atmospheric Testing

1. Identifying Hazards
Even after the confined space is ventilated and cleaned, potential hazards may
still be present such as:
a. Flammable gases or vapors in excess of allowable limits
b. Oxygen deficiency or enrichment
c. Toxic materials

d. Physical agents
Note: During pre-entry testing procedures, these hazards should be identified
and noted on the entry permit.
2. Mitigating Hazards
Hazards identified during testing should be controlled or mitigated as specified
in the general or special entry guidelines.
3. Test Equipment
Certain procedures and criteria should be established for the test equipment:
a. Calibrate direct reading instruments at least once on the day the readings are
taken.
b. Calibrate the equipment with source gas, an appropriate substance at a
concentration near the test limit of concern.
c. Select an instrument capable of measuring the contaminant at concentrations
near and below the test limit.
Note: LEL meters are inadequate for measuring total hydrocarbons near
300 ppm.
d. Ensure that the equipment is in good working order.
4. Initial Testing
After isolating, opening, and ventilating the space, it should be tested by a
person trained in the care, use, and calibration of the associated sampling
equipment.
Mechanical ventilation systems should be stopped so that the tester may conduct
tests as required, administering the tests in sequence, and taking appropriate
precautions, such as:
a. Performing tests initially at the entrance to the space using probes that
extend, if necessary.
Precaution: Do not enter the space if elevated levels are detected at the
entrance.
b. Entering the space, when appropriate, and continuing testing.
Precautions: Vacate the space immediately, if:
1) Above-REL levels or other unsafe conditions are detected
2) An emergency occurs at the facility
c. Testing low spots around piping, irregular surfaces, and areas away from
openings where ventilation may be restricted.

d. Taking the following precautions if entry is required to conduct the initial

testing:
Precautions:
1) Wear a supplied air breathing apparatus and harness assembly.
2) Do not enter without arranging for a standby person who has an
independent source of breathing air, such as self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA), to be present during testing.
e. Testing each space of equipment with interconnected spaces blinded off as a
unit
Precaution: The most hazardous atmosphere within an interconnected space
establishes the entry procedure for the entire space.
f. Checking internal atmospheric temperature
Precaution: Develop appropriate work/rest schedules when inside spaces
where the temperature exceeds the ACGIH-adopted Threshold Limit Values
(TLV's) or AIHA Guidelines for heat stress.
g. Testing for NORM at entrance
Precaution: Naturally occurring radioactive material (NORM) occasionally
exists in producing equipment. If we have not conducted tests to verify its
absence, we should measure levels on the outside surface of the equipment
prior to entry. See Health, Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.71
NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material) Handling and Disposal.
5. Retesting
During the performance of any confined space operation, the atmosphere in the
space should be tested with sufficient frequency to ensure that the air quality
does not deteriorate.
a. Testing at the beginning of each shift
b. Retesting before re-entry after periods when the space is unoccupied
(including lunch breaks)
c. Retesting at least twice following the initial test: in the middle and towards
the end of the shift
d. Retesting if conditions change inside the space
Note: The person-in-charge may also request additional retesting for entry.
6. Recording Test Results
Record the results of the initial test and the retesting on the entry permit.

V. Entry and Standby Requirements

A. Entry
1. Defining Entry Requirements
Entry requirements are defined by the:
a. Atmospheric test results
b. Configuration of the space
c. Scope of the job
2. Applying the Requirements
The elements listed above help to determine the:
a. Type of entry
b. Ventilation requirements
c. Routes of entry and exit
d. Special safety and protective equipment required, such as personnel hoist
requirements, harness, life line
e. Standby requirements
f. Entry permit requirements
g. Monitoring
h. Any additional precautions, such as Hot work permits
B. Standby Requirements
At all times when someone is inside a confined space, personnel should be posted at
the entrance.
1. Training and Equipment
Evaluate each unique job to determine the proper number of standbys necessary
and should provide the following training and equipment for standbys before
anyone enters a confined space:
a. Instruct and train standby personnel in emergency procedures, including the
use of a supplied air breathing apparatus.
b. Locate supplied air breathing apparatus at the entrance to the confined space
at all times when someone is inside.

2. For Any Entry

Be certain that standby personnel:
a. Know the work being performed inside and potential hazards that may be
encountered.
b. Can identify symptoms of over exposure to atmospheric hazards.
c. Will ensure that isolating blinds are not removed inadvertently or air blowers
shut off accidentally.
d. Will ensure that any other equipment necessary for safe entry is functioning
properly.
e. Will enter a confined space only under the following conditions:
1) When an emergency occurs
2) When wearing the proper safety equipment
3) After alerting at least one additional person outside the confined space
to the emergency
4) After confirming that help is on the way
f. Have been instructed to inform the entry group of other work in progress or
any hazardous operating conditions that may affect the entry group.
Note: In the event of an emergency, standby personnel should warn the
entry group and provide necessary instructions.
g. Maintain communications (radio, walkie talkie, voice, hand signals) with
personnel inside the confined space.
h. Maintain contact (sight or radio call or both) with at least one additional
person outside the confined space, who may have other duties in the
immediate area.
3. For General Entry
For a general entry, ensure that the standby knows the elements of For Any
Entry, above. The general-entry standby may also attend to more than one
entrance, depending on the:
a. Proximity of the openings
b. Activity level inside
4. For Special Entry
Ensure that the standby knows the elements of For Any Entry, above.
For a special entry, assign a dedicated standby to each single entrance.
Equipment is described under Training and Equipment, above. Standbys must be
capable of donning an SCBA in 15 seconds.

C. Routes of Entry
Personnel should enter confined spaces through side openings within 1 meter
(3.5 feet) of the working levels whenever possible.
Note: Routes of entry above one meter are normally considered top entry points.
People entering a confined space through a top entry should have available the
special rescue equipment described later in this guideline.
D. Safety and Protective Equipment

1. For Any Entry
Require personnel to wear or have available the following special safety and
protective equipment while entering or working in a confined space:
a. Approved protective clothing
b. Approved ground-fault-circuit interrupters on all electrical equipment greater
than 12 volts
c. A first aid kit in the immediate area outside of the space
2. For Special Entries
During special entries, when wearing respiratory protection, or when performing
hot work, personnel should wear in addition to the equipment required For
Any Entry, above a safety harness with an attached life line that meets the
following specifications:
a. The harness should be capable of suspending a person in the upright position.
Note: People should not wear wristlets.
b. The life line should consist of a rope with a minimum 1.3 cm (-inch)
diameter and 2450 kg (5,400-pound) test whose free end should be anchored
outside the space.
Note: Management may waive the life-line requirement if the life line
could become entangled and hinder rescue.
3. For Top Entries
In addition to the equipment listed above For Any Entry and For Special Entries,
provide for top entries (routes of entry above 1 meter or 3.5 feet) a
mechanical hoist in good working order or other effective device for lifting
persons out of the space.
Note: It may not be possible to lift a disabled worker manually from a confined
space.
E. Hot Work
The supervisor should issue and approve a Hot Work Permit before anyone welds,
cuts, burns, grinds, or chips inside a confined space.

When carrying out hot work in a confined space,

1. Prohibit a source of ignition being taken into a confined space until tests verify
the atmosphere is below one percent of the LEL.
2. Minimize burning, welding, and torch-cutting activities as they consume oxygen
and produce metal fumes. If there are such activities, monitor oxygen and carbon
monoxide periodically.
3. Provide respirators that are effective for welding fumes. See Health, Safety and
Environmental Guideline SO.66 Respiratory Protection, in this manual.
4. Locate local exhaust ventilation as near as practical to the welding operation.
Note: Air flow must not only be away from the welder and any other workers
but must also be sufficient to remove fumes and smoke.
5. Leave gas cylinders outside the space, in an upright position.
6. Check welding hoses and cables thoroughly for leaks and cracks before working
with them inside a confined space.
7. Remove unused gas hoses from inside the confined space.
8. Require people to wear safety harnesses with life lines attached while they are
conducting hot work in confined spaces.
9. Post a standby trained in fire fighting and equipped with adequate fire
extinguishing equipment immediately outside the confined space.
VI. Post-entry Requirements

The person-in-charge should
A. Ensure that the space is clean and clear of hazards.
B. Arrange to have
1. Tools, equipment, and debris removed from the confined space at the end of the
job.
2. The space remain secure until it is closed.
3. The entry permit removed.
4. A copy of the permit(s) retained until the work is completed.

Resources
Dept. of Industrial Relations, Division of Labor, Cal OSHA. CAC
Title 8, Article 108, Section 5156-5159 in Confined Spaces. South San Francisco, CA:
Barclays, August, 1990.
Dept. of Labor, OSHA. CFR 29, Subpart J, Section 1910.146 in Permit Entry Confined
Spaces. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, January, 1993.
Dept of Labor. OSHA.CFR 29, Subpart I, Section 1910.134 in Respiratory Protection.
Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, May, 1984.
Dept. of Labor, OSHA. CFR 29, Subpart C, Section 1926.21 in Safety Training and
Education. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, July, 1986.
Dept. of Labor, OSHA. CFR 29, Subpart R, Section 1910.268 in Telecommunications,
Requirements Prior to Entering Manholes and Unvented Vaults. Washington, DC:
U.S. Government Printing Office, November, 1978.
Dept of Labor, OSHA. CFR 29, Subpart Q, Section 1910.252 in Welding, Cutting and
Brazing. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, December, 1990.
Guidelines for Confined Work in the Petroleum Industry. API Publication 2217. 1st ed.
Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, June, 1984.
Guidelines for Work in Inert Confined Spaces in the Petroleum Industry. API Publication
2217A. 1st ed. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, November, 1987.
Safe Entry and Cleaning of Petroleum Storage Tanks. API Publication 2015. 4th ed.
Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, January, 1991.
Safety Requirements for Confined Spaces. Des Plaines, IL: American Society of Safety
Engineers; American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z117.1, October 1989.
Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological
Exposure Indices. Cincinnati, OH: American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists (ACGIH), Latest Edition.

Guideline SO.2 Appendix
Confined Space Entry

Flowchart
On the following pages are two flowcharts Responsibilities and Elements that
represent a condensed version of this guideline.

Responsibilities
Supervisor
Employees/contractors Hazards are identified

Workers are
are trained in: on entry permit.
provided with
Safe entry procedures Workers follow proper
proper safety and
Rescue methods Permit & entry tags are isolation procedures.
personal protective
Testing space issued and used
equipment (PPE).
Safety requirements correctly.
Person-in-Charge
Proper isolation &

Permit procedures Standby personnel Required PPE and
ongoing monitoring
followed. present. safety equipment used.
undertaken.
Personnel Entering Space
Comply with all

procedures.

Elements
Training
ENTRY PERSONNEL GAS TESTER STANDBY

Respiratory protection Topics for entry Topics for entry
Entry procedures personnel personnel
Confined space preparation Use, limitations, cali- Fire regulations & hot
Hazard ID, evaluation, bration, inspection of work procedures
control testing equipment Warning signal
Protective equipment Conditions that may system operation
Standby & emergency affect testing CPR and first aid
requirements, incl. rescue procedures
Lifeline, safety belt &
harness operations
Documentation of training
Pre-entry Considerations
PERSONAL PERMITTING ISOLATION/ VENTILATION CLEANING ATMOSPHERIC

INFORMATION Completion LOCKOUT Natural Empty TESTING
& PLANS & approval Isolation Mechanical Flush/wash Testing
Identifying Posting -Install blinds Purge equipment
hazards Permit -Disconnect needed
Training content & move out Initial testing
Pre-entry -Equipment of alignment Retesting
setup name/# -Double block Recording test
Rescue -Equipment and bleed results
plan location Lockout
-Possible -Securing
hazards switch with
-Testing padlock in
requirem'ts off position
-Isolation -Removing
measures fuses
-PPE -Disconnect-
-Duration of ing leads
permit Blockout
-Approval -Release
signature hydraulic/
pneumatic
pressure
-Vent de-
pressurized
system
-Use blocks,
bars, chains
Tagout

Elements (Cont'd)
Entry & Standby

Requirements
STANDBY ENTRY SAFETY HOT WORK

Req'mts for ROUTES & PPE
ENTRY Ignition
any entry Side entry Any entry
Ventilation sources
Limitations Top entry Special entry
Routes of Hazards
for general Top entry
entry Ventilation
Special safety entry Handling,
equipment Limitations storing,
Personal for special inspecting
protective entry welding
equipment equipment
Standby Safety
requirements equipment
Entry permit for entry
requirements Equipment
Monitoring for standby/
Additional fire watch
precautions
(i.e., hot work)
Post-entry
Requirements
Site cleanup
Space
security
until closed
Removal of
permit
Job docu-
mentation

Safe Operations: Safety Lockout and Tagout
Guideline SO.3
Lockout and
Tagout
Purpose
This guideline provides a consistent approach for the development of Lockout and
Tagout procedures which should be used during maintenance or repair work, to prevent
accidental operation of equipment or release of energy.
Content
Guideline SO.3-2
I. Lockout and Tagout Equipment SO.3-2
II. Pre-Job Planning SO.3-4
III. Electrical Isolation SO.3-4
IV. Mechanical Isolation SO.3-4
V. Initial Lockout and Tagout SO.3-5
VI. Multiple Lockout and Tagout Procedure SO.3-6
VII. Removal of Padlocks and Tags SO.3-6
Resources SO.3-7

Lockout and Tagout Safe Operations: Safety
General Overview
Appropriate Lockout and Tagout procedures should be followed during maintenance and
repair work on equipment connected to or containing mechanical, electrical or other
energy sources. The purpose of Lockout and Tagout procedures is to prevent the
accidental release of energy sources which could result in injury to personnel or damage
to equipment.
Lockout and Tagout is generally accomplished by isolating the equipment to be worked
on from external energy sources, neutralizing internal energy sources, placing padlocks
and warning tags on isolation devices, and establishing a system to manage the process
changes caused by isolating the equipment. Lockout and Tagout does not usually apply
to normal operating activities such as collecting samples, replacing pressures gauges, or
making routine operational equipment checks and adjustments. Some systems are
designed to normally operate with components locked or chained in position (e.g.,
pressure safety valves locked open or containment drain valves locked closed). These
systems should be managed in a manner consistent with Lockout and Tagout procedures.
When new equipment is installed, or when existing equipment is replaced, repaired,
renovated or modified, it should be designed to accept appropriate lockout devices,
blinds or other methods of isolating and neutralizing energy sources.
Site-specific Lockout and Tagout procedures should be developed locally to ensure
consistency with local management systems and operating practices. Local procedures
should specify the responsibilities of personnel involved in Lockout and Tagout
Procedures.
Guideline
I. Lockout and Tagout Equipment

The following equipment is normally used for Lockout and Tagout:
A. Padlocks
1. Locks used for Lockout and Tagout should be keyed padlocks. Each padlock
should be keyed differently. Supervisors should retain spare keys for each
padlock assigned to their work area.
2. Padlocks should be color-coded to identify the group which owns them. The
following color code is recommended for padlocks:
YellowOperations
RedElectricians
BlueMaintenance (except electricians)
GreenInstrument Technicians
WhiteFacilities Engineering

3. Depending on the facility (size and number of personnel), padlocks may be

individually assigned or placed on a lock board for common use. A log should
be maintained with each lock board, which identifies who is using each padlock
and where the padlock is being used.
4. Padlocks used for Lockout and Tagout should not be used for other purposes.
B. Tags
1. Tags should be used to identify locations where equipment has been altered for
Lockout and Tagout, including valves, flanges, skillets, spectacle blinds,
switches and blocking devices. The tag should identify the person who applied
it, the reason the tag was applied, and the date the tag was applied.
2. Tags may be color-coded to identify the group which owns them. Color-coding
of tags should be consistent with the color-coding of padlocks.
3. Tags may be multi-part so that sections can be torn off and retained in a control
room or other central location.
4. Tags should be markable, weather resistant and contain an eyelet so they can be
fastened to equipment with a tie-wrap or wire.
5. Tags should be multi-lingual as needed to communicate information and
potential hazards to the local workforce.
C. Bar Clips
Where multiple padlocks are required at a single lockout point, bar clips (multi-lock
hasps) or similar devices should be used.
D. Chains
Chains may be used with padlocks to secure valve handles or other equipment.
E. Blind Flanges, Skillets and Spectacle Blinds

Appropriate blind flanges, skillets and spectacle blinds should be provided at each
facility to ensure that Lockout and Tagout can be performed safely. They must be
rated (working pressure and size) for the lines and process conditions where they
will be used.
F. Built-In and Customized Energy Isolating Devices

New equipment should be designed with appropriate built-in isolation devices so that
Lockout and Tagout padlocks can be easily installed. Older equipment might require
the use of customized attachments (e.g., special lockout bars, hasps to cover
operating buttons, sliding-rod devices which can be extended and locked in position
to prevent operation of control handles) so that padlocks can be attached.

II. Pre-Job Planning

Prior to starting any maintenance or repair operation, the person-in-charge and other
personnel involved should review the work to be performed and develop a pre-job plan.
The pre-job plan may be formal or informal, depending on the complexity of the work.
The pre-job plan should identify any significant hazards involved, including potential
energy sources. If potential energy sources are identified, the pre-job plan should also
include:
A. Identification of all energy sources associated with the work.
B. Identification of energy isolation devices and other Lockout and Tagout equipment
that will be needed, including the equipment listed in Section I.
C. Any special hazards or considerations involved.
D. The possibility that energy may need to be released during the work to test or
position equipment.
E. Procedures to notify all affected employees.
F. Procedures to document the application of Lockout and Tagout and identification of
where Lockout and Tagout records will be maintained (log books, blind tag boards,
drawings, etc.).
G. Responsibilities for all of the above.
III. Electrical Isolation

A. Equipment should be carefully reviewed to ensure all electrical energy sources have
been identified.
B. Equipment should be isolated from electrical energy sources by the opening and
locking of all main power supplies. If the main power supply cannot be locked out,
the equipment should be physically disconnected from power sources by a qualified
electrician. Lockouts of local switches may leave other portions of the equipment
energized. Special attention should be given to equipment connected to alternate
power sources.
C. Large capacitors should be discharged.
D. After the equipment has been isolated from the main power supply, local electrical
switches and start/stop stations should be activated to confirm the isolation is
complete, then turned back off and tagged Do Not Operate.
IV. Mechanical Isolation

A. Potential sources of mechanical energy (e.g., pressurized fluids, springs, elevated
components, rotating equipment and gears) should be neutralized or physically

blocked out before work starts, to prevent unintentional energizing or movement of

equipment. Examples include:
1. Bleeding down and/or isolating process fluid, steam, air, or hydraulic lines and
cylinders.
2. Blocking out gears and other mechanisms.
3. Placing dies, lifts, or any equipment that might descend, slide, fall or roll in their
zero energy or neutral position (typically the lowest position), or installing
physical blocks to prevent equipment from moving.
4. Releasing coiled springs and any spring-loaded devices.
5. Chaining rotating equipment.
B. The preferred method for mechanically isolating equipment from process lines is
disconnecting the lines and installing blind flanges, skillets or spectacles blinds.
Blind flanges, skillets and spectacle blinds must be rated (working pressure and size)
for the lines and process conditions where they will be used.
C. Double block and bleed may also be used to isolate equipment from process lines.
Bleed lines should be carefully checked to ensure they are not plugged and that any
seepage from the bleeder is readily and safely detectable.
D. Isolation by use of a single block valve is generally not acceptable. Exceptions
should be made only under carefully controlled and supervised conditions.
E. All valves used for mechanical isolation should be locked out, either on the valve
body or by use of a chain through the handle.
F. Mechanical isolation in preparation for confined space entry must be achieved by
installation of blind flanges or skillets, or disconnection and removal of all
associated lines.
V. Initial Lockout and Tagout

After completing the pre-job plan described in Section II, the person-in-charge of the
Lockout and Tagout operation (normally the facility operator) should:
A. Notify all affected personnel of the nature of the work to be performed.
B. Shut down the equipment by normal procedures.
C. Electrically isolate and lock out the equipment as described in Section III.
D. Mechanically isolate and lock out the equipment as described in Section IV.
E. Apply an appropriate tag on each padlock and at each location where equipment has
been altered for lockout and tagout, including valves, flanges, skillets, spectacle
blinds, switches and blocking devices. The tag should identify the person who
applied it, the reason the tag was applied, and the date the tag was applied.
F. Notify affected employees that the initial Lockout and Tagout procedure is complete.

G. Document the application of Lockout and Tagout as described in the Pre-Job Plan in
Section II.
H. If the person-in-charge is performing the maintenance or repair work without
involvement from other groups, then following completion of the above steps, the
work may proceed. If individuals from other groups will be involved in the work,
then the person-in-charge should advise and assist them with the Multiple Lockout
and Tagout procedure described in the following section.
VI. Multiple Lockout and Tagout Procedure

If more than one group (e.g. Operators, Mechanics, Electricians) will be involved in the
maintenance or repair work:
A. The person-in-charge (the first group locking out) should use a bar clip (multi-lock
hasp) to perform lockout as described in Section V.
B. One authorized representative from each of the other groups involved in the work
should then place their padlock and tag on the bar clip.
C. The authorized representative from each group is responsible for all employees from
their group during the Lockout and Tagout procedure. Authorized representatives
should not remove their padlocks until they have ensured that members of their
group are informed of the status of the work and have moved to a safe location.
VII. Removal of Padlocks and Tags

Padlocks and tags used for Lockout and Tagout should only be removed as follows:
A. Following the completion of maintenance or repairs,
1. The person-in-charge should perform a final check of the equipment to ensure it
is ready to be reactivated.
2. Authorized representatives of other groups should remove any padlocks and tags
installed by their group.
3. The person-in-charge should remove any padlocks and tags that they installed,
and then proceed to reactivate the equipment as appropriate.
4. Document that the Lockout and Tagout job has been completed and notify
appropriate personnel.
B. If Lockout and Tagout is in progress during crew or shift change, employees who
have installed padlocks and tags should either;
1. Turn over their keys to their relief and explain the nature of the work underway,
including any special hazards or considerations involved, or
2. Remove their padlocks at the same time that their relief is installing their own
padlocks, and then also explain the nature of the work underway, including any
special hazards or considerations involved.

3. The person-in-charge should also advise all such incoming personnel of the
nature of the work underway and the significant aspects of the pre-job plan.
C. If the nature of the work being performed requires that padlocks be removed so that
energy can be released to test or position equipment, the following procedures
should be followed:
1. Identify safety precautions in the pre-job plan.
2. Notify all affected personnel.
3. The person-in-charge should physically inspect the work site and equipment
involved.
4. Remove appropriate lockout devices.
5. Energize the equipment and proceed with testing or positioning.
6. Do not leave the worksite unattended while Lockout and Tagout devices have
been removed for testing or positioning.
7. Once testing or positioning is complete, de-energize and reinstall lockout devices
as appropriate.
D. In an emergency situation, padlocks and tags may be removed by a supervisor who
has retained the spare key. In doing so, the supervisor assumes responsibility for the
ongoing Lockout and Tagout procedure.
Resources
Lockout and Tagout Procedures, Loss Prevention Guide No. 3, Chevron, March 1987.
Lockout and Tagout Procedures, SOP Manual, Cabinda Gulf Oil Company Limited, 17
February 1994.

Safe Operations: Safety Personal Protective Equipment
Guideline SO.4
Personal Protective
Equipment
Purpose
The purpose of this guideline is to provide general information about Personal Protective
Equipment.
Content
Guideline SO.4-2
I. General Requirements SO.4-2
II. Head Protection SO.4-2
III. Eye Protection SO.4-3
IV. Hearing Protection SO.4-3
V. Hand Protection SO.4-4
VI. Body Protection SO.4-5
VII. Respiratory Protection SO.4-5
VIII. Personal Flotation Devices (PFD) SO.4-5
IX. Foot Protection SO.4-6
Resources SO.4-6

Personal Protective Equipment Safe Operations: Safety
General Overview
Personal protective equipment (PPE) is clothing or equipment designed and used
specifically for the protection of a worker from a specific type of hazard. PPE should be
used when engineering designs and operating or maintenance practices do not provide a
safe work environment. COPI operations should periodically conduct surveys of work
areas to assess personal protective equipment needs.
Guideline
I. General Requirements
COPI operations should determine which hazards exist that are capable of causing injury
by physical contact, absorption, or inhalation. Personal protective equipment should be
selected and used to help minimize the risk of these hazards. Local safety and
environmental groups can usually provide information and recommendations on different
types of PPE. Employees should be made aware of the need for PPE, and should be
properly trained in its use.
A. Storage and Maintenance

1. PPE should be stored in areas that are accessible and clearly identified.
2. PPE should be maintained in sanitary and reliable condition.
3. Responsibility should be assigned for cleaning and storing PPE.
B. Contractor Responsibilities
1. Contractors should provide PPE for their employees.
2. Contractor employees should wear protective equipment whenever specified by
the Company Representative and/or when required by the job.
C. Visitor Responsibilities
1. Visitors should be expected to comply with local PPE requirements.
2. Hosts should ensure that visitors have and use appropriate PPE.
II. Head Protection

Hard hats protect the head from impact and penetration from falling or flying objects,
overhead spills of hot or hazardous liquids, and electric shock.
A. Wearing Hard Hats

Hard hats should be worn under the following types of conditions:
1. At construction sites

2. When working on or near hoists, A-frames, or overhead gantries

3. In any area where overhead work is occurring or conditions require head
protectionin and around tanks and low overhead work areas
4. In areas where other departments or companies require hard hats
5. In any posted areas
B. Hard Hat Maintenance and Storage

1. Inspect regularly and replace at the first sign of cracking, dents, or other damage
2. Store out of direct sunlight
3. Use only mild soap solution to clean the hard hat and its suspension
III. Eye Protection

Eye protection should be used when there is a reasonable probability of injury that can
be prevented by such equipment.
A. Safety Glasses
1. Are worn for impact protection
2. Should be worn in all industrial (non-office) work areas
B. Chemical Goggles
Chemical goggles are worn to protect against splash, flying chips, dust, and
whenever there is exposure to materials that are capable of causing irreversible
damage to the eyes. Examples of work that may require chemical goggles are:
1. Light chipping
2. Dusty work
3. Cutting wire
4. Using grinders
5. Handling mineral wool or fiberglass
IV. Hearing Protection

Ear plugs or ear muffs should be worn in areas where exposure exceeds recommended
limits. For complete details on hearing protection and conservation, refer to Health,
Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.67 Hearing Conservation.

V. Hand Protection
Gloves should be worn when hands are exposed to hazardous substances or to sharp,
rough, or hot objects.
A. Types of Glove
The type of glove selected should be the one most suited to protect against the hazard
and still provide enough dexterity to do the job.
1. Leather Palm Gloves
a. Resist heat, sparks, sharp and rough objects, and provide some cushioning
against blows
b. Are often worn by maintenance workers performing heavy duty work
c. Should be worn when handling pallets, wood, wire, hot equipment, hot
sample containers, and/or drums
d. Provide minimal protection from hydrocarbons and other liquids.
2. Impervious Gloves (Neoprene, PVC, Nitrile)
a. The glove selected should be resistant to the material being handled
b. Workers should wear them when handling petroleum products and corrosive
chemicals such as acids and caustic
c. Gauntlet-type gloves, which extend above the cuff and protect the wrist and
forearm, should be worn when there is a possibility of splashing
3. Cotton Gloves
a. Protect against dirt and abrasion
b. Are not heavy enough for use with rough or sharp materials
c. Are suitable for lighter work
4. Latex Gloves
a. Provide maximum dexterity but limited protection
b. Are intended for use in very light service to keep oil, grease, and liquids off
the skin
c. Are used primarily in laboratory
5. Miscellaneous Gloves
a. Welders gloves are made from treated leather that provides protection
against heat, welding sparks, splatter, and hot slag
b. Insulated gloves are used in laboratories for handling distillation pots and
other hot objects

c. Fire fighting gloves are leather and are lined with a flame retardant fleece
material
d. Electrician gloves are used to protect against electrical shock which could
result from accidental contact with energized electrical equipment.
VI. Body Protection

Body protection will assist in keeping acidic, corrosive, oily, dirty, or dusty materials off
of the body. The type of protection recommended depends upon the nature of the hazard.
A. Impervious Clothing
Impervious clothing provides protection from splash and should be worn during jobs
where it is possible to come in contact with highly acidic or corrosive materials.
Such jobs may include:
1. Breaking lines
2. Opening equipment
3. Jobs where liquid materials could splash or spray
B. Disposable Coveralls and Suits

Disposable Tyvek coveralls and suits are designed to keep dust and dry material off
the worker. They provide minimal protection against liquids and oily substances.
They are usually worn during:
1. Clean-up work
2. HAZMAT response
3. Asbestos removal
4. Tank cleaning
5. Dumping of specified dry materials.
VII. Respiratory Protection

Respiratory protective equipment should be used in areas where engineering design and
operating or maintenance practices do not provide and maintain a safe breathing
environment. For additional information on recommended equipment, refer to Health,
Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.66 Respiratory Protection.
VIII. Personal Flotation Devices (PFD)

A. Wearing PFDs
Personnel should wear PFDs that are securely fastened, snugly fitted, and in good
condition:

1. When transferring to or from any boat

2. When working below the main work deck of an offshore structure, where full
hand rails are not provided
3. When outside the cabin or wheelhouse of a boat
4. When riding in open or semi-open boats
5. When operating small boats
6. At any other time (fog, haze, rough seas, etc.) that boat captains, supervisors or
tool pushers deem necessary
For additional information on personal flotation devices, refer to Health, Safety and
Environmental Guideline SO.10 Water Safety.
IX. Foot Protection

Appropriate footwear should be required in all non-office areas of the facility.
A. Safety Shoes
1. Soles should be notched or grooved to prevent slipping on oily or wet surfaces.
2. They should consist of a leather shoe/boot with oil-resistant soles that have a
heel.
3. Rubber boots or overshoes can be worn to protect the feet and shoes from
excessive water, oil, muck, or corrosive material.
Resources
Personal Protective Equipment, Code of Federal Regulations 1910.132-139,
Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
Protective Headwear, ANSI Z89.1 - 1986, American National Standards Institute.
Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, ANSI Z87.1 - 1989,
American National Standards Institute.
Personal Protection - Protective Footwear, ANSI Z41 - 1991, American National
Standards Institute.

Safe Operations: Safety General Work Permits
Guideline SO.5
General
Work Permits
Purpose
This guideline describes the use of General Work Permit procedures to help ensure that
non-routine or complex construction, maintenance and repair work is performed safety
and efficiently.
Content
Guideline SO.5-2
I. Work Requiring a General Permit SO.5-2
II. Pre-Job Planning SO.5-2
III. General Work Permit Procedures SO.5-2
Resource SO.5-3
General Overview
General Work Permit procedures should be followed for non-routine construction,
maintenance and repair work to help ensure the work is performed safely and efficiently.
They can be used for pre-job start-up reviews to identify hazards, other permits which
might be required, how many people will be involved, etc. Site-specific General Work
Permit procedures should be developed locally to ensure consistency with local

General Work Permits Safe Operations: Safety
management systems and operating practices. Local procedures should specify the
responsibilities of personnel involved in the General Work Permit process. Local
procedures should also identify which work activities require a general work permit and
the process for issuing and using permits.
If the work involves a potential source of ignition in the work area, a Hot Work Permit
should supplement the General Work Permit (refer to Health, Safety and Environmnetal
Guideline SO.35 Hot Work).
Guideline
I. Work Requiring a General Permit

Local General Work Permit procedures should describe what types of activities require
the use of a General Work Permit. General Work Permits are normally used for
non-routine or complex construction, maintenance and repair work which involves
significant hazards, such as:
A. Large construction sites, to coordinate traffic flows, use of utilities, waste disposal
and impact on local communities.
B. The presence of electrical cables, telephone cables or pipe lines above or below
ground.
C. The use of scaffolding or cranes in the vicinity of in-service equipment, such as
process equipment, piping, conduit, electrical cables and telephone lines.
D. Excavation work, particularly if shoring is involved.
E. Radiation, such as handling x-ray sources.
F. The presence of flammable or toxic gases, vapors, oils or chemicals, particularly
during the opening and/or cleaning of tanks, vessels or process lines.
II. Pre-Job Planning

Prior to starting any construction, maintenance or repair operation, the person-in-charge
and other personnel involved should review the work to be performed and develop a
pre-job plan. The initial pre-job plan may be formal or informal, depending on the
complexity of the work. The pre-job plan should identify any significant hazards
involved, and should identify whether the work requires the use of a General Work
Permit.
III. General Work Permit Procedures

General Work Permit procedures normally require the following steps:
A. The person-in-charge of the work reviews the hazards identified in the pre-job plan,
and identifies appropriate safety precautions that must be followed during the work.
The person-in-charge notes these conditions on the General Work Permit, and

Safe Operations: Safety General Work Permits
applies for management approval for the work to commence. Permit conditions may
include:
1. The scope of work and the extent of the work area involved.
2. Inspection and testing requirements, either initial or periodic.
3. Time limitation for the work permit based on working conditions and the hazards
involved. If the time limit specified needs to be exceeded, the original permit
should be renewed or a new permit should be issued following a review of the
work conditions. Permits are typically issued for no more than 12 hours or for a
single work shift.
4. Required personal protective equipment.
5. Other required safety and fire protection equipment.
6. Other special permit requirements, such as Hot Work, Confined Space Entry,
Lockout and Tagout or Simultaneous Operations permits.
7. Other special requirements to address the specific hazards involved (restricted
areas, signs and tags, communication equipment, etc.).
B. Management approves the General Work Permit and retains a copy.
C. Key designated employees sign off on the permit before work proceeds. Their
signatures indicate acknowledgment of the hazards involved, acknowledgment of
required safety precautions, certification that tests have been performed, etc.
D. Employees perform their work in a manner consistent with the requirements of the
permit.
E. A new permit must be issued if scope of work changes or hazard conditions vary
from original permit.
F. General Work Permit documentation is retained for a specified period of time at a
specified location.
Resource
Tengizchevroil Safety Instruction SI-105 General Work Permit, 01 January 1995.

Safe Operations: Safety Contractor Health, Safety and Environmental Program
Guideline SO.7
Contractor Health, Safety and

Environmental Program
Purpose
Contractors play a critical role in the overall health, safety and environmental protection
performance of Chevron Overseas Petroleum (COPI) operations. Contractors should be
expected to perform to the same high health, safety and environmental standards as
COPIs own employees. Each COPI operation should implement an appropriate
Contractor Health, Safety and Environmental Program (CHSEP) which describes the
roles and responsibilities of contractors and of COPI employees who administer
contracts and supervise contractors. CHSEP should be designed to:
Protect people and the environment
Enhance work productivity, quality and scheduling
Improve selection, monitoring and evaluation of contractor performance
Promote good working relationships with contractors
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information that COPI operations can use to
develop CHSEPs. In conjunction with this guideline, the COPI HSE group has
developed and published a COPI Contractor Health, Safety and Environmental Model
Program. The model program includes additional detail and examples of evaluation
forms, checklists and standard contract addendum that can be used directly or modified
to suit local conditions.

Contractor Health, Safety and Environmental Program Safe Operations: Safety
Content
Guideline SO.7-3
I. Introduction SO.7-3
II. Contractor Pre-Qualification SO.7-4
III. Contractor Selection SO.7-5
IV. Pre-Job Considerations SO.7-8
V. Work-in-Progress SO.7-9
VI. Post-Work Evaluation SO.7-11
Resources SO.7-12
General Overview
This guideline identifies important elements which should be addressed in CHSEPs that
are developed for use in COPI operations. These elements include:
Use of Pre-Qualification Forms (PQFs) to collect background information on
contractors and to identify contractors who meet minimum health, safety and
environmental requirements for performing work for COPI
Identifying and communicating health, safety and environmental requirements and
scope of work to contractors during contractor selection processes
Use of health, safety and environmental criteria, including PQFs, in contractor
selection processes
Aligning contractors health, safety and environmental management systems with
COPIs
Monitoring contractors health, safety and environmental performance while work is
in progress
Conducting post-job evaluations of contractors overall health, safety and
environmental performance
The first three elements listed above are especially critical, since they take place at the
project scoping stage and during the front-end loading portion of contract
administration. COPI has the greatest opportunity to influence cost, quality, schedule
and ultimate contractor performance during this part of the project/contract process.
Most of the principles that apply to bid contracts also apply to non-bid contracts, and
both types of contracts should be addressed by CHSEPs.
CHSEPs are only one component of the overall process used by COPI to select
contractors and manage contractor performance. Consideration of health, safety and
environmental requirements should be integrated into and made an essential element of
the broader process. Also, contractor availability and capability varies widely for COPI
operations around the world. CHSEPs should take into account local limitation and the

supply of potential contractors, the scope of work typically performed by contractors,

levels of risk inherent in the operations, and local contract management practices and
resources.
CHSEPs also have critically important legal components. The ultimate ability of COPI
to enforce health, safety and environmental requirements against a contractor is through
the language of the contract itself. In addition, some aspects of a CHSEP, such as
establishment of Approved Contractor lists and contractor evaluation and selection
processes, can have important legal implications and consequences for COPI.
Therefore, it is essential that appropriate COPI attorneys participate in the development
and implementation of any CHSEP. In particular, legal counsel need to assure that the
proposed scope of work, invitation to bid, and language of the contract appropriately
address relevant health, safety and environmental issues and will protect the company as
effectively as possible in the event of later disputes or litigation. This may include such
things as assuring that:
Any proposed contract attachment specifying health, safety and environmental
requirements has been approved by COPI Negotiations and Legal (N&L) and that
language in the contract appropriately incorporates and is consistent with the
attachment.
Contract language for enforcing health, safety and environmental requirements, and
relating to insurance and indemnification, is consistent, adequate and appropriate.
The contract requires the contractor to be responsible for subcontractor health,
safety and environmental performance and COPI will be protected if the contractor
fails to fulfill that responsibility.
All relevant health, safety and environmental-related requirements should be clearly and
formally incorporated into the contract and provided to prospective contractors,
including as part of a bid package where relevant. Prospective contractors need to be as
fully informed of COPIs expectations and requirements as early as possible in the
contracting process. This will help contractors assure that their bids and proposed
contract costs, time schedules and work commitments reflect and address those
expectations and requirements. These should be clearly identified in the bid and fully
negotiated and agreed on with COPI before the contract is signed.
Guideline
I. Introduction
A Contractor Health, Safety and Environmental Program (CHSEP) should generally start
with an introduction which addresses:
A. Company Policies
1. How the CHSEP relates to the Chevrons Protecting People and the Environment
(PP&E) policy and The Chevron Way policy.

2. COPIs commitment to health, safety and environmental protection.

3. COPIs expectation that contractor employees will perform to an equivalent level
of health, safety and environmental protection as COPI employees.
4. COPIs intention to monitor and evaluate contractors health, safety and
environmental performance.
5. COPIs intention to use health, safety and environmental criteria as an integral
part of contractor selection.
6. Legal considerations as described in the General Overview above.
B. Roles and Responsibilities

1. The health, safety and environmental-related roles and responsibilities of
contractor management, representatives, employees and sub-contractors.
2. The health, safety and environmental-related roles and responsibilities of
contractors and of COPI employees involved in administering contracts,
selecting contractors, supervising contract employees and evaluating contractors
performance. This guideline generally uses the term COPI representative to
include these roles. CHSEPs should be very specific about who will fill these
roles locally.
II. Contractor Pre-Qualification

Contractor pre-qualification programs are typically designed to identify contractors who
meet minimum health, safety and environmental requirements for performing work for
the COPI organization. These programs are most appropriate for established operations
or major projects that can track historical and ongoing health, safety and environmental
performance of contractors. Contractor pre-qualification programs typically work as
follows:
A. Minimum acceptable health, safety and environmental criteria for contractors are
established. These criteria should be based on Chevrons requirements and
contractors historical performance and current capabilities. For special projects or
work requiring special skills, more rigorous criteria might be applied. For small
contractors performing low hazard work, simplified acceptance criteria might be
used.
B. Risk ranking categories (high, medium, low) might also be established to
differentiate between contractors meeting the minimum acceptable requirements.
C. A Pre-Qualification Form (PQF) is developed to help determine if contractors meet
minimum acceptable requirements.
D. PQFs are sent to all current contractors and all prospective contractors as contracts
are renewed or new contracts are developed. Contractors are notified that
information submitted on PQFs, and health, safety and environmental factors in
general, will be important criteria in awarding contracts.

E. Contractors are evaluated on the basis of the PQFs and other criteria, such as past
work performed for COPI and on-site visits to contractor facilities. Contractors that
meet the minimum acceptable criteria are placed on an Approved Contractors List.
If risk ranking is used, each contractor is assigned a risk classification.
F. COPI representatives are instructed to use only contractors that meet minimum
acceptable health, safety and environmental criteria, and to include risk rankings as
an important criterion in bid selection.
G. Contractors already on the Approved Contractors List are periodically asked to
update their PQFs, and the Approved Contractors List is updated accordingly.
Contractor pre-qualification programs can be used by current and prospective contractors
to evaluate their own health, safety and environmental programs and make any needed
improvements. In emergencies, it might not be feasible to pre-qualify contractors before
work is performed. In such cases, COPI supervisors should give more stringent
oversight as the work is performed.
III. Contractor Selection

A. Contract Health, Safety and Environmental Requirements
Health, safety and environmental requirements should be established during the
scoping process for contracts. For major projects or work with special requirements,
contractors should be included in scoping exercises to help ensure alignment. Some
health, safety and environmental requirements typically addressed in contracts are :
1. Responsibility for Compliance
2. Entrance to Property / Traffic and Vehicles
3. Smoking, Drug and Alcohol Prohibitions / Testing
4. Violence Prevention / Weapons Control
5. Permit-required Work
6. Pressure Testing
7. Explosives and Hazardous Materials
8. Fire Protection / Emergency Response
9. Medical Treatment
10. Personal Protective Equipment
11. Housekeeping
12. Incident Reporting
13. Environmental Protection
14. Industrial Hygiene Monitoring

15. Safety Incentives / Penalties

16. Termination and Warnings
Basic health, safety and environmental requirements are typically addressed in
standard contract addendum. If a pre-approved standard contract addendum is used,
it should be amended to include any special health, safety and environmental
requirements identified. Special requirements might include:
1. A Site Health, Safety and Environmental Protection Work Plan to be developed
by the contractor
2. Periodic health, safety and environmental performance reporting by the
contractor
3. Periodic health, safety and environmental audits by COPI and contractor
representatives
4. A Pre-Job Checklist, prepared by the company or the contractor, that the
contractor must complete prior to starting work.
B. Selecting Contractors for Consideration

In general, only contractors who have been pre-qualified and placed on an Approved
Contractors List should be considered for contracts. If risk ranking has been used,
then high risk contractors should only be considered for use if adequate medium or
low risk contractors are not available. Exceptions can be made for simple, low risk
work or in emergency situations.
Depending on the scope of the work, other health, safety and environmental
information to consider when selecting contractors for consideration might include:
1. Detailed reviews of contractors PQF forms
2. Interviews with contractors
3. Visits to contractors work locations
4. Interviews with other COPI organizations or other companies that the contractor
has worked for
5. Resources available to the contractor, and ability to meet COPI, government and
industry requirements
C. Informing Contractor of Health, Safety and Environmental Requirements

It is critical that contractors who have been selected for consideration be fully
informed of the health, safety and environmental requirements of the work before
contracts are awarded. They should be provided with copies of any standard contract
addendum and other relevant company requirements. They should also be informed
that outstanding health, safety and environmental performance and high quality
health, safety and environmental programs are key elements in COPIs contractor
selection process.

If warranted by the job scope, COPI representatives can hold on or off-site pre-bid
meetings with potential contractors. This provides the opportunity for bidders to
evaluate job site conditions and to obtain clarification of site-specific health, safety
and environmental requirements. Health, safety and environmental topics which
might be covered at pre-bid meetings include:
1. Identification of key health, safety and environmental personnel
2. Description of contractor pre-qualification processes
3. Review of technical requirements
a. Site health, safety and environmental protection requirements
b. Access and egress
c. Facilities/utilities
d. Permit-required work
4. Other requirements
a. Milestone dates
b. Incident investigation/reporting protocol
c. Medical treatment
d. Emergency response requirements
e. Personal protective equipment requirements and responsibility
f. Health and safety training
g. Training and qualification records
D. Final Contractor Selection

Historical health, safety and environmental performance and current health, safety
and environmental capabilities should be important criteria in the final selection of
contractors. Depending on the scope of the work involved, COPI representatives
should consider:
1. Information submitted on contractors PQF forms
2. Contractors written health, safety and environmental programs, which should
identify key personnel and emergency action plans, and adequately address the
level of risk associated with the types of work to be performed
3. Contractors level of experience and skill compared to the health, safety and
environmental sensitivities of the work
4. Contractors prior work performance, including work for COPI or for other
companies
5. Contractors resource availability and compliance assurance programs, and their
ability to comply with COPI, government and industry requirements

6. How the contractor's health, safety and environmental programs account for
subcontractors
7. Interviews and site visits with contractors to validate all of the above
COPI representatives should ensure that any gaps in selected contractors health,
safety and environmental programs are adequately addressed before contracts are
awarded. COPI representatives should inform contractors not selected of any
perceived deficiencies in their health, safety and environmental programs so that
those contractors can take steps to improve their programs.
IV. Pre-Job Considerations

A. Pre-Job COPI/Contractor Meeting
Once a contract has been signed and before the contractor begins work, COPI
representatives should meet with contractor representatives to discuss details of how
the contractors health, safety and environmental program will be implemented.
Depending on the scope of the work, this meeting might include a review of the work
site to increase the contractors familiarization with location, personnel, site health,
safety and environmental protection requirements and emergency action procedures.
Topics addressed in the pre-job meeting might include:
1. Significant health, safety and environmental requirements contained in the
contract, including any standard contract addendum
2. Any change in scope or health, safety and environmental requirements that might
have occurred since pre-bid meetings
3. The Contractors Site Health, Safety and Environmental Protection Work Plan,
and how it will interface with COPIs health, safety and environmental programs
4. Clarification of health, safety and environmental responsibilities of the COPI
employees, contractor employees, service/support personnel and site visitors
5. Reasonably anticipated hazards involved with the work, and planned
precautionary measures for such hazards
6. The contractors plans for conducting contract and sub-contract worker
orientations and training.
7. Emergency response and security procedures
8. Considerations for permit-required work, such as hotwork, confined space entry
or lockout/tagout
9. Chemical safety, including use of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS),
container labeling and training requirements
10. Waste management and other environmental requirements
11. Accident/incident notification, investigation and reporting requirements

12. Lines of communication between COPI and contractor representatives for

resolving health, safety and environmental concerns
COPI must disclose any significant health, safety and environmental hazards which
contractor employees are likely to encounter while on Company premises. This
disclosure should be in writing and contain sufficient information to allow a
reasonable person to determine how to conduct the work in a safe manner. COPI
representatives should also provide contractor representatives with copies of all
relevant Chevron health, safety and environmental procedures, programs and
instructions that relate to the performance of the contract, and document what
information is given.
B. Pre-Job Checklist
Contractors should be required, before starting work, to inspect the work site to
ensure that it is safe for contractors employees and must provide the COPI
representative with written notification of acceptance of the site.
Contractors might be required by the contract to complete a Pre-Job Checklist (PJC)
prior to commencing work. Even if a PJC is not specified in the contract, the COPI
supervisor might still consider asking the contractor to complete one, depending on
the scope of the work.
1. A PJC can be developed by either the contractor or COPI or jointly
2. The PJC might be completed by the contractor or by the contractor and COPI
representatives jointly
3. The COPI work supervisor should review the completed PJC
4. PJC typically address:
a. Workers health, safety and environmental training
b. Workers on-site orientations
c. Availability of appropriate personal protective equipment and other health,
safety and environmental equipment
V. Work-in-Progress
COPI and contractors each have roles in assuring that the work-in-progress is performed
safely. Both must also be alert to changes in the scope of work, which could require
additional planning and resources. COPI representatives should monitor contractor
compliance with health, safety and environmental requirements on an on-going basis.
These requirements should be clearly stated and consistently applied to minimize
potential interruption and other problems.
A. Compliance With Contract Terms

The contract should include a process for addressing non-compliance with health,
safety and environmental requirements.

1. Work Interruption
If COPI representatives believe that contract work is being performed in an
unsafe manner, the affected work should be stopped and the contractor should be
asked to correct the unsafe act or condition. Where the contractor fails to
adequately inform, train, equip or protect its employees at the worksite, COPI
has the right to suspend affected activities and, in egregious situations, cancel the
contract if necessary to avert health, safety and environmental damages.
2. Corrective Action Responsibility
COPI representatives should notify the contractor when contract requirements
are not being met. It is the responsibility of the contractor, not COPI
representatives, to determine corrective action and communicate these actions to
contractor employees. However, the contractor should be required to inform
COPI how the contractor addressed the need for corrective action.
3. Non-Compliance Reports
COPI representatives should maintain records of infractions of rules, regulations,
and reports of non-compliance that require disciplinary actions.
B. Site Reviews / Performance Reporting

COPI representatives should periodically review the contractors health, safety and
environmental performance and programs, policies and procedures. These reviews
should identify hazards or potential performance problems so that corrective action
measures can be established.
COPI representatives should also conduct periodic on-site reviews in conjunction
with the contractor to validate performance reports and program reviews. The
contractor should be required to document and resolve any health, safety and
environmental issues identified during these reviews. The contractors should also
conduct their own regular on-site reviews as needed to maintain good health, safety
and environmental performance.
C. Safety Meetings
Contractors should conduct periodic health, safety and environmental protection
briefings and safety meetings for their employees and sub-contractors. These
sessions typically focus more on health and safety issues, but environmental issues
such as waste management or spill prevention should also be addressed as
appropriate. Informal briefing should be held daily, and more formal tailgate
meetings should be held at least weekly. Weekly tailgate meeting documentation
should include:
1. Date
2. Presenter or facilitator
3. Attendees
4. Summary of topics discussed

5. Subject (main focus)

6. Action items
D. Permit-Required Work
Contractors should either comply with COPI procedures for performing work
requiring special permits or follow their own procedures that are equally as
protective. Examples of work activities which might require permits include:
1. Hot Work
2. Confined Space Entry
3. Asbestos Removal
4. Scaffold Erection
5. Work on lines or equipment that contain hazardous material
6. Hazardous Waste Handling
7. Trenching and Shoring
8. Utility Connection / disconnection
9. Lockout and Tagout
10. Simultaneous Well Drilling & Production Operations
E. Accident / Incident Reporting

Contractors should report incidents to COPI as identified in the contract scope of
work. Information on incidents should be shared at the job-site where they occur
and at similar job-sites in order to improve employee health, safety and
environmental awareness. Incident statistics should be used by COPI to monitor the
contractors health, safety and environmental performance.
F. Emergency Drills / Exercises

Contractors emergency response plans should be designed to interface with COPIs
plans. Contractor employees should be adequately trained and informed of actions
and expected roles they should take during emergencies. After receiving appropriate
orientation and training in emergency procedures, contractor employees should
participate in emergency response drills and exercises as appropriate.
VI. Post-Work Evaluation

At the end of each project, COPI representatives should thoroughly evaluate the
contractors health, safety and environmental performance. These post-work evaluations
should be used for future pre-qualifying and selection of contractors. Evaluations should
be done at or near the completion of work or upon the expiration of contracts. If

feasible, these evaluations should conducted in conjunction with contractor

representatives. Topics addressed in the post-work evaluation might include:
A. Accident / incident data summaries
B. Environmental compliance and sensitivity
C. Results of health, safety and environmental reviews and audits
D. Timeliness of hazard mitigation
E. Integration of health, safety and environmental protection in job pre-planning
F. Compliance with procedures and permit-required systems
G. Availability and use of proper health, safety and environmental equipment
H. Adequacy of emergency planning and response procedures
I. Commitment of contractors management to health, safety and environmental
protection
J. Adequacy of health, safety and environmental training (level of detail and
documentation)
K. Submission of required data, records, and documentation
L. Performance of COPI representatives with respect to health, safety and
environmental protection (appropriate information provided, effectiveness of
communication between COPI and contractor representatives, etc.)
Any serious incidents that may have happened during the course of the contract should
be reviewed, and future risk reduction strategies should be considered and implemented
as appropriate. The contractor should be asked for suggestions for enhancing the COPI
operations CHSEP. These post-work evaluations should be retained and used when
considering contractors for future work.
Resources
Improving Owner and Contractor Safety Performance. API Practice 2220. American
Petroleum Institute, 1991.
Loss Prevention Guide No. 25. Contractor Safety, Richmond, CA. Chevron Corp., 1991.
Managers Guide to Implementing a Contractor Safety and Health Program.
Washington, DC., American Petroleum Institute, 1995.
Health, Safety and Environmental Performance Reporting. COPI HSE Guideline MS.7
San Ramon, CA. Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.
The Employers Role in Contractor Safety. J.D. Krumwiede, Des Plaines, Illinois,
American Society of Safety Engineers, 1996.
Contractor Health, Safety and Environmental ProgramA Best Practice for COPI
Activities. San Ramon, CA. Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc., August 1997.

Safe Operations: Safety Cranes and Hoists: Operation, Inspection and Maintenance
Guideline SO.8
Cranes and Hoists:

Operation,
Inspection and
Maintenance
Purpose
The purpose of this guideline is to provide a general framework for developing a local
process for managing the operation of cranes and hoists including operator qualifica-
tions, inspection and maintenance. It includes general safety information and references
for developing specific procedures.
Contents
Guideline
III. Qualifications SO.8-5
IV. Job Planning SO.8-6
V. Operating Practices for Cranes and Hoists SO.8-7
VI. Inspections SO.8-10

Cranes and Hoists: Operation, Inspection and Maintenance Safe Operations: Safety
VII. Maintenance SO.8-11

VIII. Rigging Equipment SO.8-13
Resources SO.8-15
Appendices
I. Daily Pre-Use Inspection Criteria SO.8-17
II. Monthly Inspection Criteria SO.8-19
III. Quarterly Inspection Criteria SO.8-21
IV. Annual Inspection Criteria SO.8-23
General Overview
Various types of cranes and hoists are used within Chevron for lifting and moving the
materials critical for conducting our day-to-day business. As imperative as it is that this
work is done, is that it must be done safely. In order to maintain a high level of safety
where cranes are used, a comprehensive process is necessary for managing their opera-
tion, including training and qualifying operators, preventive maintenance and inspections.
This document provides guidance for instituting such a system. It identifies management,
supervisor and employee responsibilities and provides information for determining the
appropriate qualifications for crane and hoist operators. It also provides important infor-
mation for planning non-routine lifts. Additionally, this guideline includes basic safe
operating practices, and inspection and maintenance requirements. Lastly, information is
provided to facilitate the selection, use, inspection, and storage of rigging equipment.
Guideline
I. Definitions
A. Crane - A machine for lifting or lowering a load and moving it horizontally, in which
the hoisting mechanism is an integral part of the machine. It may be driven manually
or by power and may be a fixed or a mobile machine, but does not include:
1. stackers
2. lift trucks
3. power shovels
4. backhoes, or
5. excavators.
B. Critical Components - Critical components include any component of a crane whose
failure would result in loss of load control or structural instability of the machine.
C. Critical Lift - A critical lift is a lift that meets one or more of the following criteria:
1. is close to the rated capacity of the crane;

2. involves weights that cannot be calculated accurately;

3. involves lifts over operating equipment; or
4. requires rigging that does not use designed lifting points.
D. Dynamic Loading - Dynamic loading refers to loads applied to the crane and its
components due to accelerating or decelerating forces. A heaving vessel or the force
caused by swinging, raising or lowering a load can cause dynamic loading of a crane.
E. Heavy Lift - lift that is equal to or greater than 75% of the rated capacity of the crane
or hoist per the load chart.
F. Hoist - An apparatus for raising or lowering a load by the application of a pulling
force, but does not include a car or platform riding in guides. Some common types of
hoists include:
1. overhead electric hoists,
2. drum hoists, and
3. chain hoists.
G. Reeving - Reeving refers to the rope system in which the rope travels around drums
and sheaves.
H. Side Loading - Side loading refers to a load applied to an angle to the vertical plane
of a crane boom.
I. Sling - a device used to connect loads to be lifted by a crane or a hoist, however this
does not include:
1. spreader bars,
2. pallet forks,
3. drum clamps, or
4. similar devices.
J. Static Loading - Static loading refers to the load applied to a crane and its compo-
nents by the force of gravity acting upon the dead weight of a load.
K. Tag Lines - a length of rope/ropes attached at a point to the load and used by riggers
to help control its movement.
A. Management
Management personnel are responsible for the following:
1. Allocate sufficient resources to crane and hoist issues such as training, inspec-
tion, maintenance and repairs.

2. Ensure compliance with applicable local, national, and international regulations

and standards regarding the operation of cranes and hoists.
3. Institute local systems, processes, procedures or work practices for managing
cranes and hoists and ensuring their safe operation. Procedures must include
consistent inspection, maintenance and training requirements.
4. Ensure safe work practices for the operation of cranes and hoists are communi-
cated to all employees and contractors.
5. Provide appropriate training and a means to evaluate personnel involved with the
operation of cranes and hoists.
6. Ensure compliance with crane and hoist safe work practices.
7. Evaluate and obtain appropriate crane and hoist equipment.
8. Ensure that all cranes, hoists and rigging equipment are maintained in accor-
dance with the manufacturers recommendations.
B. Supervisors
Supervisory personnel are responsible for the following:
1. Develop local processes or procedures for managing cranes and hoists including
developing procedures for inspection and maintenance and establishing crane
operator qualifications and training programs.
2. Provide crane and hoist operators with training by a qualified instructor.
3. Ensure employees under their supervision receive required training and are quali-
fied to operate cranes and hoists.
4. Communicate the local processes or procedures for managing cranes and hoists
to employees and contractors.
5. Monitor and enforce the local processes or procedures for managing cranes and
hoists as well as applicable local, national, and international regulations and stan-
dards.
6. Investigate all incidents involving cranes and hoists to determine root causes.
7. Develop corrective measures to prevent incidents. Incorporate corrective
measures into local procedures.
8. Ensure that hoisting and rigging equipment is inspected and tested periodically
by a qualified, responsible person.
C. Employees
Employees and contractors who operate, inspect or maintain cranes and hoists or are
otherwise involved with their operation are responsible for the following:
1. Be familiar with the job-specific portions of local procedures.

2. Operate cranes and hoists in a safe manner and comply with all applicable local
procedures.
3. Consult with supervisors to clarify the intent of local procedures if unclear.
4. Never operate a crane or hoist while under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or
while taking any medications that may effect the ability to operate the equipment
safely.
5. Conduct functional tests before using the crane and hoist equipment.
6. Select and use appropriate rigging equipment.
7. Report unsafe activities or conditions to supervisors immediately.
8. Stop any operation that appears to be unsafe. Operators must be able to refuse to
make or discontinue any lift that may be unsafe.
9. Explain local procedures to contractors.
III. Qualifications
A. Physical Qualifications
Minimum physical qualifications should be established for crane and hoist operators.
Some suggested qualifications include the following:
1. Vision of at least 20/30 in one eye and 20/50 in the other, with or without correc-
tive lenses.
2. Ability to distinguish colors if color differentiation is required.
3. Adequate hearing with or without a hearing aid.
4. Sufficient strength, coordination and speed of reaction to meet operational
demands.
5. Normal depth perception, field of vision, reaction time, manual dexterity, coordi-
nation and no tendencies to dizziness or similar undesirable characteristics.
6. Successful completion (negative result) of a substance abuse test.
7. No evidence of physical defects or emotional instability which could render a
hazard to the operator or others.
8. In possession of a current medical clearance certificate from a qualified physi-
cian.

B. Other Qualifications
Other qualifications should be established for determining knowledge level and expe-
rience of potential crane operators. Some suggested qualifications include the
following:
1. Successful completion of a written test with questions appropriate to the crane
type for which qualification is sought.
2. Demonstrated ability to read, write, comprehend, and exhibit arithmetic skill and
load/capacity chart usage in the language of the crane instruction materials.
3. Successful completion of a hands-on operation test demonstrating proficiency in
handling the specific type crane for which qualification is sought including both
pre-start and post-start inspection, maneuvering skills, shutdown and securing
procedures.
IV. Job Planning

A. Safe-Lifting Plan
The use of cranes and hoists requires planning to ensure materials can be moved
safely and without incident. A safe-lifting plan should be developed for non-routine,
difficult or critical lifts. The safe-lifting plan should include the following elements:
1. Competent Planners: Persons involved in the planning process must be techni-
cally competent and understand the work to be performed.
2. Hazard Analysis: Planners must consider all hazards associated with the lift
including traffic, utilities and power lines. See Section B below for more detail
on conducting a job safety analysis.
3. Work Procedure: The planners should develop a specific procedure to avoid
hazards that describes the work to be done in a logical sequence. The procedure
should include a lifting diagram.
4. Communication: Explain the plan to all concerned.
B. Job Safety Analysis

As part of a safe-lifting plan, a job safety analysis should be performed. The purpose
of the job safety analysis is to identify potential hazards at each step of the plan and
to develop solutions to eliminate or minimize them. Consider the following when
analyzing the lift:
1. Is it a critical lift, more than 75 percent of the cranes capacity? What other
factors determine criticality of the lift?
2. Have persons involved in the lift been assigned specific responsibilities?
3. How was load weight determined? Is it accurate and can it be verified?
4. How will the signal person communicate with the crane operator?

5. Is crane and rigging equipment currently certified?

6. Has the stability of the ground beneath the crane been assessed? Does adequate
documentation exist?
7. Have weather and climate conditions been considered? Should lifting be allowed
or should operations be shut down?
8. Is the work area clear, so that crane setup has the least amount of exposure to
surrounding buildings and operations?
9. How will loads be rigged?
10. What special safety precautions will be needed if the crane must travel with a
suspended load or if more than one crane is needed to lift a load?
11. Is the experience of the qualified operator and signal person verified?
12. Are work crews aware that they should stay clear of load movements?
V. Operating Practices for Cranes and Hoists

A. Recommended Equipment
1. New cranes shall have the manufacturers load chart posted in the cab before they
are placed in service. Revised load charts must be obtained from the manufac-
turer whenever cranes are re-rated or modified. Only the load chart for the current
crane configuration shall be posted. Load charts shall be posted in clear view of
the operator.
2. Anti-two-blocking devices and boom kick-out devices should be installed on all
cranes.
3. A fire extinguisher should be kept in the crane cab or at a point near the crane
that is easily accessible to the operator.
B. Before Making the Lift

1. Before a crane is used, the operator should conduct and document a standard pre-
use inspection. See Section VI and Appendix I for details.
2. Any item found during an inspection that is considered unsafe requires that the
crane be taken out of service until it can be repaired.
3. Before starting the crane, the operator shall ensure all controls are in the off or
neutral position and all personnel are clear of the area.
4. Before making a lift, the operator shall verify that the correct static and dynamic
load rating charts are in place and that the weight of the load including
slings/lifting devices are within the static/dynamic capacity of the crane at all
planned lifting radii.

5. Before any lift is made, the operator and riggers should discuss the circum-
stances of the lift.
6. The operator should obtain pertinent information contained on shipping mani-
fests before the cargo transfer begins.
C. Lifting the Load

1. Only personnel involved with rigging the load should be allowed in the lifting
area during lifting and moving of the load.
2. Mechanical crane brakes should be operationally tested each time a load
approaches the rated capacity.
3. Loads should be moved carefully to minimize the pendulum action of the load.
4. No external forces should be applied to suspended loads, which could create side
loading of the boom.
5. Cranes should not be used for dragging loads unless properly rigged for a vertical
pull not exceeding the rated capacity.
6. Loads should never be suspended over personnel.
7. A minimum of five full wraps of wire rope should remain on the winch drum at
all times.
8. The signal person should use hand signals (per local standards or regulations) to
communicate with the operator unless radio communication is utilized.
9. Operators should only respond to signals from the designated signal person,
unless it is an emergency signal, which may be given by anyone.
10. Signals between the designated signal person and operator shall be discernible,
audible or visual at all times.
11. When the crane operator is unable to see the load being lifted, the operator and
riggers should use voice communication by radio. Alternately, the operator may
be aided by a second signal person who shall relay hand signals from the signal
person in sight of the load to the crane operator.
12. There should be sufficient lighting to operate the crane safely.
13. Personnel Transfers
a. Personnel should only be lifted in an approved platform or man-baskets that
meets API RP 2D standards or similar relevant local standard.
b. Only the most experienced and suitably qualified crane operators at the loca-
tion should be allowed to make personnel transfers.
c. Boom and load winches used for personnel transfer should be approved by
the winch manufacturer for personnel handling.
d. All hooks used for support of personnel shall have safety latches.

e. For transfers over water, persons inside personnel carriers or baskets shall
wear personal flotation devices.
D. Moving the Crane

1. When moving the crane from one site to another, ensure the following:
a. The boom is in line with the direction of motion.
b. The swing brake is engaged (unless the boom is supported on a dolly to
negotiate turns).
c. The hook is secured to prevent it from swinging.
2. Before traveling with a load, ensure that the manufacturer does not prohibit it.
Consider the following if moving the crane with a load:
a. Load capacities are reduced.
b. Travel route and ground condition.
c. Use tag lines to control the load.
d. Ensure the boom is low enough to avoid the possibility of backward collapse.
e. Many manufacturers do not permit travelling with a load on a pinned section,
boom extension or jib.
E. Working Around Power Lines

1. The closest distance the crane, boom, or load can be to a live power line is called
the Absolute Limit of Approach. This limit of approach distance depends upon
the voltage of the line. Figure SO.8-1 (from NFPA 70E) provides approach
distances for a range of voltages.
2. If work is required within the Absolute Limit of Approach area of a high voltage
line, the line must be de-energized.
3. A signal person must be present and direct the lift if it will be made near a power
line. The signal person must warn the crane operator when the boom, load, or
cable is approaching the Absolute Limit of Approach.
4. Any overhead power line must be considered energized unless it has been de-
energized and has been locked out and tagged.
Fig. SO.8-1 Approach Distances to Exposed Energized Electrical Conductors

Limited Approach Boundary to Exposed Metal
Nominal Voltage Range (Phase to Phase) Conductor(1)
300V and less 3.05m (10 ft. 0 in.)
Over 300V, not over 750V 3.05m (10 ft. 0 in.)
Over 750V, not over 2kV 3.05m (10 ft. 0 in.)
Over 2kV, not over 15kV 3.05m (10 ft. 0 in.)

Fig. SO.8-1 Approach Distances to Exposed Energized Electrical Conductors (Contd.)

Limited Approach Boundary to Exposed Metal
Nominal Voltage Range (Phase to Phase) Conductor(1)
Over 15kV, not over 36 kV 3.05m (10 ft. 0 in.)
Over 36kV, not over 48.3kV 3.05m (10 ft. 0 in.)
Over 48.3kV, not over 72.5kV 3.05m (10 ft. 0 in.)
Over 72.5kV, not over 121kV 3.25m (10 ft. 8 in.)
(1) *If the crane is in transit with its structure lowered, the limited approach boundary to overhead lines may be
reduced by 1.83m (6 ft.).
VI. Inspections
Crane inspections typically fall into one of three categories: pre-use, frequent and annual.
Manufacturers recommendations for inspection frequencies are typically based on
average operating conditions. However, due to the various conditions under which cranes
may operate, actual inspection frequencies should be based on an analysis of work activi-
ties, environmental conditions and the exposure of critical components to wear, deteriora-
tion or malfunction. An interval based on hours of operation is most accurate.
A. Pre-Use Inspection
Operators should conduct pre-use inspections each time the crane or hoist is used or
at the beginning of each shift. These inspections should be recorded on Daily Pre-use
Inspection form. See Appendix I for a list of items that may be included on the form.
B. Frequent Inspection
1. Cranes used 50 hours or more a month should be inspected on a monthly basis
and recorded on a Monthly Inspection form. See Appendix II for a list of items
that may be included on the form.
2. Cranes used less than 50 hours a month should be inspected on a quarterly basis
and recorded on a Quarterly Inspection form. See Appendix III for a list of items
that may be included on the form.
C. Annual Inspection
All cranes and hoists should be inspected on an annual basis. The inspection will be
recorded on an Annual Inspection form. See Appendix IV for a list of items that may
be included on the form.

D. Non-Routine Inspections
1. Any crane removed from service for repair of critical components should be
inspected before being placed back into service.
2. A load test should be performed if there is any change in a cranes configuration
(boom length, cable size, number of parts of line). Any such modifications should
meet the specifications of API RP 2D or relevant local standard and the crane
manufacturers guidelines.
VII. Maintenance
A. Preventive Maintenance
1. A preventive maintenance program that is based on the crane or hoist manufac-
turers recommendations must be established. However, because of the various
conditions under which cranes may operate, the intervals prescribed by the manu-
facturer may not be adequate for all cranes. For cranes operated in severe envi-
ronments or under difficult conditions, a shorter interval may be necessary to
maintain the integrity of the equipment.
2. It is recommended that replacement parts be obtained from the original equip-
ment manufacturer.
3. Wire rope replacement should be included in scheduled preventive maintenance
programs.
B. Maintenance Procedure
1. Before adjustments and repairs are started on a crane or hoist, the following
precautions should be followed:
a. Position the crane or hoist where it will cause the least interference with
other equipment or operations in the area;
b. Place all controls in the off position and secure all operating features from
inadvertent motion by brakes, pawls, or other means;
c. Render the means for starting the crane or hoist inoperative:
d. Stop the prime mover or disconnect the power source;
e. Lower the boom to the ground or deck, or otherwise secure it against drop-
ping;
f. Lower the load block to the ground or deck or otherwise secure it against
dropping;
g. Relieve hydraulic oil pressure from all hydraulic circuits before loosening or
removing hydraulic components;
h. Place a warning, out of order or other similarly worded sign on the crane
controls.

2. No welding repairs should be made to critical components, such as booms and

swing circle assemblies, without specific repair procedures and recommenda-
tions from the manufacturer or other qualified source such as a licensed engineer
experienced in the design of the crane.
3. Repairs to damaged or worn hooks by welding or reshaping are not recom-
mended.
4. Following adjustments and repairs to the crane or hoist, the equipment must not
be returned to service until all guards have been reinstalled, trapped air removed
from the hydraulic system, safety devices reactivated, and maintenance equip-
ment removed.
5. All moving parts of the crane for which lubrication is specified should be regu-
larly lubricated. Lubrication systems should be checked for proper delivery of
lubricant. Follow the manufacturers recommendations for points and frequency
of lubrication, lubricant levels and types of lubricant to be used.
6. All fluids should be maintained or replaced as directed by the manufacturers
guidelines.
C. Recordkeeping
1. A crane file should be maintained for each Chevron owned or operated crane.
2. The file should contain the following:
a. Name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer.
b. The crane model number, serial number and design specifications.
c. A copy of the rated load chart for the existing reeving configuration and
boom length at corresponding load radii and boom angles.
d. Copies of all inspection records (for last two years).
e. Copies of the manufacturers original installation certification and current
operational tests.
f. Date of replacement of load components, such as wire rope and main hooks.
g. Copies of wire rope certificates.
h. Date and description of each crane failure.
i. Date and description of each repair or alteration to the crane
3. Cranes used to transfer personnel should have a certificate on file which states
Approved For Personnel Handling. This certification should be maintained in
the crane file or record book.

VIII. Rigging Equipment

A. Selection of Rigging Equipment
1. Chains should not be used for crane lifting operations.
2. Wire rope slings should not be used on loads where they can contact a smooth
surface, unless special precautions are taken to prevent them from slipping or
damaging the load.
3. Synthetic or natural fiber rope slings should not be used for crane lifting opera-
tions.
4. The use of slings or nets made from synthetic materials requires special precau-
tions:
a. Synthetic web slings should be used on smooth surface loads, but should not
be used when the temperature of the object to be lifted exceeds 82C or on
sharp edged materials or equipment.
b. Synthetic web slings shall not be used near welding or flame cutting opera-
tions or where chemicals, oils or grease are present.
5. Rigging equipment, such as slings and cargo containers, should be marked to
indicate their rated capacity. Records of all rigging equipment should be main-
tained.
6. Horizontal plate clamps should be used for moving sheet or plate metal when the
sheets are lifted horizontally. If the plates cannot be lifted horizontally, holes
should be cut for shackles or pad eyes welded to the sheet metal.
7. Compressed gas cylinders should only be lifted in approved racks designed for
the lifting and transport of cylinders. Caps should be in place when transporting
cylinders.
B. Use of Rigging Equipment

1. A sling must not be loaded more than its rated capacity.
2. The weight of the load must always be distributed evenly on a sling.
3. When attaching the sling to the load, careful consideration must be given to the
angle of multiple legs. The angle between legs should not exceed 90 degrees.
4. Never make a lift with a knot or kink in the sling, or use a damaged or defective
sling or a sling without rated capacity labels.
5. Slings must not be dragged on the ground or over metal objects, be left lying on
the ground, or have material stored on top of them.
6. Slings must not be shortened with knots, bolts, or other makeshift devices.
7. A sling should not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the
sling and damage to the sling may result.

8. Tag lines should be used to help control loads during lifting operations.
9. Pad eyes used for lifting should be designed by an engineer to ensure sufficient
strength to handle intended lifts.
10. Lifting equipment, such as shackles, hooks or pad eyes, should never be altered
by welding or cutting.
C. Inspection
1. All slings and other rigging equipment should be visually inspected before each
use. When visually inspecting wire rope slings, look for the following:
a. Distortion of the rope such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, birdcaging,
main strand displacement or core protrusion.
b. General corrosion.
c. Broken or cut strands.
2. The frequency of periodic inspections of rigging equipment should be estab-
lished based on the following:
a. Frequency of use.
b. Severity of service conditions.
c. Nature and type of lifts being made.
d. Experience based on service life of slings used in similar applications.
3. Wire rope slings should be removed from service if any of the following condi-
tions are found during an inspection:
a. Five randomly broken wires in one lay, or three broken wires in one strand of
one lay
b. Wearing or scraping of one-third the original diameter of outside individual
wires
c. Rope that is severely kinked, crushed, cut, unstranded, or damaged in any
other way which distorts the rope structure
d. Considerable corrosion in the valleys between strands
e. Evidence of heat damage, such as welding marks
f. End attachments that are corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly
attached
4. A synthetic web sling should be removed from service if any of the following
conditions are found during an inspection:
a. Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface
b. Snags, punctures, tears, cuts, or abnormal wear

c. Broken or worn stitches

d. Distorted fittings
e. Discoloration or rotting
f. Missing inspection label or mark
D. Storage of Rigging Equipment

1. Wire ropes should be stored in a hanging position where they will be free from
moisture.
2. Synthetic webbing slings shall be stored in a hanging position where they will not
be exposed to heat or direct sunlight.
Resources
Boom-Type Mobile Cranes. Dept. of Industrial Relations, Division of Labor, Cal OSHA.
CAC Title 8, Article 93, Barclays. August 86
Crane and Lifting Program, Gulf of Mexico Business Unit, Chevron U.S.A. Inc., 1995
Cranes (Except Boom-Type Mobile Cranes). Dept. of Industrial Relations, Division of
Labor, Cal OSHA. CAC Title 8, Article 92, Barclays. August 86
Crawler locomotive and truck cranes. Dept. of Labor, OSHA CFR 29, Subpart N, Section
1910.180, August 1990
Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, NFPA 70E, National Fire
Protection Association, 1995
Hoists, Auxiliary Hoisting Equipment and Hoisting Operations. Dept. of Industrial Rela-
tions, Division of Labor, Cal OSHA. CAC Title 8, Article 97, Barclays. May 1987
Hydraulic Cranes and Excavators. Dept. of Industrial Relations, Division of Labor, Cal
OSHA. CAC Title 8, Article 94, Barclays. August 86
Inspection and Maintenance. Dept. of Industrial Relations, Division of Labor, Cal OSHA.
CAC Title 8, Article 100, Barclays. August 86
Lifting Equipment, Safety Practices and Procedures Manual, Chevron U. K. Limited, June
1994
Mobile and Locomotive Cranes, ASME B30.5-1994
Operating Rules. Department of Industrial Relations, Division of Labor, Cal OSHA. CAC
Title 8, Article 98, Barclays. August 86
Overhead and gantry cranes, Dept. of Labor, OSHA CFR 29, Subpart N, Section
1910.179, August 1990
Recommended Practice for Operation and Maintenance of Offshore Cranes, API RP 2D
3rd Edition, June 1, 1995

Slings. Department of Industrial Relations, Division of Labor, Cal OSHA. CAC Title 8,
Article 101, Barclays. May 1987
Specifications for Offshore Cranes, API SPECIFICATION 2C 5th Edition, April 3, 1995
Tower Cranes. Department of Industrial Relations, Division of Labor, Cal OSHA. CAC
Title 8, Article 96, Barclays. August 86

Guideline SO.8Appendix I
Daily Pre-Use Inspection

Criteria
The generic criteria listed below include items for different types of cranes. The inspec-
tion program developed from this guideline should use a checklist containing the specific
criteria for the type of crane being inspected.
Engine
Check oil level Check coolant level
Check fuel level Check torque converter oil level
Ensure blower air shutoff flap is reset Check fan/auxiliary belts
Check condition of exhaust system Check for fuel, oil, coolant, and air leaks
Check condition of starter system Make sure gauges are operational
Start and stop engine before use Check condition of radiator, hoses, & guards
Hydraulic System
Check hydraulic oil level Check for hydraulic leaks
Check controls are properly labeled Check main system pressure
Check controls for proper operation Make sure gauges are operational
Upper Revolving Structure

Check for loose or missing fasteners Swing lock/swing brake operation
Function test drum brakes
Check safety systems
a. Check boom hoist kickout c. Check boom hoist pawl
b. Anti-two block d. Override valve

Boom and Sheaves

Examine boom for damage Check boom angle/radius indicator
Winch and Hydraulic Cylinders

Check winch oil level every 2 weeks Check condition of hydraulic cylinders
Wire Rope and Hooks

Examine condition of wire rope Safety latches
Inspect all hooks for cracks Cable attachments
Slings and Shackles

Examine condition of slings and shackles
General
Fire extinguisher & work vest in cab or vicinity
Condition/operation of weight indictor system
Condition/correct load chart visible to operator
Check operation of aircraft warning light
Inspect walkways, handrails, & ladders
Hand signal chart posted

Guideline SO.8Appendix II
Monthly Inspection Criteria
Engine
Drain sludge/water from fuel tank Record accumulator pressure _______psig
Check emergency shutdown at idle speed Check condition of drains and drip pans
Check oil level in gearbox (if applicable) Check air box drain tubes
Check engine hold-down bolts Check condition of master clutch
Hydraulic System
Check condition of hydraulic system Drain water/sludge from hydraulic reservoir
Record return pressure

Perform complete lubrication of crane Check oil level in gear cases
Ensure proper operation of chain case oiler Check condition/tension of chain
Check condition of universal joints/coupling Check condition of clutch drums
Check condition/adjust clutch shoes Check condition of brake drums
Check condition/adjust brakes Check condition/adjust boom brake spring
Check/operate swing lock mechanism Check condition/adjust hook rollers
Check condition of counterweight bolts Check and lubricate chain and chain sprocket
Lubricate ring gear and pinion Check swing gearbox oil level
Lubricate ball ring

Booms and Sheaves

Lubricate boom foot pins/bushings Inspect and lubricate sheaves
Inspect and lubricate boom stops

Winch
a. Check security of mounting bolts c. Ensure cable is properly secured
b. Visually inspect open brakes d. Inspect drums & flanges for cracks/wear
Check hydraulic cylinders for smooth operation
Wire Rope and Hooks

Ensure wire rope is lubricated
General
Condition of cab Inspect electrical system
Inspect crane structure for cracks and corrosion Load block/headache ball painted

Guideline SO.8Appendix III
Quarterly Inspection
Criteria
Engine
Inspect/lubricate throttle linkage Inspect/lubricate tachometer drive
Lubricate fan shaft bearing Inspect and/or replace fuel filters
Clean or replace air cleaner Inspect and/or change crankcase oil & filter
Clean breather cap
Booms and Sheaves

Inspect/calibrate boom angle/radius indicator Lubricate retractable booms

Winch
a. Check oil levels
b. Inspect and/or change oil every six months
c. Test brakes
Wire Rope & Hooks

Inspect, measure, and record OD of the following
a. Auxiliary line_____in. c. Load line _____in.
b. Boom line _____in. d. Pendant line left_____in.
right_____in.
Inspect, measure, and record throat opening
a. Auxiliary line hook
b. Load line hook

Guideline SO.8Appendix IV
Annual Inspection Criteria
Engine
Inspect and/or replace hydraulic start fluid Clean suction strainer in starter system
Check exhaust valve clearance Check injector timing
Clean blower screen Replace torque converter oil and filter
Change oil in gearbox
Hydraulic System
Inspect and/or change hydraulic fluid and filter Send in fluid sample for analysis

Check ball ring bolts Torque ball ring bolts
Dial indicate ball ring clearance_____in. Change oil in chain case
Change oil in gear case(s) Test static swing brake
Boom and Sheaves

Check sheave groove diameter with groove
gauge
a. Boom b. Gantry
c. Bridle d. Load block
Check boom foot pin clearance


Inspect the winch Replace if necessary
Wire Rope
Dye test hooks Remove and inspect headache ball pin
General
Condition of weldments Inspect/calibrate weight indicator
Dynamometer test
a. Boom length
b. Parts of line
Load Tests
Load line
a. Boom angle b. Radius
c. Rated Capacity d. Load pull
e. % Rated Capacity
Auxiliary Line
a. Boom angle b. Rated Capacity
c. % Rated Capacity d. Radius
e. % Rated Capacity f. Load pulls

Safe Operations: Safety Storage and Handling of Explosive Materials
Guideline SO.9
Storage and Handling of

Explosive Materials
Purpose
The purpose of this guideline is to provide information for the safe storage and handling
of explosive materials.
Content
Guideline SO.9-2
IV. Storage SO.9-5
V. Transportation SO.9-7
VI. Handling and Use SO.9-9
VII. Other Explosive Devices SO.9-15
VIII. Disposal SO.9-16
Resources SO.9-16
Appendices
I. Table of Distances for Storage of Explosives SO.9-19
Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.9 - 1 December 1999

Storage and Handling of Explosive Materials Safe Operations: Safety
II. Blasting Permit SO.9-25

III. Blasting Check List SO.9-27
IV. Recommended Tables of Distances for RF Transmitters SO.9-29
General Overview
Within Chevron, explosives are used for civil engineering projects such as road construc-
tion, rock excavation for leveling construction sites, for seismographic activities used in
the search for hydrocarbons, and during well servicing operations. Unfortunately, the
danger of accidental detonation is present in every aspect connected with the application
of explosives including their transportation, storage, handling and use.
In any operation where explosives are used, management is responsible for establishing
and enforcing procedures to ensure that all safety precautions and regulatory require-
ments are being followed. This guideline provides basic safety measures to assist in this
endeavor. Included below are important definitions, responsibilities, training require-
ments, and work practices for the safe storage, transportation, handling and disposal of
explosive materials. This guideline is not intended to cover every situation or all of the
details of any particular situation that might possibly be encountered in the field. For
more detailed information on the characteristics of a particular explosive and recom-
mended applications, consult product literature and technical data sheets published by the
explosive manufacturers.
Guideline
I. Definitions
A. Blaster - a person qualified to be in charge of and responsible for the loading and
firing of an explosive blast.
B. Blasting Area - an area extending at least fifty meters in all directions from any place
in which explosives are being prepared or fired, or in which an unexploded charge is
known or believed to exist.
C. Blasting Machine - an electrical device designed to fire electric blasting caps or
delay electric blasting caps.
D. Blasting Mat - a heavy mat of woven rope, steel wire or chain, or a mat improvised
from other material, placed over loaded holes to prevent earth, rock and debris from
being thrown in the air by the detonated explosive.
E. Capped Fuse - a length of safety fuse to which a blasting cap has been attached.
F. Cap Wire or Cap Leg Wire - an electric wire attached to the detonator.
G. Cap Box - a cushioned box used to transport blasting caps.
H. Detonating Cord - a fuse containing explosives of sufficient strength to detonate
other explosives.
December 1999 SO.9 - 2 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

I. Detonator - a detonator is a device, such as a blasting cap or an electric blasting cap,

which is capable of initiating detonation of explosives.
J. Explosive Actuated Device - any tool or special mechanized device that is actuated
by explosives.
K. Explosives - any chemical compound, mixture, or device which by fire, friction,
impact, percussion, or detonation may cause a sudden release of gases of such pres-
sure as to be capable of producing destructive effects in adjacent objects, or of
destroying life and limb. The term includes:
1. dynamite,
2. black powder,
3. pellet powder,
4. initiating explosives,
5. detonators,
6. safety fuses,
7. squibs,
8. detonating cord,
9. ignitor cord, and
10. ignitors.
L. Inhabited Building - any building regularly occupied in whole or in part as a habita-
tion for human beings, or any structure where people are accustomed to assemble,
except any building occupied in connection with the manufacture, transportation,
storage, or use of explosive materials.
M. Loading Area - an area where charges are set and primed.
N. Magazine - any building or structure, other than an explosive manufacturing
building, used for the storage of explosive materials.
O. Misfire - a charge of explosive material that fails to detonate completely after initia-
tion.
P. Missed Hole - a drilled hole or borehole containing an explosive charge that has
failed to explode.
Q. Primer - the detonator when attached to an explosive cartridge.
R. Priming - priming is the process of attaching a detonator to an explosive.
S. Safety Fuse - a device to convey flame to a blasting cap and consists of a train of
black powder tightly wrapped and enclosed in a series of textiles and waterproof
materials which, when ignited, burns internally at a continuous, uniform rate.

A. Supervisor
1. The supervisor must ensure that all persons who work with explosives are quali-
fied through proper training, experience, and, if required, through licensing.
2. The supervisor must ensure that all applicable safe work practices are followed
during operations using explosives and explosive devices.
3. The supervisor must ensure that there are safe facilities available for the storage
of explosives and detonators.
4. The supervisor must ensure that a register of incoming and outgoing explosives
for all storage magazines is reviewed and maintained.
5. The Supervisor must ensure the security of the magazines.
B. Blaster
1. The blaster must ensure that any blasting operation is carried out in accordance
with established safe procedures and any applicable laws or regulations.
2. The blaster must safely handle, prepare, and fire explosives.
3. The blaster must maintain a register of all explosives, incoming and outgoing, for
all the magazines.
C. Guard
1. A guard must be utilized to prevent unauthorized persons from entering loading
or blasting areas while explosive charges are being loaded or prepared for detona-
tion.
2. A guard must ensure no one enters the blast area until the blaster has given clear-
ance.
III. Training
A. Blasters
1. Blasters should be qualified based on any local, legal or regulatory requirements.
Additionally, a blaster must have successfully completed an appropriate explo-
sive handling and loading training course.
2. To be qualified, blasters should have worked under the direct supervision of an
experienced blaster for six months within the last three years.
B. Drivers
1. Drivers employed in the transportation of explosives must hold a valid drivers
license for the type of vehicle and for the country in which they will operate.

2. Drivers, including loading crews and helpers, must be familiar with the character-
istics and hazards of explosives and trained in proper handling and safe move-
ment techniques. Further, the driver must be familiar with regulations governing
the transportation of explosives in the country or area of operations.
IV. Storage
A. Storage on Land
1. Explosives must be kept in a storage magazine unless they are in the process of
being transported or used.
2. The location of outdoor magazines must comply with the Table of Distances for
Storage of Explosives located at Appendix I.
3. Magazines must be located at least 7.6 meters (25 ft.) from overhead high-
voltage electrical lines.
4. Obtain any permits and licenses required by local authorities before storing
explosives on site.
5. The quantity of explosives stored should always be kept to a minimum and must
not exceed the amount permitted by local authorities or as specifically desig-
nated by the magazine storage permit or license.
6. A register or log must be kept which contains the following information:
a. Amount and description of explosives received into the magazine
b. Details of the distribution of outgoing explosives including quantity removed
and where they are used
c. Details about misfired shots
d. Details of explosives returned to the magazine
e. Disposal and destruction of old explosives
f. Name of the authorized person handling the explosives.
7. Design of the magazine should be in accordance with the manufacturer of the
explosive and will depend on the quantity and type of material to be stored. The
following is a list of general requirements for magazine construction:
a. It must be constructed of noncombustible material or covered with fire resis-
tant material.
b. It must be reasonably bullet resistant.
c. It must be weather resistant with a canopy or cover to protect it from sun and
rain.
d. It must be bonded or grounded if constructed of metal.

e. It must be constructed of non-sparking materials on the inside, including the

floor.
f. It must be free of any electrical devices.
8. A magazine must be securely locked except during placement or removal of
explosives or during inspection. Keys must only be accessible to the blaster, the
supervisor, and anyone else determined necessary by the supervisor.
9. Where security is a concern, consider providing regular security patrols or 24
hour guards as appropriate.
10. Explosives and detonators should be stored in separate magazines separated by a
distance of 3 meters (9.8 ft.).
11. Two magazines may be located in the same building only if one is used solely for
the storage of detonators in quantities less than 2268 kg. (5,000 lbs.).
12. The area around the explosives magazine must be chained or fenced off
according to the local regulatory requirement and marked with prominent signs at
all corners, using appropriate symbols and language to ensure they are under-
standable by all personnel. The signs should read: DANGER - EXPLOSIVES
NO NAKED LIGHTS. ALL RADIOS OFF, or equivalent language.
13. When lighting is necessary within the magazine, only electric safety flashlights
or electric safety lanterns are to be used.
14. Magazines should be opened and inspected at intervals not exceeding 3 days to
determine whether there has been unauthorized or attempted entry or removal of
the contents. Any discrepancies should be immediately reported to security and
management.
15. Explosives that have been lost, stolen or found must be reported to management,
security and local authorities.
16. Magazines must be kept well ventilated, dry, clean, free from grit and any other
materials, such as empty boxes or paper.
17. Vegetation and other combustible materials must be removed for a distance of at
least 7.6 meters (25 ft.) around the magazine.
18. All magazines must be located or protected in such a way to prevent damage
from an accidental impact from vehicles or falling objects.
19. The door to the magazine or to the place where explosives are stored must be
marked, using the appropriate language to ensure understanding by all, with the
words DANGER - EXPLOSIVES in red capital letters at least 15 centimeters
(5.9 in.) high.
20. Explosives should remain in their original packing or container until needed for
use.
21. Do not remove explosives from its immediate packing or cartridge wrapping
within the magazine.

22. Remove all explosives when any repairs are done on the magazine.
23. Store boxes and cartons so that dynamite is oriented horizontally inside.
24. Do not stack cases greater than 2 meters (5 ft.) high.
25. Ammonium nitrate/fuel oil blasting agents must be physically separated from
other explosives in such a manner that the oil does not contaminate other explo-
sives.
26. Tools used for opening containers of explosives should be constructed of non-
sparking materials.
27. There must be no open flames, smoking, or any sparks within 15.25 meters
(50 ft.) of a magazine.
28. Everyone must leave the area of a magazine during lightning storms.
29. Only persons trained in the handling of explosives may remove explosives or
detonators from the magazine.
30. When removing blasting supplies from the magazine, only remove the quantity
needed for the blast.
31. Blasting supplies must be signed out of the magazine register. Record the quan-
tity removed and the location it is to be used.
32. Explosives must be used on a first in, first out basis. That is, use explosives so
that oldest material is used first and the new material is used last.
33. No person may remove any explosive from the property without written permis-
sion of the supervisor.
34. All unused explosive must be returned immediately to the magazine.
B. Offshore
1. Explosives should not be stored on any offshore facility for longer than is neces-
sary.
2. Small quantities of explosives may be stowed offshore in a locked, bonded, steel
container located away from any spark hazard.
3. Explosives returned to base must be properly packed for transportation.
V. Transportation
A. Basic Requirements
1. The transportation of explosives must be done in accordance with all local laws
and regulations. Further, any permits required must be obtained and in the
possession of the personnel involved before transporting explosives.

2. No person may smoke, carry matches, fuel, flame producing devices, firearms or
loaded cartridges while in or near a motor vehicle carrying explosives. This
prohibition against firearms does not apply when they are required to protect the
health and life of employees or the security of the explosives.
3. Explosives must be transported only in containers or magazines designed specifi-
cally for such service. Containers must be constructed to prevent any escape or
leakage of the explosive and protect the contents from flame or spark.
4. Detonators should not be transported in the same vehicle with other explosives
unless they are carried in separate compartments from the explosives with at least
63.5 centimeters (25 inches) of air space between the compartments.
5. Containers of explosives must not be dropped, thrown, or dragged across another
surface during loading or unloading.
6. Explosives may be transported on vehicles carrying other equipment or materials
provided the explosives are carried in approved magazines and are securely
mounted on the vehicle; and, while on public roads, the magazine and separate
detonator box are closed and locked. Any local regulation must be followed.
7. Explosive materials must not be carried or transported in or upon a public
conveyance or vehicle carrying passengers for hire.
B. Transportation on Land
1. Vehicles used for the transportation of explosives must be equipped with the
following:
a. Wood or wood-lined boxes or decks or other non-spark producing surfaces in
the area where explosives are carried. There should be no exposed metal.
b. Signs marked EXPLOSIVES on all four sides with letters that are at least 20-
centimeter (7.9 inches) high letters in red on a white background or in white
on a red background.
c. Two #20 fire extinguishers.
2. No loose spark-producing metal or tools, oils, matches, electric storage batteries,
flammable materials, acids, oxidizers, or corrosives may be carried in the body of
any motor vehicle transporting explosive materials.
3. A motor vehicle used for transporting explosive materials must be inspected to
determine that it is in proper condition. The following items must be checked:
a. Fire extinguishers are ready for use.
b. Electric wiring is completely insulated, firmly secured and protected by suit-
able fuses.
c. Fuel tank and lines secure and do not leak.
d. Chassis, engine, pan and bottom of the vehicle body are reasonably clean and
free from excess oil and grease.

e. Brakes, lights, horn, windshield wipers and steering function properly.

f. Tires inflated properly and free of defects.
4. Only authorized personnel are allowed to ride in a vehicle transporting explo-
sives.
5. A vehicle transporting explosive materials must be driven, loaded or unloaded, in
a safe and careful manner.
6. When vehicles containing explosives or detonators are parked, the brakes must
be set, the engine shut off, and the wheels chocked.
7. Vehicles transporting explosives should be attended by a driver or other qualified
representative at all times. Attended means that the driver or attendant is awake,
alert, and not engaged in other duties or activities that may divert attention from
the vehicle.
8. Vehicles containing explosives must not be parked, even if attended, on any
public street adjacent to or in proximity to any bridge, tunnel, dwelling, building,
or place where people work, congregate, or assemble.
9. In case of a breakdown or collision, local authorities must be promptly notified.
Explosives must be transferred from the disabled vehicle to another only under
qualified supervision.
10. In case of mechanical breakdown of a vehicle containing explosives, the driver
should stand guard until relieved or the vehicle is repaired.
11. Vehicles containing explosives or detonators must not be taken to a repair garage
or shop for any purpose.
12. Explosives are not to be transported at night.
C. Transportation over Water

1. Transportation of explosives by vessel must be in accordance with local rules and
regulations. Any necessary permits and licenses must be obtained before trans-
portation of the explosives.
2. Vessels carrying explosives must display red flags and notices indicating the
nature of the cargo.
3. Supervisors must be notified before shipping explosives and upon the arrival of
the explosives offshore.
VI. Handling and Use

A. Blasting Approval and Permits
1. No blasting should be permitted on any Chevron project until approval has been
given in writing by Chevron. When applying for permission to commence

blasting operations, the blaster or contractor should provide Chevron with the
following information:
a. Location of the proposed blast site;
b. Proposed start date and time for blasting activities;
c. Anticipated duration of blasting operations;
d. Names of contractor or subcontractor executing the blast;
e. Name of blasters in charge of the work;
f. A copy of the blasting plan;
g. Copy of confirmation of local authoritys approval or permission to blast (if a
requirement);
h. Copy of the contractors written procedures for the safe use and handling of
explosives; and,
i. Any other information required by local procedures.
2. An approved Blasting Permit should be completed by the blaster and signed by
the Chevron representative responsible for the operation, or his designate. A copy
should be kept at the blast site.
3. Examples of a blasting permit and safety checklist are located in Appendixes II
and III, respectively.
B. General Requirements
1. Precautions must be taken to prevent accidental initiation of electric detonators
from currents induced by radar and radio transmitters, lightning, adjacent power
lines, dust and snow storms, or other sources of extraneous electricity. These
precautions include the following:
a. Make sure no radio transmitters (AM, FM, CB, etc.) are located closer to the
blast site than recommended in the Tables of Distances for RF Transmitters
in Appendix IV.
b. Keep mobile transmitters away from blast sites. Place signs indicating that
two-way radios within 1000 feet of blast sites must be turned off. (Two-way
radios used to provide instantaneous communication between the blaster and
guards may be used as long as the minimum separation distances, as speci-
fied in Appendix IV, are maintained.)
c. Use the higher frequency bands, 450-470 MHz, for mobile transmitters.
d. Avoid large loops in blasting wiring by running lead wires parallel to each
other and close together (preferably twisted pairs).
e. Surface, underground use, and all handling of explosive materials must be
discontinued during the approach and progress of an electrical storm. All
personnel must move to a safe location.

2. If the blasting area is near a landing strip or helipad, aircraft should be notified to
stay clear of the area until blasting is complete.
3. Explosives or blasting materials that are obviously damaged or deteriorated must
be reported to the supervisor immediately and may not be used in any blasting
operation.
4. Fuses, detonators and/or explosives must not be abandoned. All must be returned
to a suitable storage magazine until they can be disposed in a safe and proper
manner.
5. Thawing of frozen explosives must be done in accordance with the manufac-
turers recommendations. Thawing must never be done near an open fire or a
steam boiler or by direct contact with steam or hot water.
6. Explosives must never be carried in the pockets of a persons clothing.
7. Explosives must not be exposed to excessive heat, flames, sparks, or impacts.
8. Smoking, welding, or open flames must not be allowed within 15.25 meters
(50 ft.) of explosives.
9. Never strike, tamper with or attempt to investigate the contents of a blasting cap.
10. Use standard crimping tools and a dry, safe place for fuse cutting and crimping
detonators to explosives. Crimping with the teeth or a knife must be prohibited.
11. Explosive cartridges must only be cut or pierced with non-sparking tools on a
smooth, grit free wooden surface.
12. The stripping of explosive cartridges is prohibited.
13. All explosives other than the one being primed and those already loaded must
remain in the magazine until after the blast.
14. Safety fuses must not be capped and cartridges must not be primed in any area
where explosives are stored.
15. Safety fuses must be handled with care to prevent pinching or binding. Damaged
safety fuses must not be used.
16. In cold weather, safety fuses should be warmed before handling.
17. Do not use safety fuses shorter than 2 meters (5 ft.) during blasting operations.
18. Blasting lines must not be strung across power conductors, pipelines, railroad
tracks, or within 7 meters (23 ft.) of bare power lines.
19. Blasting detonators from different manufacturers should not be used together.
20. Blasting circuits must be tested with a galvanometer before connecting to lead
wires and blasting cable. The lead wires and blasting cable must also be tested.
21. No person should be allowed to blast alone.
22. Blasting should only be permitted during daylight hours.

C. Preparing Drill Holes

1. Drill holes must be large enough to permit free insertion of cartridges of explo-
sive materials.
2. Do not drill within 15 cm (5.9 in.) of the remaining portion of a misfired hole.
D. Loading Explosives at the Blast Area

1. In order to warn the public and other workers and to prevent unauthorized entry,
the blast area must be identified by the use of warning signs, cones, red flags,
barricades or any other equally effective means.
2. The blast area must be free of operating equipment and all non-essential
personnel.
3. No one may enter or pass through the blast area without authorization of the
blaster.
4. The blaster must make a complete inspection of the area to ensure unsafe condi-
tions do not exist.
5. Unsafe conditions should be brought to the attention of the supervisor who must
ensure they are corrected before loading starts.
6. The blaster and his assistant should never look directly into a drill hole while it is
being loaded.
7. The holes must be loaded according to the blasters instructions. The cord should
be guided to prevent it from being tangled or cut.
8. If loading is interrupted for any reason, blasting materials must be guarded
continuously.
9. If there are any indications of the hole caving-in or plugging while loading, the
blaster must be notified.
10. Only approved tamping poles, made of non-sparking, anti-static material, may be
used with permission of the blaster.
11. Do not use violent force when tamping explosives.
12. Do not tamp a primer.
13. If the detonating cord is broken, the blaster needs to be notified.
14. If an undetonated charge is left in the hole, the area must be clearly marked with
signs, cones, red flags or berms.
15. Undetonated charges must be shot as soon as possible after loading or within 30
calendar days.

E. Guarding and Clearing Blast Area

1. The blaster must inform each guard of the area for which he/she will be respon-
sible for guarding. Specific instructions are to be given for any abnormal condi-
tions the guard may encounter.
2. Guards must ensure that all personnel and equipment are removed from the blast
area. When their areas are cleared, the guards must station themselves to prevent
any person from entering the blast area.
3. Before the blast is detonated, the blaster must check with the guards to verify that
the blast area is secure.
4. If anyone moves into the blast area after a guard has given the signal that it is
clear to blast, the guard must immediately contact the blaster by radio or other
means to stop the blast procedure.
5. Guards must continue to block access to the area until it has been cleared by the
blaster.
F. Firing of Explosives
1. Blasts must not be fired without a positive signal and definite assurance that all
surplus explosives are in a safe place, and that all persons are at a safe distance or
under sufficient cover.
2. The blaster should call for radio silence before triggering the blast. The purpose
of radio silence is give control of the radio frequency to the blaster so that the
blaster and others involved with the blasting operation can make proper notifica-
tions by radio.
3. Depending upon the location of the blast site, the blaster should give notification
of blast time by radio to the nearest aircraft dispatcher and other appropriate
persons such as the facility operator or local Chevron representative. Notifica-
tions should be made at the following intervals:
a. One hour before the scheduled blast time;
b. Fifteen minutes before the blast;
c. Five minutes before the blast, the blaster should indicate the blast time and
call for radio silence;
d. After the shot has been fired and the blast site has been inspected and
confirmed safe, the blaster should provide an All Clear notification.
4. A code of warning signals approved by Chevron must be used to give warning of
the blast to those in the immediate vicinity of the blast. Signals should be given
in a manner similar to the following:
a. One long signal, 15 minutes prior to blasting;
b. Three long signals, five minutes before the blast;

c. Ten short signals when the blaster is ready to fire the shot. Following the
tenth signal, the blaster will fire the shot if he is satisfied that the area is clear.
d. One long signal to indicate All Clear.
5. Warning signals should be given by the use of a compressed air whistle, a horn,
lights or equivalent means, such as flagmen or voice warning.
6. All persons involved with the blast operation must be familiar with the code of
blasting signals.
G. Inspection after a Blast

1. Immediately after the blast has been fired, the firing line must be disconnected
from the blasting machine, or where power switches are used, they must be
locked open or in the off position.
2. No person may return to the blast area until permitted to do so by the blaster.
3. The blaster must allow sufficient time for smoke and fumes to dissipate and for
dust to settle before returning to the blast site.
4. The blaster must inspect the entire blast site for misfires before allowing other
personnel to return to the blast area.
H. Misfires
1. If a misfire is found, the blaster must ensure that the proper safeguards are in
place to exclude all personnel from the blast area. Misfires must be reported to
the supervisor immediately.
2. No attempt may be made to extract explosive materials from a misfired hole. A
new primer must be inserted, and the hole re-blasted. Exception: Where re-
blasting presents a hazard, it is permissible to wash out the explosive materials
with water, or, where the misfire is under water, blown out with air.
3. Where there are misfires using cap and fuse, all personnel must stay clear of the
blast site for at least 1 hour.
4. Where there are misfires using other non-electric detonators (that is, other than
cap and fuse) or using electric detonators, all personnel must stay clear of the
blast site for at least 30 minutes.
5. No misfire or missed hole may be abandoned.
6. Where a misfire is suspected, all initiating circuits (electric or non-electric) must
be traced carefully and a search made for unexploded charges.
7. No drilling, digging, or picking is permitted until all misfires have been deto-
nated or until the authority having jurisdiction approves the resumption of work.
8. Each misfired hole must be marked. Misfired holes that are not marked must be
guarded.

VII. Other Explosive Devices

A. Well Servicing Operations
1. Devices containing explosives, such as perforating guns, string shots or chemical
cutters must only be handled under the direct supervision of qualified personnel.
2. All explosive tools armed on-site must be immediately disarmed upon retrieval if
they have not fired.
3. Electrical grounding, or bonding as appropriate, between the wellhead, wireline
service unit and the rig structure must be made before attaching a tool containing
an explosive to the wireline conductor. Further, any other metal structure, such as
a pipe rack or catwalk, which might contact the wireline cable or gun during any
phase of the perforating operation, must also be bonded electrically.
4. All non-essential personnel must be kept away from the area of any tool
containing explosives while the tool is being armed, placed in the well, removed
from the well or while being disarmed.
5. If any tool removed from the well is suspected of having trapped pressure, a qual-
ified person must relieve the trapped pressure using procedures and/or devices
appropriate for the operation.
6. Radio transmitting units, except those that have been designed for use around
detonators, must not be operated within the minimum range of distances for the
particular kind of transmitter as noted in Appendix IV.
a. Transmitters within the minimum range of distance must be placed in the
power-off position with the power cord disconnected.
b. Field personnel with portable radios, boat operators and aircraft pilots must
be notified of perforating operations so that radio silence may be maintained
during perforating operations.
c. Precautions must be taken on land locations to notify visitors of perforating
operations so that radio silence can be maintained. This can be accomplished
by the use of legible, conspicuously located signs or by posting guards at
access points to the blasting area.
7. The perforating operations must be suspended and the loaded tool safely isolated
if an electrical storm is imminent in the job area.
8. All firing circuits must have a means or method to prevent the inadvertent activa-
tion of the electrical firing circuit.
9. Explosive charges employed during well service operations must be transported
as explosives. (See Section V.)
10. Explosive devices must not be transported with detonators installed unless instal-
lation of the detonator is necessary at the time of loading.

11. Upon completion of the perforating operation, the work area must be inspected
and a qualified person must remove all explosives from the site.
B. Pyrotechnic Emergency Signaling Devices

Pyrotechnic emergency signaling devices, including but not limited to flares, rockets,
and Very pistol cartridges, must be stored in containers designed to prevent their acci-
dental discharge and to protect the devices from moisture. They must also be stored
separately from other explosives.
VIII. Disposal
General
1. Empty containers, paper and fiber packing materials that previously contained
explosive materials must be disposed of or reused in an approved manner and in
accordance with local laws and regulations.
2. All explosive materials that are obviously deteriorated or damaged must not be
used. The person responsible must contact the manufacturer for assistance imme-
diately.
3. In the event that it becomes necessary to destroy any explosives due to damaged
containers, deterioration, or any other reason, all handling of the explosives must
cease and the manufacturer contacted for assistance immediately. The manufac-
turers advice must be followed without deviation.
4. All portions of charges which have blown from the shot hole, all wrappings or
boxes used in the handling of explosives, and all other waste from the blasting
operations, must be destroyed or carried away for destruction.
5. Explosives must never be buried or covered over by any materials as a means of
disposal.
Resources
Construction Guide for Storage Magazines, IME Safety Library Publication No. 1,
Institute of Makers of Explosives, August 1993
Commerce in Explosives - Part 55, Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms, Treasury,
February 5, 1990
Explosives, Safety Practices and Procedures Manual, Chevron U. K. Limited, April 1992
Explosive Materials Code, NFPA 495, National Fire Protection Association,
August 14, 1992
Explosives Safety Regulations, Alberta Regulation 272/76, The Occupational Health and
Safety Act
Explosives Transportation, Safety Rules & Practices, Stillwater Mining Company,
January 1988

MT 57.6 Explosives, Montana Department of Labor and Industry, Workmens Compensa-

tion Division, Bureau of Safety and Health, January 1972
Perforating, Pipe Recovery and Other Operations Using Explosives, Wyoming Occupa-
tional Health and Safety Rules and Regulations for Oil & Gas Well Special Services,
September 6, 1984.
Safety Guide for the Prevention of Radio Frequency Radiation Hazards in the Use of
Commercial Electric Detonators (Blasting Caps), IME Safety Library Publication
No. 20, Institute of Makers of Explosives, December 1988
Specific Code of Safe Practice for Blasting Operations, P & M Coal, McKinley Mine,
September 10, 1996
Specific Code of Safe Practice for Explosive Magazine Audit, P & M Coal, McKinley
Mine, September 10, 1996
Title 8, General Industry Safety Orders, Group 18, Explosives and Pyrotechnics,
California Code of Regulations, October 17, 1975
Well Perforating, Safe Practices Manual, Gulf of Mexico Business Unit, Chevron U.S.A.
Production Inc., January 1989

Table of Distances for

Storage of Explosives
The Table of Distances is reprinted from IME Safety Library Publication No. 2 with
permission of the Institute of Makers of Explosives, and was revised in June of 1991.
Distance in ft.
Passenger Railways
Public Highways
Quantity of Explo- with Traffic Volume of
sive Materials Inhabited Build- Public Highways More than 3000 Vehi- Separation of
(1,2,3,4)(*) ings (9) Class A to D (11) cles/Day (10,11) Magazines (12)
Pounds Barri- Barri- Barri- Barri-
Pounds Not caded Unbarri- caded Unbarri- caded Unbarri- caded Unbarri-
Over Over (6,7,8) caded (6,7,8) caded (6,7,8) caded (6,7,8) caded
0 5 70 140 30 60 51 102 6 12
5 10 90 180 35 70 64 128 8 16
10 20 110 220 45 90 81 162 10 20
20 30 125 250 50 100 93 186 11 22
30 40 140 280 55 110 103 206 12 24
40 50 150 300 60 120 110 220 14 28
50 75 170 340 70 140 127 254 15 30
75 100 190 380 75 150 139 278 16 32
100 125 200 400 80 160 150 300 18 36
125 150 215 430 85 170 159 318 19 38
150 200 235 470 95 190 175 350 21 42

Distance in ft.
Passenger Railways
Public Highways
200 250 255 510 105 210 189 378 23 46
250 300 270 540 110 220 201 402 24 48
300 400 295 590 120 240 221 442 27 54
400 500 320 640 130 260 238 476 29 58
500 600 340 680 135 270 253 506 31 62
600 700 355 710 145 290 266 532 32 64
700 800 375 750 150 300 278 556 33 66
800 900 390 780 155 310 289 578 35 70
900 1000 400 800 160 320 300 600 36 72
1000 1200 425 850 165 330 318 636 39 78
1200 1400 450 900 170 340 336 672 41 82
1400 1600 470 940 175 350 351 702 43 86
1600 1800 490 980 180 360 366 732 44 88
1800 2000 505 1010 185 370 378 756 45 90
2000 2500 545 1090 190 380 408 816 49 98
2500 3000 580 1160 195 390 432 864 52 104
3000 4000 635 1270 210 420 474 948 58 116
4000 5000 685 1370 225 450 513 1026 61 122
5000 6000 730 1460 235 470 546 1092 65 130
6000 7000 770 1540 245 490 573 1146 68 136
7000 8000 800 1600 250 500 600 1200 72 144
8000 9000 835 1670 255 510 624 1248 75 150
9000 10,000 865 1730 260 520 645 1290 78 156
10,000 12,000 875 1750 270 540 687 1374 82 164
12,000 14,000 885 1770 275 550 723 1446 87 174
14,000 16,000 900 1800 280 560 756 1512 90 180
16,000 18,000 940 1880 285 570 786 1572 94 188
18,000 20,000 975 1950 290 580 813 1626 98 196
20,000 25,000 1055 2000 315 630 876 1752 105 210
25,000 30,000 1130 2000 340 680 933 1866 112 224

Distance in ft.
Passenger Railways
Public Highways
30,000 35,000 1205 2000 360 720 981 1962 119 238
35,000 40,000 1275 2000 380 760 1026 2000 124 248
40,000 45,000 1340 2000 400 800 1068 2000 129 258
45,000 50,000 1400 2000 420 840 1104 2000 135 270
50,000 55,000 1460 2000 440 880 1140 2000 140 280
55,000 60,000 1515 2000 455 910 1173 2000 145 290
60,000 65,000 1565 2000 470 940 1206 2000 150 300
65,000 70,000 1610 2000 485 970 1236 2000 155 310
70,000 75,000 1655 2000 500 1000 1263 2000 160 320
75,000 80,000 1695 2000 510 1020 1293 2000 165 330
80,000 85,000 1730 2000 520 1040 1317 2000 170 340
85,000 90,000 1760 2000 530 1060 1344 2000 175 350
90,000 95,000 1790 2000 540 1080 1368 2000 180 360
95,000 100,000 1815 2000 545 1090 1392 2000 185 370
100,000 110,000 1835 2000 550 1100 1437 2000 195 390
110,000 120,000 1855 2000 555 1110 1479 2000 205 410
120,000 130,000 1875 2000 560 1120 1521 2000 215 430
130,000 140,000 1890 2000 565 1130 1557 2000 225 450
140,000 150,000 1900 2000 570 1140 1593 2000 235 470
150,000 160,000 1935 2000 580 1160 1629 2000 245 490
160,000 170,000 1965 2000 590 1180 1662 2000 255 510
170,000 180,000 1990 2000 600 1200 1695 2000 265 530
180,000 190,000 2010 2010 605 1210 1725 2000 275 550
190,000 200,000 2030 2030 610 1220 1755 2000 285 570
200,000 210,000 2055 2055 620 1240 1782 2000 295 590
210,000 230,000 2100 2100 635 1270 1836 2000 315 630
230,000 250,000 2155 2155 650 1300 1890 2000 335 670
250,000 275,000 2215 2215 670 1340 1950 2000 360 720
275,000 300,000 2275 2275 690 1380 2000 2000 385 770
(*) Numbers in parentheses () refer to explanatory notes below.

Explanatory Notes Essential to the Application of the American Table of Distances

for Storage of Explosives
NOTE 1: Explosive materials means explosives, blasting agents, and detonators.
NOTE 2: Explosives means any chemical compound, mixture, or device, the primary
or common purpose of which is to function by explosion. A list of explosives determined
to be within the coverage of Title 18, United States Code, Chapter 40, Importation,
Manufacture, Distribution and Storage of Explosive Materials, is issued at least annu-
ally by the Director of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms of the Department
of the Treasury. For quantity and distance purposes, detonating cord of 50 grains per foot
should be calculated as equivalent to 8 lb (3.7 kg) of high explosives per 1000 ft.
(305 m). Heavier or lighter core loads should be rated proportionately.
NOTE 3: Blasting agents means any material or mixture consisting of fuel and
oxidizer, intended for blasting, and not otherwise defined as an explosive, provided that
the finished product, as mixed for use or shipment, cannot be detonated by means of a
No. 8 test blasting cap where unconfined.
NOTE 4: Detonator means any device containing any initiating or primary explosive
that is used for initiating detonation. A detonator may not be permitted to contain more
than 10 g of total explosives by weight, excluding ignition or delay charges. The term
includes, but is not limited to, electric blasting caps of instantaneous and delay types,
blasting caps for use with safety fuses, detonating cord delay connectors, and nonelectric
instantaneous and delay blasting caps that use detonating cord, shock tube, or any other
replacement for electric leg wires. All types of detonators in strengths through No. 8 cap
should be rated at 11/2 lb (0.7 kg) of explosives per 1000 caps. For strengths higher than
No. 8 cap, the manufacturer should be consulted.
NOTE 5: Magazine means any building, structure, or container, other than an explo-
sives manufacturing building, approved for the storage of explosive materials.
NOTE 6: Natural barricade means natural features of the ground, such as hills, or
timber of sufficient density that the surrounding exposures that need protection cannot be
seen from the magazine when the trees are bare of leaves.
NOTE 7: Artificial barricade means an artificial mound or revetted wall of earth of a
minimum thickness of 3 ft. (0.9 m).
NOTE 8: Barricaded means the effective screening of a building containing explosive
materials from the magazine or another building, a railway, or a highway by a natural or
an artificial barrier. A straight line from the top of any sidewall of the building containing
explosive materials to the eave line of any magazine or other building or to a point 12 ft.
(3.7 m) above the center of a railway or highway shall pass through such barrier.
NOTE 9: Inhabited building means a building regularly occupied in whole or part as a
habitation for human beings, or any church, schoolhouse, railroad station, store, or other
structure where people are accustomed to assemble, but does not include any building or
structure occupied in connection with the manufacture, transportation, storage, or use of
explosive materials.

NOTE 10: Railway means any steam, electric, or other railroad or railway that carries
passengers for hire.
NOTE 11: Highway means any public street, public alley, or public road.
NOTE 12: Where two or more storage magazines are located on the same property, each
magazine shall comply with the minimum distances specified from inhabited buildings,
railways, and highways, and, in addition, they should be separated from each other by not
less than the distances shown for separation of magazines, except that the quantity of
explosive materials contained in detonator magazines shall govern with regard to the
spacing of said detonator magazines from magazines containing other explosive mate-
rials. If any two or more magazines are separated from each other by less than the speci-
fied separation of magazines distances, such magazines, as a group, shall be considered
as one magazine, and the total quantity of explosive materials stored in such group shall
be treated as if stored in a single magazine located on the site of any magazine of the
group, and shall comply with the minimum specified distances from other magazines,
inhabited buildings, railways, and highways.
NOTE 13: Storage in excess of 300,000 lb (136,200 kg) of explosive materials in one
magazine generally is not necessary for commercial enterprises.
NOTE 14: This table applies only to the manufacture and permanent storage of commer-
cial explosive materials. It is not applicable to the transportation of explosives or any
handling or temporary storage necessary or incident thereto. It is not intended to apply to
bombs, projectiles, or other heavily encased explosives.
NOTE 15: Where a manufacturing building on an explosive materials plant site is
designed to contain explosive materials, the building shall be located at a distance from
inhabited buildings, public highways, and passenger railways in accordance with the
American Table of Distances based on the maximum quantity of explosive materials
permitted to be in the building at one time.

Blasting Permit
Blasting will be conducted today, _______________________, at the following times:

(Date)
___________; ___________; ___________; _____________.
(Times)
At (Specific Location): ____________________________________________
AGM Coordinates: North: ______________ East: ________________
Number of charged holes: ______________
Estimated total weight of explosives: ____________
Blaster responsible for executing the blast: ______________________
Contractor Supervisor Signature: ____________________________________
Print Name: _________________________________
APPROVAL
Permission is granted to conduct Blasting Operations as outlined above. Changes may not be made
without the prior consent of the undersigned.
______________________________
Supervisor
Date: ____________________
A copy of this permit is to be retained by the Blaster at the job-site.

Guideline SO.9Appendix III
Blasting Check List
BLAST DATE: _______________BLAST LOCATION: ______________________
1. ONE (1) HOUR WARNING GIVEN TO THE Engineering SUPERVISOR, Time Completed: ______
OPERATIONS SUPERVISOR AND AIRCRAFT DISPATCHER
2. GUARDS POSTED (Not later than 15 minutes prior to blast) Time Completed: ______
3. ALL SITES CLEARED AND CONFIRMED BY RADIO WITH ON-SITE Time Completed: ______
PARTIES (Not later than 15 minutes prior to blast)
4. AIRCRAFT DISPATCHER ACKNOWLEDGES 15 MINUTE WARNING Time Completed: ______
5. ALL GUARDS REPORT THAT ALL TRAFFIC AND PERSONNEL HAVE Time Completed: ______
BEEN HALTED SINCE 15 MINUTE WARNING (Immediately prior to 5
minute warning)
6. FIVE (5) MINUTE WARNING GIVEN Time Completed: ______
7. SHOT FIRED Time Completed: ______
8. ALL CLEAR SIGNAL GIVEN AND ACKNOWLEDGED BY CONSTRUC- Time Completed: ______
TION SUPERVISOR, OPERATIONS SUPERVISOR AIRCRAFT
DISPATCHER AND ESF&H REPRESENTATIVE
BLASTER CERTIFICATION THAT SITE HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND SAFE:
Print Name: __________________________Signed: _________________________________
Date: ______________

Guideline SO.9Appendix IV
Recommended Tables of
Distances for RF
Transmitters
Find the type of RF transmitter in Tables 1 through 6 and determine the minimum
distance from blasting operations based on the power of the transmitter.
Table 2
Recommended Distances for Transmitters
Table 1 up to 50 MHz (Excluding AM Broadcast)
Recommended Distances for Commercial Calculated for a Specific Loop Pickup
AM Broadcast Transmitters Configuration
Transmitter Power Minimum Distance Transmitter Power Minimum Distance
(Watts) (Feet) (Watts) (Feet)
Up to 4,000 800 100 800
4,001 - 5,000 900 101 - 500 1,700
5,001 - 10,000 1,300 501 - 1,000 2,500
10,001 - 25,000 2,000 1,001 - 5,000 5,500
25,001 - 50,000 2,900 5,001 - 50,000 17,000
50,001 - 100,000 4,100 50,001 - 500,000 55,000
100,001 - 500,000 9,100

Table 3
Recommended Distances of Mobile Transmitters Including Amateur and Citizens Bands
Transmitter MF HF VHF VHF UHF
Power 1.6 to 3.4 MHz 28 to 29.7 MHz 35 to 36 MHz Public Use 144 to 145 MHz 450 to 470 MHz
(Watts) Industrial Amateur 42 to 44 MHz Public Use Amateur Public Use
50 to 54 MHz Amateur 150.8 to 161.6 MHz Cell Phones Above
Public Use 800 MHz
5 30 70 60 20 10
10 40 100 80 30 20
50 90 230 180 70 40
100 120 320 260 100 60
180 170 430 350 130 80
250 200 500 410 160 90
500 280 710 580 220 120
600 300 780 640 240 140
1,000 400 1,010 820 310 180
10,000 1,240 3,200 2,600 990 560
Table 4
Citizens Band, Class D Transmitters,
26.96 - 27.41 MHz
Recommended Minimum Distance
Type Hand-Held Vehicle-Mounted
Double Sideband-4 watts maximum 5 feet 65 feet
transmitter power
Single Sideband-12 watts peak envelope 20 feet 110 feet
power
Table 5
Recommended Distance for VHF TV and FM Broadcasting Transmitters
Minimum Distance (Feet)
Effective Radiated Power (Watts) Channels 2 to 6 FM Radio Channels 7 to 13
Up to 1,000 1,000 800 600
1,001 - 10,000 1,800 1,400 1,000
10,001 - 100,000 3,200 2,600 1,900
100,001 - 316,000 4,300 3,400 2,500
316,001 - 1,000,000 5,800 4,600 3,300
1,000,001 - 10,000,000 10,200 8,100 5,900

Safe Operations: Safety
Table 6
Recommended Distances from UHF TV Transmitters
Effective Radiated Power Minimum Distance
(Watts) (Feet)
Up to 10,000 600
10,001 - 1,000,000 2,000
1,000,001 - 5,000,000 3,000
5,000,001 - 100,000,000 6,000

Safe Operations: Safety Water Safety
Guideline SO.10
Water Safety
Purpose
This guideline provides information about ensuring the safety of employees and
contractors during:
Transportation by boat
Transfer between a boat and a fixed structure, ship, contractor derrick barge, or
heavy lift vessel (HLV)
Content
Guideline SO.10-2
I. Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs) SO.10-2
II. Transportation by Boat SO.10-4
III. Transfers Over Water SO.10-6
Resources SO.10-9

Water Safety Safe Operations: Safety
General Overview
Boat transportation refers to moving personnel on all types of water craft. This
guidelines includes safe practices for all operations and craft such as air boats, survival
capsules, crew boats, zodiacs, life boats, flat boats.
Policy and Requirements

Each organization should develop an appropriate water-safety policy and post specific
water-safety requirements:
At all points of embarkation, including shoreside facilities and manned (but not
unmanned) marine structures
On boats that routinely transport company personnel and contractors
Enhancing the Water-Safety Guideline

This guideline may be enhanced:
At the discretion of the boat's captain (person in charge of the vessel) whenever
conditions warrant. The captain has the final word on board.
By local management whenever weather conditions warrant.
Other Considerations
Prohibit boat-to-boat transfers of personnel in open water.
Allow transfers between boats and large ships or large vessels.
Review the water temperatures in the area of operation, as hypothermia
conditions/risks vary significantly around the world. Consider providing survival
suits to those at risk of being in cold water for extended periods.
Guideline
I. Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs)

A. Official Requirements
PFDs should meet the requirements imposed by one of the following:
1. The Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) Guidance Document of the International
Maritime Organization (IMO)
2. Local government
3. Maritime flag of registry

B. Design
PFDs' design should compare to the Type I - Life Preserver or Type V - Work Vest of
the United States Coast Guard (USCG) or equivalent. See Figure SO.10-1.
Criteria for the United Kingdom can be found in British Standard Specification BS
3595: 1981 Specification for Lifejackets (see Resources).
Fig. SO.10-1 U.S. Coast Guards Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs)

Courtesy of the International Association of Geophysical Contractors (IAGC)

C. Wearing PFDs
Personnel should wear PFDs that are securely fastened, snugly fitted, and in good
condition:
1. When transferring to or from any boat
2. When below the main work deck of an offshore structure, where full hand rails
are not provided.
3. When outside the cabin or wheelhouse of a boat (including derrick barges or
HLVs)
4. When riding in open or semi-open boats
5. When operating a small boat such as a chase or flat boat
6. At any other time (fog, haze, rough seas, etc.) that the boat captain, supervisor,
pusher, or safety engineer deems necessary
D. Enforcing PFD Rules

1. The captain is responsible for enforcing PFD rules for all passengers boarding,
riding, and leaving vessels.
Note: Captains should deny passage to persons not adhering to the PFD rules.
2. Company and contractor supervisors or designated person-in-charge are
responsible for enforcing PFD rules for all personnel under their supervision.
II. Transportation by Boat

Everyone on board must follow the captain's instructions for loading and offloading,
storing luggage and cargo, seating, and smoking.
A. PFDs
1. For wearing, see Wearing PFDs, above.
2. Boats should be equipped with at least one PFD (Type I) for each person aboard.
Personnel should become familiar with the location of on-board PFDs. Larger
boats have storage cabinets marked, Life Preservers. Small boats may have them
under seats or on seats. (They are obvious.) While the boat's owner has the
responsibility for providing signs, the boat's captain has responsibility for
verifying the presence of the PFDs and advising passengers of their location(s).
B. The Captain's Authority

The captain has the authority to refuse passage to anyone considered an unsafe
passenger.

C. Passengers' Responsibilities
1. Passengers should provide the captain with all information requested at the time
of boarding, including but not limited to their names, company affiliations, and
destinations.
2. Passengers should remain seated inside the cabin when in transit to and from
shore bases.
3. Passengers may remain on the back deck of boats during field operations,
provided:
a. Passengers obtain the captain's approval.
b. The facility's personnel is not making any overhead lifts of loads to or from
the boat.
c. The boat has approved handrails.
d. Passengers are wearing PFDs.
4. If a person falls into the water, passengers should immediately inform the boat
captain by shouting, Man Overboard! Passengers should assist in the rescue as
directed by the captain.
D. Shared Responsibilities
1. First-time Passengers
The captain should inquire and passengers should inform the captain when they
are first-time boat passengers
2. For Passenger Load
Each boat should be rated for passenger load. Passengers share the captain's
responsibility to see that the boat is not overloaded.
3. For Hazardous Materials
a. Local requirements should be established for transporting hazardous
materials such as explosives, flammables, compressed gases or radioactive
substances.
b. Personnel should:
1) Advise the captain before attempting to transport any hazardous material.
2) Ensure that all shipments of hazardous material conform to local
requirements or applicable international and local water transportation
regulations regarding identifying, hazard classifying, giving a proper
shipping name, packaging, marking, labeling, and manifesting.
c. The captain should accept for loading only those hazardous materials that
are identified, classified, named, packaged, marked, labeled, and manifested
properly.

E. Hearing Protection
The boat's operator should require that passengers wear hearing protection when
sound levels on boats are 85 dBA or greater
III. Transfers Over Water

A. Swing Ropes (See Figure SO.10-2)
1. Install swing ropes so that they return to and hang over the catwalk.
2. Do not install swing ropes under or near escape capsules.
3. Swing ropes on single-well and low-profile structures may deviate from the
three-meter (ten-foot) minimum of wire rope shown in Figure SO.10-2.
4. The end of the rope should not extend below the landing surface of the catwalk.
B. Transferring Personnel by Swing Rope

1. A deckhand, wearing a PFD, should be on deck during any personnel transfer.
This requirement applies only to boats with deckhands.
2. The condition of the sea, the direction of the wind and tide, and the physical
ability of the transferree should help determine if a transfer can be made safely.
3. No transfer should be attempted if, for any reason, an individual feels unable to
transfer safely.
4. The captain, deckhand, or other personnel should never be allowed to influence
or rush a passenger's decision during boarding or disembarking.
C. Transferring From a Boat by Swing Rope

Timing is critical when transferring personnel by swing rope from a boat to a
structure. Give the person instructions, such as the following:
1. Have both hands and feet free.
2. Grab the knotted rope high enough to clear the catwalk on the structure when the
boat is on top of a swell. In most cases, grab the rope just above the middle knot
or at eye level.
3. After landing on the platform, release the rope for the next person. Be alert to
help the next person make a safe landing.
4. Keep your legs and feet clear of the boat's bumper (the point at which the boat
bumps against the platform) before and after landing.

Fig. SO.10-2 Specifications for Swing Ropes

D. Transferring To a Boat by Swing Rope

When transferring to a boat from a structure, timing is again critical, especially as the
person is trying to land on a moving target.
Give the transferee instructions, such as the following:
1. Swing from the catwalk as the boat is beginning to rise from the bottom of the
wave.
2. Time your swing so that your feet land on the boat deck as it completes its rise.
Before swinging, watch the boat as it rises with the wave, setting timing action.
3. If your swing timing is off, and you miss the boat:
a. Continue to hold the rope and swing back to the catwalk.
b. Land on the platform catwalk.
c. Re-establish the timing.
d. Try again.
E. Transferring Material
When transferring material to and from a boat, select the method appropriate for the
type of material. Small, light items can be handed over safely; heavy or bulky
material should be transferred in a basket on a crane.
F. Transferring with Personnel Baskets

Personnel baskets are permitted only with the approval of management.
1. Construction of the Basket
The personnel basket should be built to serve as a temporary life raft for the
maximum capacity (usually four passengers) of its design and to protect the
riders if the basket should drop into the water. The basket should be
equipped with a tag line and with a stabilizer (a stretchable, shock-absorbing
suspension that cushions impact when the basket is lowered to the moving
deck of a boat) to alleviate sudden shock.
2. Responsibilities
a. A qualified crane operator should
1) Lift the personnel basket off the boat deck when the boat is at the crest
of a wave.
2) Swing the personnel basket over the side of the boat and raise it to the
platform.
Note: This procedure should prevent the basket from dropping on the boat
deck and is reversed when offloading personnel from the platform to the boat.

b. Personnel should
1) Never stand under a raised personnel basket.
2) Wear a PFD when riding a personnel basket.
3) Place only luggage and hand tools inside the personnel basket.
4) Stand on the outside rim of the personnel basket and grasp the upright
basket ropes securely.
5) Keep knees slightly bent and be prepared for unexpected moves
particularly in rough seas.
6) Not be required to transfer if they believe their personal safety may be
placed in jeopardy by doing so.
c. A supervisor or crane operator may reduce the maximum number of
passengers allowed to ride the personnel basket at one time, depending on
weather and sea conditions.
Resources
Chapter 3, Life Saving Appliances & Arrangement in International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS). The 1978 Protocol of Relating Treaties Incorporating
the 1981 and 1983 Amendments. London, UK: International Maritime Organization.
International Association of Geophysical Contractors. Chapter 3, Transportation in
Marine Geophysical Operations Safety Manual. 7th ed. Ponca City, OK: Conoco, Inc.,
1991.
Section IV. in Safe Practices Manual. New Orleans, LA: Chevron U.S.A., Inc., January,
1989.
Specification for Lifejackets. BS3595:1981. 2nd rev. London, UK: British Standards
Institution, 1981.

Safe Operations: Safety Aircraft Safety
Guideline SO.11
Aircraft Safety
Purpose
This guideline provides information about the safety considerations of operating aircraft
in support of exploration and production operations.
Content
Guideline SO.11-2
Resource SO.11-4
Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.11 - 1 January 1999

Aircraft Safety Safe Operations: Safety
General Overview
Aircraft travel is one of many transportation alternatives. A risk assessment, based upon
operational, economic and safety considerations, should be performed for all alternatives
before deciding on the preferred form of transportation. Where appropriate, we should
include Aircraft Safety as part of a transportation or overall Safety Management System.
The main recommended source of information about aircraft operations is the Aircraft
Management Guide published by the E&P Forum. The COPI Model Form Agreement -
Aircraft Services also contains many safety-related requirements that will help in
selecting and managing contract aviation services. (See Resources.)
The overall safety performance of an aviation operation depends on careful consideration
and management of many items not always thought to be part of the safety function.
Some of these are listed in Figure SO11-1. For this reason, safety cannot be separated
from overall good management of the aviation operation.
Corporation Aircraft Services provides advice and guidance to us on aviation safety
matters. They conduct reviews of aviation contractors before selection and during the
contract period. They should be consulted when planning a new aviation operation,
selecting aircraft type for a specific operation, evaluating contractors, tailoring E&P
Forum and other guidelines to local conditions, or whenever questions or issues arise.
Additionally, they can assist in our investigation and root cause analysis of any incidents.
Guideline
Some major safety-related items are discussed below. See Figure SO11-1 for a more
comprehensive list of topics, and the E&P Forum guideline for a complete discussion of
each point.
Aircraft should be operated in full compliance with rules and requirements of the
state and/or country in which the aircraft is registered, country of operation or the US
Federal Aviation Authority, whichever is most stringent. *
The normal flight crew complement is two pilots, although single pilot operations are
acceptable in some circumstances when approved by Aircraft Services. The
principles of Crew Resource Management (clearly stated roles of the flying and
non-flying pilot, etc.) shall be used to maximize communication and team effort of a
two pilot crew.
Type of aircraft, routes and other factors should be selected so that fixed wing
aircraft are able to make a safe emergency landing and helicopters a safe autorotative
landing at all times in case of an engine failure. A safe landing is defined as the
aircraft being substantially undamaged and the occupants uninjured. This may
restrict the use of any single engine aircraft in harsh environments, at night and under
Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) operations, and single engine helicopters over cold
water or where search and rescue (SAR) resources are limited. In extreme weather
or operational conditions (short daylight hours, etc.) it may also restrict multi-engine
flights where SAR resources are limited.
January 1999 SO.11 - 2 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Safe Operations: Safety Aircraft Safety
Fig. SO11-1 Safety-Related Factors in Aircraft Operations
E&P Forum Guide

Factor Chapter
Type of aircraft 1, 2
Contractor selection (if appropriate) 3
Flight Crew classification, number and qualifications 10, 12
Engineering personnel qualifications 11
Crew Resource Management 10
Crew work/rest regimes 10, 11
Fuel Quality (type/purity) 8
Refueling procedures 8
Communications and Navigation Equipment 9
Firefighting/Crash Rescue capabilities 9
Meteorological (Weather) information 9
Security 6, 9
Vehicle and Forklift Operation around aircraft 9
Passengers and Baggage 13
Passenger Briefing 13
Adverse weather policy 16
Medrescue/Medvac 16
Incident Reporting/Investigation 14
Airfield or Airstrip Location/Operation for Fixed Wing Aircraft 6
Helicopter Onshore Facilities 7
Helicopter Support of Offshore Exploration 19
Helicopter Support of Land Seismic Operations 17
Helirig Operations 18
For all helicopter operations involving instrument and/or night flights, only twin-
engine, IFR-certified helicopters operated by flight crews that are qualified and
current for instrument and/or night flight operations shall be used. *
Pressurized aircraft should be used on flights above 10,000-ft altitude. *
Turbine engines (pure jet or turboprop) are generally preferred over piston engines
since they are more reliable and have more excess power (for given engine weight)
than piston engines.
All passengers will receive a briefing in a language that they understand covering
essential safety items and emergency procedures before being transported by aircraft.

Aircraft Safety Safe Operations: Safety
Rotors Running Refueling (RRR) shall be limited to situations where it is an

operational necessity as determined by local management using a risk-based
evaluation of alternatives. There shall be written procedures, which have been
approved by Aircraft Services, and all personnel shall be adequately trained.
In all safety-related matters, the Aircraft Captain has the final authority to
decide whether to fly, whether to carry certain passengers or cargo, the route,
whether to divert to an alternate landing site, etc. The pilot must be able to make
these decisions without undue concern or pressure about operational or other non-
safety factors.
*Obtain advice from Corporate Aircraft Services before implementing any exception to
this element of the Guideline.
Resource
Aircraft Management Guide, E&P Forum Report 6.51/239. London: Exploration &
Production Forum (www.eandpforum.co.uk), March 1998.
Aircraft Services, COPI Model Form Agreement COP700. Chevron Overseas Petroleum
Company, Negotiations & Legal Contracts Group, latest edition.

Safe Operations: Health Electrical Worker Safety
Guideline SO.12
Electrical Worker Safety
Purpose
The purpose of this guideline is to provide the basic requirements necessary to ensure the
safety of electrical workers and others at a work site.
Content
Guideline SO.12-2
I. Qualifications SO.12-2
II. Safe Work Practices SO.12-3
Resources SO.12-6
General Overview
This document defines the skill and requirements necessary for workers to be considered
qualified to work on or with electrical systems. It also describes basic safety guidelines
for electrical workers and others who work with electrical equipment. Additionally, this
document provides a link to Electrical Safe Work Practices, a more comprehensive
reference for electrical worker safety.
Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.12 - 1 June 1999

Electrical Worker Safety Safe Operations: Health
Guideline
I. Qualifications
A. Minimum Requirements
To be considered qualified to repair or install electrical equipment, or to work around
live circuits, personnel, must, at a minimum, be trained in and familiar with the
following:
1. The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other
parts of electrical equipment,
2. The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed
energized parts,
3. The proper approach distances and the corresponding voltages to which the
qualified person may be exposed,
4. The decision-making process necessary to determine the degree and extent of the
hazard and the personal protective equipment and job planning necessary to
perform the job safely, and
5. Industry and local electrical standards.
B. Training
1. Training for qualified persons may be classroom or on-the-job. Workers, such as
electricians, machine assemblers or welders, that face a higher risk of electric
shock and other related injuries must receive more training. The training must
include any specific safety work practices applicable to their respective work
assignments.
2. Personnel not meeting the qualifications for electrical work as described in
Section I, Subpart A, but who may be required to operate circuit breakers or
switches, shall receive training to familiarize themselves with any electrically
related safety practices applicable to the facility or operation.
3. Training should be frequent enough so that worker competencies are current and
familiarity with infrequently maintained systems is maintained.
4. Those working on systems of 50 volts or greater shall also receive regular
instruction in first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation.
5. The following outline is an example of a basic training program:
a. Hazards
Electrical hazards of the workplace
Basic rules of electrical safety
Shock hazards
June 1999 SO.12 - 2 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Arc flash hazards and Flash Protection Boundary

Housekeeping requirements
b. Electrical warning signs
c. Accessibility to qualified people/Areas restricted
d. Safety devices and personal protective equipment
e. Inspections
f. Operation of equipment
g. Grounding requirements
h. Disconnect and restart procedures
II. Safe Work Practices

Safe work practices must be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting
from either direct or indirect electrical contacts, when work is performed near or on
equipment or circuits. The specific safe work practices must be consistent with the nature
and extent of the associated electrical hazards.
A. De-energized Parts
1. Live parts to which an employee may be exposed must be de-energized before
the employee works on or near them, unless it can be demonstrated that de-
energizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to
equipment design or operational limitations. Live parts that operate at less than
50 volts to ground need not be de-energized if there will not be increased
exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to electric arcs.
2. While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment
or circuits which have been de-energized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be
locked out or tagged or both in accordance with local procedures. A qualified
person must operate the equipment controls or otherwise verify that the
equipment cannot be restarted. See COPI HSE Guideline SO.3, Lockout and
Tagout for more information.
3. When re-energizing equipment, a qualified person must test and visually inspect
the equipment to verify that all tools, jumpers, shorts, grounds, and other such
devices have been removed so that the circuits and equipment can be safely re-
energized.
B. Energized Parts
1. If exposed live parts are not de-energized for reasons of increased or additional
hazards or unfeasibility, other safe work practices must be used to protect
workers who may be exposed to the electrical hazards involved. Such work
practices shall protect employees against contact with energized circuit parts

directly with any part of their body or indirectly through some other conductive
object.
2. Only qualified persons may work on electric circuit parts or equipment that have
not been de-energized. Such persons must be capable of working safely on
energized circuits and shall be familiar with the proper use of special
precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding
materials, and insulated tools.
3. When an unqualified person is working in an elevated position near an energized
overhead line, the location shall be such that the person and the longest
conductive object he or she may contact cannot come closer than the distances in
a) and b) below. If the unqualified person is working on the ground near overhead
lines, the person may not bring any conductive object closer to the lines than the
distances below:
a. 50 kilovolts (kV) or below - 10 feet
b. Greater than 50kV - 10 feet plus 4 inches for every 10kV over 50kV.
4. When a qualified person is working in the vicinity of overhead lines, whether
elevated or on the ground, the person may not approach or take any conductive
object, without being insulated or guarded from the live parts, closer to live parts
than shown in Figure SO.12-1.
Fig. SO.12-1 Approach Distances to Exposed Energized Electrical Conductors and Circuit Parts
Voltage range (phase to phase) Minimum approach distance
300V and less Avoid Contact
Over 300V, not over 750V 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm)
Over 750V, not over 15kV 2 ft. 2 in. (66 cm)
Over 15kV, not over 36kV 2 ft. 7 in. (79 cm)
Over 36kV, not over 48.3kV 2 ft. 10 in. (86 cm)
Over 48.3kV, not over 72.5kV 3 ft. 3 in. (99 cm)
Over 72.5kV, not over 145kV 3 ft. 7 in. (109 cm)
5. Any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure

elevated near energized overhead lines must be operated so that a clearance of 10
feet is maintained. If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance must be
increased 4 inches for every 10kV over that voltage. If the vehicle is moving and
its boom (or other elevatable portion of its structure) is lowered, then the
minimum clearance can be reduced to 4 feet, with an increase of 4 inches for
every 10kV over 50 kV.
Workers standing on the ground shall not contact the vehicle or mechanical
equipment or any of its attachments, unless the employee is using protective
equipment rated for the voltage. If the vehicle or mechanical equipment is
intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground may not stand near the

grounding point whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact.

Additional barricades or insulation shall be used around the grounding point to
avoid hazardous step or touch potentials, which can develop within several feet
or more outward from the grounding point.
6. Workers may not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts, unless
illumination is provided that enables the employees to perform the work safely.
7. Portable ladders shall have non-conductive side rails if they are used where the
worker could contact exposed energized parts.
8. Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing may not be worn if they might
contact exposed energized parts, unless they are rendered non-conductive my
covering, wrapping or other insulating means.
C. Use of Equipment
1. Portable cord and plug connected equipment shall be handled in a manner which
will not cause damage. Flexible cords must not be used to raise or lower
equipment nor may they be fastened with staples or otherwise hung in a way that
could damage the outer jacket or insulation.
2. Portable cord and plug connected equipment shall be visually inspected before
use on any shift for external defects and for evidence of possible internal damage.
Cord and plug connected equipment and extension cords which remain connected
once they are put in place and are not exposed to damage need not be visually
inspected until they are relocated. Defective or damaged items shall be removed
from service until repaired.
3. Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered in a manner
which would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor at
the point where plugs are attached to receptacles. Adapters that interrupt the
continuity of the equipment grounding connection may not be used.
4. Portable electric equipment and flexible cords used in highly conductive work
locations such as those inundated with water or other conductive liquids, or in job
locations where workers are likely to contact water or conductive liquids, must be
approved for those locations, and ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for
personnel must also be used.
5. Workers hands may not be wet when plugging and unplugging flexible cords and
cord and plug connected equipment if energized equipment is involved.
D. Protective Equipment
Workers in areas where there are potential electrical hazards must be provided with
and use electrical protective equipment that is appropriate for the specific parts of the
body to be protected and for the work to be performed.
1. When working near exposed energized conductors or circuit parts, workers must
use insulated tools or handling equipment if the tools or equipment might make
contact with such conductors or parts.

2. Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage, must be used to
remove or install fuses when fuse terminals are energized.
3. Protective shields or barriers, or insulating materials, such as rubber mats, must be
used to protect workers from shock, burns, or other electrically-related injuries
while working near exposed energized parts which might be accidentally
contacted or where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur.
4. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they
must be guarded to protect unqualified persons from contact with the live parts.
E. Alerting Techniques
Alerting techniques must be used to warn and protect workers from hazards that could
cause injury due to electric shock, burns, or failure of electric equipment.
1. Safety signs and tags shall be used where necessary to warn employees about
electrical hazards.
2. Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety signs where it is necessary to
prevent or limit worker access to areas where there is risk for exposure to un-
insulated energized conductors or circuits.
3. If signs or barricades do not provide sufficient warning and protection from
electrical hazards, an attendant shall be stationed to warn and protect employees.
F. More Information
Chevron Research and Technology Company has prepared Electrical Safe Work
Practices to use when developing local procedures. The document describes the
principles of electrical safety, the importance of job planning, preferred methods of
de-energizing and isolation, and methods for analyzing risk of electrical flashes and
shocks. Additionally, Electrical Safe Work Practices includes tools such as a job
planning checklist and charts indicating required personal protective equipment for
various tasks.
Information about electrical system design and safety requirements (such as working
clearances, grounding requirements and hazardous locations) can be found in Safety in
Designs and in the Electrical Engineering Guidelines both published by Chevron.
Resources
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.301-399 and Part 1926.400-449,
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Electrical Engineering Guidelines (Gray Manuals), Chevron Corporation, May 1996
(http://techstds.rrc.chevron.com/tech_standards/PDFs/Guidelns/Elc/elctoc.pdf)
Electrical Safe Work Practices, Chevron Research and Technology, April 1998.
(http://techstds.rrc.chevron.com/tech_standards/PDFs/ElecSafeWork/elecsafework.pdf)

Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, NFPA 70E, National Fire
Protection Association, 1995
Safety in Designs, Chevron Research and Technology, September 1996
(http://techstds.rrc.chevron.com/tech_standards/PDFs/SID/tocfwrd.pdf)

Safe Operations: Safety Facility Lighting
Guideline SO.13
Facility Lighting
Purpose
This guideline is intended to provide a general overview of lighting for industrial, office
and residential use and includes the following:
Guidance for determining lighting requirements
Guidance for selecting appropriate lighting systems and output
Guidance and consideration for performing light surveys
Guidance for maintaining lighting systems and efficient light output
Contents
Guideline SO.13-2
II. Quality of Illumination SO.13-3
III. Quantity of Illumination SO.13-4
IV. Lighting Methods SO.13-7
V. Illuminance Levels for Safety SO.13-9
VI. Selecting a Light Fixture SO.13-10
VII. Lighting Surveys SO.13-12
VIII. Maintenance SO.13-14

Facility Lighting Safe Operations: Safety
Appendices
I. Recommended Illumination for Petroleum and Chemical Industry SO.13-17
II. Lighting Survey Worksheet SO.13-21
Resources SO.13-14
General Overview
The purpose of lighting is to provide a comfortable, efficient and safe environment. Good
lighting contributes to improved morale, increased productivity, improved visibility and
fewer mistakes. In contrast, a poorly designed lighting system can result in decreased
productivity, fatigue, eyestrain and increased operational costs.
This document provides practical guidance for selecting a lighting system and conducting
a lighting survey. It describes lighting terminology, types of light sources, factors to
consider during design and maintenance and instruments used during a survey. Also
included in this document is an example of a survey form for collecting information when
conducting lighting surveys.
Guideline
I. Definitions
A. Intensity - An indicator of how much light a source produces in a given direction.
Also referred to as luminous intensity or candela.
B. Lumen - Unit of light output from a light source directly related to the candela. Also
referred to as the amount of light emitted from a source with a specific intensity.
C. Luminaire - A complete lighting device consisting of one or more lamps together
with parts to distribute light, position and protect lamps and to connect the lamps to
the power source.
D. Illumination - The amount or quantity of light falling on a surface measured in units
of foot-candles (fc) or lux (lx). For example, if 100 lumens from a light source fell on
one square foot of a surface area, the illumination level would be 100 foot-candles. If
the unit of surface area is measured in square meters rather than square feet, the unit
of illumination is expressed in lux. (1 lux = 10 foot-candles).
E. Watt - Unit of power.
F. Luminance - The brightness of an object that has been illuminated by a source or the
amount of light being emitted or reflected from a certain area of a surface. When the
area of surface is square feet, the unit is foot-lamberts. The luminance of an object
depends on the its reflectance properties. A darker object would look less bright than
a lighter object subjected to the same illuminance level.
G. Reflectance - The quantity of light reflected from a surface reported as a percentage.
A completely black surface has a reflectance or zero percent, whereas a perfectly white

surface has a reflectance 1.0 or 100 percent. Most finished surfaces have a reflec-
tance value between 5 and 95 percent. Reflectance is also referred to as the ratio
between the luminance of a surface and the illumination to that surface. (Reflectance
= luminance/illumination.)
II. Quality of Illumination

Quality refers to the distribution of illuminance to the visual task and surrounding area. It
implies a comfortable environment for visual performance, safety, aesthetics and ease of
seeing. Visibility of tasks can be affected by work surfaces, location of luminaires in rela-
tion to the task, distribution of luminaires and the task itself. All of these factors affect the
ability to see accurately and can produce adverse effects. Examples of these adverse
effects include glare and unacceptable luminous ratios.
A. Glare
Glare results when the luminance within a visual field is greater than what the eye can
adapt to, causing a disturbance in visual performance and discomfort. Glare can be classi-
fied as direct, reflected or veiling reflections.
1. Direct glare is the result of high luminance in the field of view. When light
sources have a high luminance in comparison to the luminance in the general
surroundings, direct glare is the result. It is usually associated with bright lumi-
naires, ceilings, and windows that are outside the visual task. Unshaded windows
or headlights from oncoming cars at night are examples. One way to minimize
direct glare is by selecting and positioning luminaires within acceptable ratios
(see the section on Luminance Ratios below).
2. Reflected glare is more annoying than direct glare because the eye is unable to
avoid it. This type of glare results from reflections of high luminance off shiny
surfaces within the visual task or area close to the object being viewed. An
example of reflected glare is the reflection of light on glossy paper that obscures
the print.
Reflected glare can be minimized or eliminated by
a. Changing the character of the surface,
b. Minimizing the luminance of the source as low as possible, or,
c. Increasing the number of luminaires located in positions other than those
causing reflections.
3. Veiling reflection results when reflected glare occurs on or within the visual task
itself because it veils (reduces the visibility) the task by reducing the contrast,
making it difficult to discern detail. Veiling reflection is less obvious than
reflected glare. By increasing the illumination or limiting the light directed
toward the task, veiling reflection can be minimized.

B. Luminance Ratios
Luminance ratio is the ratio between the luminance of any two areas in the visual field.
When luminance in the surrounding environment is not very different from the lumi-
nance on a visual task, the eyes are able to adapt and function productively. This is
because the luminance ratio is within an acceptable range. On the other hand, sunlight
reflecting on the water provides a large luminance difference and can cause glare,
impairing vision. Contrarily, if illumination were uniform on all surfaces with no color
variation or reflectance, there would be no difference in luminance and disorientation
would result. In general, the greater the contrast the easier the task can be seen. However,
there are limits to how much contrast is too much.
The goal is to reduce the difference in illumination levels between a task and the
surrounding area. It is usually better to have the task brighter than the surrounding envi-
ronment. Figure SO.13-1 shows the maximum luminance ratios for interior environments
where reflectance can be controlled for optimum seeing conditions. For other environ-
mental conditions, consult the IES Industrial Lighting handbook.
Fig. SO.13-1 Maximum Recommended Luminance Ratios

Between tasks and adjacent darker surroundings 3 to 1
Between tasks and adjacent lighter surroundings 1 to 3
Between tasks and more remote darker surfaces 10 to 1
Between tasks and more remote lighter surfaces 1 to 10
Between luminaires (windows) and surfaces adjacent to them 20 to 1
Anywhere within normal field of view 40 to 1
Highly reflective surfaces will generally provide the recommended luminance ratios and
improve workplace appearances. The most preferred surfaces are matte-textured because
specular reflections and reflected glare are reduced. Recommended room surface reflec-
tance values are shown in Figure SO.13-2.
Fig. SO.13-2 Recommended Reflectance Values

Surface Reflectance
Ceiling 80 - 90 %
Walls 40 - 60 %
Desk and bench tops, machines and equipment 24 - 45 %
Floors Not less than 20 %
III. Quantity of Illumination

Quantity of illumination refers to the desirable amount of illumination required for the
appropriate task when taking into consideration the task itself, the workers and the impor-
tance of speed and accuracy. Tasks requiring fine detail will need a higher level of illumi-
nation compared to a task of shorter duration.

A. Recommended Illumination Levels

The American National Standard Institute has published illuminance recommendations
for various types of activities and tasks. In the past, these recommendations were
published as single values. Today, these levels are given in illuminance categories accom-
panied by the ranges of illuminance associated with each category. (See Figure SO.13-3
for the range of illuminances.) This method allows for flexibility and accommodates for
different degrees of difficulty, varying speed and accuracy, reflectance of a task and the
decreased visual capacity of older people. Designers can then tailor to the specific needs
of individuals.
Fig. SO.13-3 Recommended Illuminance Ranges for Various Activities

Range of Illuminances
Reference Work
Type of Activity Examples Category Lx fc Plane
Public areas with dark Aircraft ramp area A 20-30-50 2-3-5
surroundings
Simple orientation for Active storage area of B 50-75-100 5-7.5-10 General lighting
short duration a farm, VDT screens throughout
Working spaces Active traffic area of a C 100-150-200 10-15-20 spaces.
where visual tasks are garage, elevators,
occasionally escalator
performed
Performing a visual Simple assembly or D 200-300-500 20-30-50
task of high contrast inspection
or large size
Performing visual Hand decorating in a E 500-750-1000 50-75-100
Illuminance on
tasks of medium bakery, sorting mail
the task.
contrast or small size
Performing visual Finished lumber F 1000-1500- 100-150-200
tasks of low contrast grading, model making 2000
or very small size
Performing visual Sewing clothes G 2000-3000- 200-300-500
tasks of low contrast 5000
and very small size
over long period of
time Illuminance on
the task,
Performing a Exacting inspection H 5000-7500- 500-750-1000
obtained by a
prolonged and 10000
combination of
detailed visual task
general, local or
Performing a special Cloth inspection and I 10000-15000- 1000-1500- supplementary
visual task of very low examining of sewn 20000 2000 lighting.
contrast and small products
size

B. Determining Illuminance Values For Desired Tasks

1. The first step in selecting the appropriate illuminance level for the intended
visual task requires determining what range of illumination or category is appli-
cable to the task. Referring to Figure SO.13-3, select the activity that is most
applicable to the task at hand.Then, note the range of illuminance values for the
selected activity.
2. Once this range is determined, a specific value can be attained using the
combined weighting factor approach. Figure SO.13-4 shows the weighting
factors used to determine the correct illuminance value. These weighting factors
accommodate for the age of observers, reflectance, speed and accuracy of the
task.
3. Combining (algebraic sum) the weighting factors determines whether the upper,
middle or lower value of the illuminance range is appropriate for the task. A
combined weighting factor of less than or equal to -2 indicates the lower illumi-
nance value of the range. A value from -1 to +1 uses the middle value. If the sum
is greater than or equal to 2, use the higher illuminance value.
Fig. SO.13-4 Weighting Factors for Selecting Specific Illuminances for Each Category
Weighting Factor
Room and Occupant Characteristics -1 0 1
Categories A to C
Occupants age Under 40 40-55 Over 55
Room surface reflection(1) > 70% 30-70% < 30%
Categories D to I
Occupant age Under 40 40-55 Over 55
Speed and accuracy Not important Important Critical
Reflectance of task background(2) > 70% 30 -70% < 30%
(1) Average weighted surface reflections, including wall, floor and ceiling reflectance in the task area. For example,
in a lobby where the ceiling height is 25 feet, only the wall and floor reflectance would be considered because
the ceiling is not in the visual field.
(2) Task background refers to the background on which the visual display is viewed. For example, paper is the back-
ground upon which letters are typed.
4. For determining whether speed and accuracy are important, consider the
following questions: What are the time limitations? How important is it to
perform the task rapidly? Will errors produce an unsafe condition? Will errors
reduce productivity and be costly? For example, if a worker is involved in a very
detailed task, accuracy is critical and time is important because of production
demands.
5. Reflectance depends on the environment including its cleanliness and color of
paint used. Typically, office environments have an 80% ceiling reflectance, 50%
wall and 10% floor. Reflectance estimates are very subjective and can be esti-
mated using professional experience, knowledge and judgement. By conducting a

lighting survey using the survey form attached to this guideline (Appendix II),
reflectance can be measured using a light meter. This will be discussed in
Section VII.
C. An Example Using the Weighting Factor Approach

1. Consider a worker under 40 years of age reading pencil writing on paper with
80% reflectance. What is the desired illumination level for this task? Refer-
encing Figure SO.13-3, the closest match to the task is illuminance category E.
Three illumination levels are possible (50-75-100 fc). To decide which illumina-
tion level is preferred, use the weighting factors in Figure SO.13-4. The
weighting factors selected are -1 for age; 0 for speed and/or accuracy; and -1 for
reflectance of task background. The algebraic sum is -1 + 0 - 1 = - 2. Therefore,
the illuminance value selected is the lowest (50 fc).
2. The method above for establishing illuminance values is only intended for inte-
rior lighting conditions where visual acuity is of high importance and is not to be
used for determining minimum safety levels. Further, the weighting factor
method should not be used for exterior environments because these locations
typically have a single recommended value.
3. The petroleum industry has established their own table of illuminance values for
specific areas/activities. Appendix I shows the illuminance values for process and
non-process areas and buildings for the petroleum industry.
4. It is important to realize that illumination levels should be increased for individ-
uals required to wear safety glasses or tinted lenses due to the restriction of light
reaching the eye.
IV. Lighting Methods

A. To provide the necessary quantity and quality of light for a lighting system, three
types of lighting are used.
1. General: General lighting provides a relatively uniform illumination throughout
an area for various tasks. Uniform illuminance is accomplished by distributing
the light so that the maximum and minimum illuminance at any point is not more
than one-sixth above or below the average level. Uniform horizontal illuminance
is appropriate for tasks that require either the same amount of illumination or are
closely spaced together. Many industrial tasks or machines such as control
panels, levers, gauges, shelving and stacks are located on the vertical plane and
require a separate lighting design.
2. Localized-general: Localized-general lighting locates luminaires to provide a
higher level of light at specific task locations and provides some degree of
general lighting. In many industries, certain tasks require illumination levels
higher than the general levels. For example, localized general lighting can be
used for inspecting engine block castings. When using localized task lighting,
general illumination does not have to meet the required illumination at the task.
However, general luminaires should be designed to provide the recommended

luminance ratios between the task and other areas within the field of view. If
workstations are close together, it may be more efficient to use a higher level of
illuminance in a general lighting system rather than several localized-general
lighting systems.
3. Supplementary: Supplementary lighting locates luminaires near the visual task
in conjunction with a general lighting system to provide a higher level or quality
of lighting not obtainable from the general lighting system alone. Task lighting is
a common form of supplementary lighting. Located close to a particular task, the
task lighting supplements general lighting to provide the recommended quantity
of light required. These are also divided into five major types based on their light
distribution and luminance characteristics. Each type has a specific application. It
is beyond the scope of this guideline to provide detailed information on supple-
mentary lighting.
B. General and localized luminaires are classified into five types according to their light
distribution. Figure SO.13-5 describes the five types of light distribution used specif-
ically for industrial interior applications. Each type of distribution has its own char-
acteristics and must be evaluated for its applicability to the particular task. No one
system can be recommended over all the others.
C. Direct types are the most efficient, but tend to produce disturbing shadows and glare,
whereas indirect types are the least efficient and seldom used in industry but produce
an overall comfort. Most industries use either direct or semi-direct. Luminaires emit-
ting light upward on the ceiling and walls is preferred. The illuminated ceiling helps
to minimize luminance ratios between luminaires and their background. This in turn
reduces the dungeon effect of total direct lighting and provides a more comfort-
able atmosphere.
Fig. SO.13-5 Luminaire Classification by Lighting Distribution

Luminaire Class Description
Direct Emits 90-100% of light downward.
Provides efficient illumination for working on surfaces but unfortu-
nately results in shadows and glare.
Produces direct and reflected glare and shadows.
Indirect Emits 90-100% of light upward providing the most comfortable light
Difficult to maintain due to its low utilization.
Provides light by reflecting it from surfaces such as ceiling and
walls.
Seldom used in industry
Semi-direct Emits 60-90% of light upward and relies on reflection off ceilings
and walls.

Fig. SO.13-5 Luminaire Classification by Lighting Distribution (Contd.)

General Diffuse Emits light equally upward and downward and depends on the
reflectance of the surfaces within a room.
Widely used in offices and laboratories
Use is increasing in clean manufacturing areas
Semi-indirect Emits 60-90% of light downward.
Generally has visual comfort depending on ceiling reflections.
Important that ceilings and walls have high reflections because the
major portion of light reaching the horizontal work plane needs to
be reflected from ceilings and upper walls.
V. Illuminance Levels for Safety

A. Figures SO.13-6 and SO.13-7 list the absolute minimum illuminance levels for
safety. In general, lighting used for production tasks will be greater than that required
for safety alone. An illumination level of 40 foot-candles is recommended for normal
office work, whereas the minimum illumination level required for safety is 0.5-1.0
foot-candles.
B. When designing a lighting system, build in higher levels of illuminance to compen-
sate for lighting loss that will occur over time.
Fig. SO.13-6 Minimum Illuminance Levels for Safety in Normal Conditions(1)

Degree of Hazard Requiring Visual
Detection Minimum Illuminance Levels (fc)
Slight 0.5 to 1.0
(2)
High 2 to 5.0
(1) Normal conditions refers to light that will not ruin a process or pose a safety hazard.
(2) An obstacle in the path of egress should be considered a high hazard.
Fig. SO.13-7 Minimum Illuminance Levels for Safety

Area Minimum Lighting Level (fc)
Stairways 2.0
Offices 1.0
Exterior Entrances 1.0
Electrical Control Rooms 5.0
Compressor and Generator Rooms 5.0

VI. Selecting a Light Fixture

A. Selection Considerations
In selecting an artificial light source, a number of considerations come into effect.
One of the most important considerations is luminous efficiency which is expressed
as lumens emitted per watt of power consumed (lm/W). Luminous efficiency is the
effectiveness at which a lamp converts electrical energy into visible light, relating
directly to operational costs. Other considerations include maintenance requirements,
the purpose of the lighting task, lumen depreciation, lamp life, color rendering and
overall economics. Figure SO.13-8 describes typical light fixtures, their applications
and maintenance considerations.
Fig. SO.13-8 Types of Light Fixtures

Efficiency
Type (lm/W) Comments
Fluorescent 17-23 High efficacy
Long lamp life
Good for building interiors and areas with low
head room
Low profile
Incandescent 50-80 Low efficacy
Short lamp life (< 1 year)
Low lamp cost
Commonly used in homes
Mercury Vapor 50-55 High efficacy
Long lamp life (9-12 years)
Good for lighting general outside areas and
inside large buildings
Open fixtures can cause serious skin & eye
inflammation from short UV radiation if the
lamps outer envelope is broke
High Pressure 85-125 Highly efficient
Sodium (HPS) Lamp life is 3-6 years
Used in factories and commercial applica-
tions, roadways and warehouses (economical
for lighting large areas)

B. Color Consideration
1. It is important to note that not all lighting systems radiate the same wavelengths
of light. Colored systems radiate some wavelengths more intensely causing prob-
lems in color differentiation. In the selection of lighting systems, it is important
to consider color rendering. Color rendering is the degree to which the perceived
colors of the same object, when illuminated by various light sources, match the
perceived colors when illuminated by standard light sources.
2. Incandescent light resembles natural sunlight and has good color rendition. The
color of fluorescent lamps depends on the phosphors used to coat the wall of the
tube. White and colored spectrum fluorescent lamps are available, with white
lamps having the best color rendering properties. Mercury vapor lamps have poor
color rendering properties because their color spectrum is deficient in red and has
a prevalence of blue and green. HPS lamps render color even poorer than
mercury vapor lamps. Thus, mercury vapor and HPS lamps are best suited for
general-purpose lighting where color rendition is a secondary consideration.
3. Colors may be hard to discriminate when nonwhite lighting is used. For example,
yellow and white objects could appear the same in yellow or red lighting. This
can cause an increased risk of accidents particularly when warning signs become
unreliable.
4. The light fixture selection guide in Figure SO.13-9 lists fixture types and typical
applications in order of preference for locations that require maximum output of
light based on the lowest possible operating cost.
Fig. SO.13-9 Light Fixture Selection Guide(1)

Incandescent Fluorescent Mercury Vapor Metal Halide HPS(2)
Outdoors
Entrance 4 2 3 1
Emergency lights 2 4 3 1
Walkways 4 3 2 1
Roadways 1
Corridors 2 4 3 1
Interior
Emergency lights 2 1
Offices 1
Control rooms 1
Warehouses 3 2 1
Living areas 2 1
(1) Ranked in order of preference: 1 indicating the most preferred and 4 the least preferred.
(2) High pressure sodium

VII. Lighting Surveys

A. Survey Procedure
The purpose of performing a light survey is to determine if the quantity of light (illu-
mination) emitted to a visual task or environment meets the general guidelines
provided for good practice.
1. Three typical characteristics measured in a light survey include illumination
(foot-candles), luminance (foot-lamberts) and reflectance (percent). Any of the
three can be calculated if the other two are known. For example, a luminance
meter can be used to measure illumination if the reflectance is known, (illumina-
tion = luminance reflectance) and vice versa. For the purpose of this guideline,
illumination measurement is the focus but luminance and reflectance will be
explained briefly.
2. The form in Appendix II is to use when evaluating a lighting installation either
for quantity or quality of light. The survey form represents a starting point for
gathering information about the task performed, description of the lighting envi-
ronment and lighting systems used. The form helps to report illumination
measurements under actual conditions found during the survey, making note of
any changes in light output of lamps due to hours of burning and dust or dirt
depreciation. It can then be used to evaluate the effectiveness of the current
lighting system in conjunction with the task being performed. It will also help to
identify areas of improvement, such as maintenance, poor light distribution light,
inappropriate texture of surfaces causing either too much or too little reflectance.
B. Measuring Protocol
1. The general approach when taking a light measurement is to have the light fall
directly onto the sensitive cell of the light meter. The instrument should be
located so that the light sensitive cell is on the same plane as the work being
performed. This could be either in a horizontal, vertical or inclined position.
Light measurements taken in the horizontal plane are when light falls on a hori-
zontal task. For example, light measurements taken in a hallway require the light
meter to be located horizontally along the floor. Light measurements on a desk
would also be taken with the sensitive cell in the horizontal position.
2. When taking interior light measurements, the light sensitive cell is generally
placed in the horizontal plane of the work being performed approximately 30
inches above the floor. This height approximates the level at which typical tasks
are performed. It is preferable, however, to use the actual height of the task if it is
known.
3. The light sensitive cell should be located in the vertical plane for conducting
surveys in certain locations. These include locations such as warehouses, library
shelving and control panels where visual performance generally requires atten-
tion on the vertical plane.

4. When taking measurements, the surveyor must be careful not to obstruct any of
the light from reaching the cell of the measuring instrument.
5. The petrochemical industry recommended illumination levels stipulate the eleva-
tion at which the measurements should be taken. The protocol changes for
various tasks. Appendix I covers the minimum average (initial and in service)
illumination values for various tasks in the petroleum processing areas and speci-
fies the measuring protocol, either horizontal or vertical plane and at what eleva-
tion. Although these levels represent a guide for good lighting, supplemental
lighting may be required for certain tasks.
6. Reflectance can be approximated using a light meter:
a. First, measure the light falling on a wall (incident light). Hold the meter in a
vertical plane so that the light sensitive cell is against the wall facing the inte-
rior of the room, capturing the light falling on the surface.
b. Second, hold the light meter 2-3 inches from and facing the wall to measure
the light being reflected from the wall. Be careful to avoid shadows. The
ratio of the reflected light to the incident light is the reflectance of the wall.
Reflectance = reflected light (luminaire) illumination. This method for esti-
mating percent reflectance can also be used when determining which value
within the range should be chosen as mentioned in Section III.
7. Survey measurements in parking lots follow a different measuring protocol by
dividing the parking lot into quadrants. A specific document for taking measure-
ments in a parking lot has been developed by the Illuminating Engineering
Society and can be purchased at a relatively low cost (see Resources for further
information).
C. Instruments for Measuring Illumination

Two types of illumination meters include the pocket-type and the more accurate
paddle-type meter. The type of instrument used depends on the degree of accuracy
desired. Typically, a high degree of precision is not needed.
1. When taking light measurements, the instrument should be used at temperatures
within the range of 60 to 90F and calibrated periodically for accuracy. Calibra-
tion can either be performed against a master instrument of known calibration or
sent to a reliable laboratory.
2. If the light meter is kept in the dark for extended periods, the photocells become
more sensitive. Therefore before taking readings the photocells should be
exposed to the approximate illumination until stabilized to overcome this sensi-
tivity. For survey purposes, this usually requires 5 to 15 minutes before taking
measurements.

VIII. Maintenance
The efficiency of a lighting system can be substantially reduced without appropriate
maintenance and care. Inadequate or improper lighting maintenance can decrease the
original illuminance to below minimum levels.
A. Light loss is caused mainly from dirt accumulation on luminaires and lumen depreci-
ation in aging lamps. Other factors include dirt accumulation on wall surfaces,
temperature, voltage and ballast efficiency. A good maintenance program involves
replacing lamps, cleaning fixtures and cleaning interior lighting surfaces.
B. Semi-annual cleaning is adequate for most luminaires. Dirtier areas require more
frequent cleaning. A good cleaning schedule will help to retain 25-50% of
illuminance.
C. Accessibility of fixtures should be considered during the design process to facilitate
future maintenance.
D. It is important to develop an adequate maintenance plan so that the minimum levels
can be achieved.
E. Periodically checking illumination with a light meter is an effective way to ensure
adequate illumination is being maintained. For a new installation or when new lamps
are installed or after being washed, light meter readings should be taken after one
hundred hours of operation and repeated regularly. When readings have decreased to
minimum recommended levels, maintenance should be performed.
Resources
IES Lighting Handbook: 8th edition, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America,
New York.
IES RP-7: American National Standard Practice for Industrial Lighting. New York.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, 1983.
IES RP-1: American National Standard Practice for Office Lighting. New York.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, 1982.
IES RP- 8: American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting. New York.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
IES RP- 20: American National Standard Practice for Parking Lots. New York.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
IES Photometric Measurements of Parking Lots. (Order # LM64 - $15.00).
Joint Lighting Survey Committee of IES. How to Make a Lighting Survey. Illuminating
Engineering Society, 57:87, 1963.
Electrical Installations in Petroleum Processing Plants. Section 6 - Lighting.
Electrical Engineering Guidelines for Lighting. Chevron Technical Standards and
Publications.

Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene, 4th edition, Plog, B. A., Niland, J. and Quinlan, P. J.
National Safety Council, 1996.


Recommended Illumination
for Petroleum and Chemical
Industry
Minimum Levels in Foot-candles
Horizontal Vertical Elevation

Initial In Service Initial In Service HPS(1)
I. Process areas
A. General Process
Pump rows, valves, manifolds 5 3 Ground
Heat exchangers 5 3 Ground
Operating platforms 5 3 Floor
Ordinary platforms 3.5 2 Floor
Cooling towers, equipment area 5 3 Ground
Furnaces 5 3 Ground
Ladders and stairs 5 3 Floor
Gage glasses 8.3 5 Eye level
Instruments (on process units) 8.3 5 Eye level
Separators 8.5 5 Top of bay
General area 1.7 1 Ground


B. Control rooms and houses
Instrument panel 46 30 60 in.
Ordinary control house 46 30 45 in.
Back of panel 8 5 15.4 10 48 in.
General area 45 30 Floor
Emergency 5 3 Floor
C. Specialty process units

Instrument panel 77 50 60 in.
II. Non process areas

A. Loading, unloading and cooling
water pump houses
Pump area 8.5 5 Ground
Control area, general 25 15 Floor
Control panel 33 20 45 in.
B. Boiler and air compressor plates

Indoor equipment 30 20 Floor
Outdoor equipment 8.5 5 Ground
C. Tank fields
Tank (stairs, ladders and gauging area) 1.7 1 Ground
Manifold area 0.9 0.5 Ground
Streets within field 0.33 0.2 Ground
D. Loading racks
General area 8.5 5 Floor
Tank car, unloading point 17 10 Point
Tank trucks, loading points 25 15 Point
E. Electrical substations/switch yards

Outdoor switch yards 3.3 2 Ground


General substation outdoor lighting 3.3 2 Ground
Substation operating aisles 23 15 Floor
General indoor substation lighting 8.0 5 Floor
Switch racks 8.5 5 48 in.
Substation- emergency 3.3 2 Floor
F. Street lighting
Process area, heavy traffic 0.7 0.4 Ground
Light traffic 0.3 0.2 Ground
G. Fence and protective lighting 0.3 0.2 Ground
H. Parking lots 0.17 0.1 Ground
III. Buildings
A. Administrative offices/buildings
Prolonged difficult task 80 70 30 in.
Difficult task 58 50 30 in.
Normal office work 46 40 30 in.
Reception areas, stairway, washroom 28 20 30 in.
Hallways 26 20 Floor
Equipment & service room 25 15 Floor
First aid room 80 70 30 in.
B. Laboratories
Qualitative, quantitative, physical test 70 50 37 in.
Research experimental 75 50 37 in.
Pilot plant, process and specialty 50 30 Floor
ASTM knock test, equipment test 45 30 Floor
Fume hoods 50 30 37 in.
Emergency 8.5 5 Floor
Stock room 25 15 Floor

Health, Safety and Environmental Guidelines: Facility Lighting

C. Warehouses and stock rooms
Indoor bulk storage 8 5 Floor
Outdoor bulk storage 0.75 0.5 Ground
Large bin storage 7.7 5 30 in.
Small bin storage 15.4 10 30 in.
Small parts storage 31 20 30 in.
Counter tops 45 30 48 in.
D. Change house
Locker room, showers 15 10 Floor
Lavatory 15 10 Floor
E. Entrance gatehouse
Entrance gate 25 15 Floor
General, halls 8 5 Floor
F. Cafeteria
Eating area 35 30 30 in.
Serving area 35 30 36 in.
Food preparation 42 30 36 in.
General, halls 13 10 Floor
G. Garage and firehouse

General area 15 10 Floor
Repair 45 30 Floor
(1) Source: IES Industrial Lighting Handbook (RP-7)

Health, Safety and Environmental Guidelines: Facility Lighting
Lighting Survey Worksheet

mpany (name and address)
vey requested by
vey by (name, title)
Description of the Illuminated Area

cribe type of work performed
sify visual accuracy /speed needed (Select Only One)

mportant N= not important C = critical
m Dimensions Length Width Height

mperature F
faces Cleanliness % Reflectance Texture

ing
ls
r
k Surface
pment
nliness: A= average C = clean D = dirty
ure: G = gloss S = semi-gloss M = matte
Description of General Lighting System
ht Sources Cleanliness Distribution Additional Comments
Sources A = average D = direct

candescent C = clean I = indirect
uorescent D = dirty S = semi-direct
mercury SI = semi-indirect
= high pressure GD = general diffuse
m
Daylighting
rces of daylight (e.g. windows)
light controls (e.g. blinds, diffusers)
Maintenance Considerations
at is the cleaning schedule for luminaires?
en were the luminaires last cleaned?
w frequently are lamps replaced? (e.g. when burnt
or replaced as a group)
e working area clean, average or dirty?

General Observation
at percentage of people are subject to direct glare from General
General localized
Supplementary
Daylight
at percentage of people is subject to reflected glare?
daylight controls if any being used?
at percentage of workers is subject to shadows at the visual
?
e the general lighting system (circle one) Good Fair Poor

e the localized general lighting system (circle one) Good Fair Poor
e the supplementary lighting system (circle one) Good Fair Poor
itional Comments:
Sketch of Area and Illumination Measurement Locations
Draw a sketch of the illuminated area showing entrances, obstructions, main orientation
of occupants and dimensions of the room including ceiling heights. Record illumination
measurements at the locations taken.

Safe Operations: Safety Managing Process Safety
Guideline SO.14
Managing Process Safety
Purpose
This guideline provides information about managing hazards in:
Design
Construction
Startup
Operation
Inspection
Maintenance
Modifying facilities
Guideline
American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice RP-750, Management of
Process Hazards, is a source of guidance on this topic. We should also consider two
additional documents (see Resources) being developed by API as resources for
guidelines on managing process safety.

Managing Process Safety Safe Operations: Safety
Resources
Management of Process Hazards, API Recommended Practice RP-750, 1st ed.
Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, January, 1990.
Recommended Practice for Analysis, Design, Installation and Testing of Basic Surface
Safety Systems for Offshore Production Platforms. API Recommended Practice RP14.
4th ed. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, September 1, 1986.
Recommended Practice for Design and Hazards Analysis for Off-Shore Structures. API
Recommended Practice RP-14J. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute.
Scheduled for summer 1993 publication.
Recommended Practice for Development of a Safety and Environmental Management
Program for Outer Continental Shelf Operations and Facilities. API Recommended
Practice. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute. Scheduled for summer 1993
publication.

Safe Operations: Safety Motor Vehicle Safety
Guideline SO.16
Motor Vehicle Safety
Purpose
The intent of this guideline is to describe the basic elements of a motor vehicle safety
program.
Content
Guideline SO.16-2
I. Basic Requirements for Vehicle Operators SO.16-2
II. Safe Vehicles SO.16-3
III. Emergency Procedures SO.16-4
IV. Accident Investigation and Recordability SO.16-5
Resources SO.16-7
General Overview
This guideline provides the basic requirements of a motor vehicle safety program such as
the minimum qualifications for drivers, training, and vehicle inspections. Also included is
information describing conduct at the scene of an accident and reporting requirements.
Lastly, the guideline includes information on investigating and recording motor vehicle
accidents.

Motor Vehicle Safety Safe Operations: Safety
Guideline
I. Basic Requirements for Vehicle Operators

A. Driver Qualification
1. Minimum qualifications should be developed for operators of Company owned
or leased vehicles. These qualifications may include the drivers age, physical
condition, driving record and level of training.
2. Employees who drive, or may have occasion to drive vehicles while on Company
business should possess a drivers license valid in the country in which they will
operate the vehicle. If in compliance with local laws and regulations, operators
who are not citizens of the country may operate a Company owned or leased
vehicle provided they have a valid International Drivers License and a valid
drivers license from their home country.
B. Drivers Responsibilities
Drivers are responsible for the safe, legal, and non-abusive operation of company and
rental vehicles. This includes the following:
1. Complying with all local traffic laws and regulations.
2. Driving defensively.
3. Not driving while under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
4. Notifying supervisors when taking prescription medication.
5. Ensuring that all vehicle occupants properly wear their seat belts.
6. Reporting all accidents and incidents to supervisors immediately or as soon as
practical.
7. Restrict the use of Company vehicles to work-related activities.
8. Reporting mechanical problems, damage and accidents promptly.
C. Driver Training
1. Driver training should be provided to all employees who drive Company owned
or leased vehicles. The training should provide a mix of classroom and on-the-
road instruction and should be administered by a skilled instructor. Dependent
upon the situation, the following types of training may be offered:
a. Basic Training for new employees or those reassigned to a position
requiring use of company or rental cars.
b. Remedial Training for drivers who have had accidents.
c. Refresher Periodic updating of basic training typically provided every 2-3
years. Training that is more frequent may be warranted depending upon the

type of driving or other circumstances (such as new or different equipment,

changes in regulations or policies, increased accident frequency, etc).
d. Special Training provided for the operators of special equipment.
2. Points to Cover
a. Local traffic rules and regulations for the operation of vehicles.
b. Company driving policies and procedures.
c. Defensive driving.
d. Local culture and attitude to driving.
e. Product or cargo knowledge and emergency procedures (as appropriate).
f. What to do in case of an accident.
II. Safe Vehicles

A. Daily Inspections
1. All drivers should inspect their vehicles daily. Any major or safety-related
defects must be reported and corrected before the vehicle is used. Minor items
not affecting safe operation of the vehicle can be corrected during regularly
scheduled preventive maintenance.
2. For some vehicles such as buses and passenger pool vehicles, a formal pre-trip
inspection should be performed and documented by the operator. The following
items should be inspected:
a. Brakes should apply evenly to all wheels.
b. Headlights should function properly.
c. All stop lights, turn lights, rear lights, warning lights, and side-marker lights
should function properly.
d. Tires should be inflated to recommended pressures, have adequate tread, and
should be free of cuts, breaks or other defects.
e. Steering wheels should be free from excessive play. Front wheels should be
properly aligned.
f. Windshield wipers should wipe clean and not streak or skip any of the glass.
g. Window glass should be free from cracks, discoloration, dirt, or stickers that
might obscure vision.
h. Horns should be functional.
i. Rearview mirrors should be installed so that the driver has a clear view to the
rear and sides of the vehicle.

j. Stalling or lugging problems should be corrected.

k. All instruments should work properly.
l. Exhaust systems should be checked for leaks.
m. Where practical to do so, the vehicle should also be equipped with a spare
tire and essential tools for road repairs.
B. Preventive Maintenance
In addition to a drivers daily inspection of a vehicle, periodic preventive maintenance
is essential. A preventive maintenance program based on either mileage or operating
hours of the equipment (as recommended by the manufacturer or Company
procedures) should be implemented to determine when to perform routine vehicle
maintenance.
III. Emergency Procedures

A. In Case of an Accident
When a Company owned or leased vehicle is involved in an accident, the priority at
the scene of the accident should always be to provide assistance to anyone injured
and to cooperate fully with authorities. In some locations, however, this may not be
practical or advisable and therefore, established local procedures should be followed.
Otherwise, use the following guidelines:
1. Render aid to the injured. Call for medical assistance or ask someone else to call.
2. Protect the scene. Place warning devices such as flares or reflective triangles to
warn other drivers. If the accident involves a spill of gasoline or other flammable
liquid, remove all sources of ignition from the scene of the accident. If this is not
possible, move a safe distance away from the scene.
3. Identify yourself to authorities and the other party and cooperate as necessary.
4. Do not make statements regarding responsibility or argue with anyone.
5. Begin gathering information to report the accident and for the investigation.
6. If the use of alcohol or drugs is suspected, the driver should be taken for testing
as soon as possible.
B. Accident Reporting
1. Drivers shall immediately report all motor vehicle accidents to their supervisor
and to security as soon as practical following an accident.
2. Motor vehicle accidents should be documented on a form such as the GO-407
(Report of Motor Vehicle Accident) and GO-407-1 (Memorandum of Accident).
These forms are available on the Chevron Intranet. From the Home page under
Resources, go to Go Forms.

3. The drivers supervisor should review and sign the accident report before
forwarding the document to local management for review.
C. Gathering Data
1. To the extent possible, the driver is responsible for the initial gathering of
information at the accident scene. Dependent upon the seriousness of the accident
or injuries to the driver, the drivers supervisor should be prepared to gather data
necessary to ensure a thorough investigation.
2. Record the time and location of the accident.
3. List the names of the drivers, passengers, and pedestrians involved. Include
information about injuries resulting from the accident.
4. Locate witnesses and obtain signed statements. If this is not possible, obtain
names and addresses.
5. Draw a diagram of the accident scene.
6. Indicate the point of impact.
7. Show the direction of approach for all vehicles and pedestrians. Show vehicles
not directly involved if the position of these vehicles affected the accident.
8. Show where the vehicles came to rest after the collision.
9. Describe the weather conditions at the time of the accident.
10. Note the construction and condition of the roadway.
11. Indicate landmarks.
12. Indicate contributory conditions such as the position of the sun, trees, utility
poles, etc.
13. Indicate sight distances and obstructions.
14. Show skid marks.
15. If a camera is available, take photographs showing the accident scene from
various angles, the travel paths of each vehicle (in both directions) and the
damage to each vehicle.
IV. Accident Investigation and Recordability

A. Accident Investigation
The following accidents should be thoroughly investigated using a technique to
determine root cause:
1. Accidents with fatalities or personal injuries.
2. Accidents resulting in property damage.

3. Accidents involving the transportation of explosives or other dangerous articles

where the nature of the cargo may have contributed to the accident.
4. Vehicles or loads of abnormal dimensions or weight.
5. Unusual circumstances.
B. Causes of Motor Vehicle Accidents

Using the information gathered at the scene of the accident, the following points
should be considered during any accident investigation.
1. Driver's fit for duty Human behavior is a primary cause in many incidents. A
number of driver-related hazards should be considered: familiarity with the
vehicle and risks involved; adequacy of defensive driving skills; stress; fatigue;
failure to use safety equipment; lacking in knowledge of cargo or product; and
blinded by glare or other obstructions.
An examination of the driver's activities at least 24 hours or more before the
accident may help determine if the driver's physical and mental condition
contributed to the accident.
2. The trip Details concerning the trip can be helpful when investigating an
accident. Consider information such as the origin, destination, distances traveled,
trip time, and stops in route.
3. Speed Because it is a contributing factor in many accidents, speed should be
given special consideration. Every effort should be made to accurately determine
the speed of the vehicles involved in the accident.
4. Intersection accidents Regardless of signs or signals, intersections should be
approached cautiously while slowing to allow the vehicle to stop if necessary.
5. Accidents involving right-of-way Check local laws for rules on right-of-way.
6. Rear-end collisions Proper following distances must be maintained.
7. Out-of-position accidents Caused by driving on the wrong side of the road and
by making U-turns or turns from the wrong lane.
8. Vehicle hazards and mechanical failures Hazards associated with the vehicle
should be considered during the investigation. These include the following: poor
vehicle design or unfit for purpose; lack of safety features; overloading or
inappropriate weight distribution; and inadequate maintenance. Reports of
mechanical failure should be verified by those responsible for vehicle
maintenance.
C. Recording Motor Vehicle Accidents

1. Classifying and recording motor vehicle fleet accidents in Chevron is determined
in accordance with ANSI (American National Standards Institute) Standards
D15.1 and D16.1.

2. A motor vehicle accident is defined as any occurrence involving a Company

owned or leased motor vehicle that results in death, injury, or property damage
beyond normal wear and tear, unless such vehicle is properly parked.
3. Those occurrences that result because of errors in judgement or technique of
drivers (company driver or the other driver) or of maintenance are to be
considered recordable motor vehicle accidents.
4. A frequency rate of motor vehicle accidents should be developed using the ANSI
standard based on the number of motor vehicle accidents per 1,000,000 miles
traveled. The frequency rate is equal to the number of fleet accidents multiplied
by 1,000,000 divided by the number of miles accumulated by the fleet.
Resources
Accident Prevention Manual for Business & Industry, National Safety Council, 1992.
ANSI D15.1-1976, Method of Recording and Measuring Motor Vehicle Fleet Accident
Experience and Passenger Accident Experience, American National Standards
Institute, 1976.
ANSI D16.1-1996, Manual on Classification of Motor Vehicle Traffic Accidents,
National Safety Council, 1997.
Driver Improvement Program, Chevron, March 1977.
Driver Training Manual, Chevron, October 1973.
Guidelines for Reporting Environmental, Safety, Fire and Health Related Incidents to
COPI (San Ramon) and Corporate Management, Chevron, August 1993.
Land Transport Safety Guidelines, The E&P Forum, September 1996.
Land Transport Safety Management System, Tengizchevroil, 1998.
Loss Prevention Guide No. 14, Reporting Motor Vehicle Accidents and or Accidental
Damage, Chevron, February 1985.
Motor Fleet Safety Manual, National Safety Council, 1972.
Motor Vehicle Operation, Marketing Operations Procedure, SO-531, Chevron, March
1994.
Professional Truck Drivers Manual, Chevron, February 1998.

Safe Operations: Fire Fire Systems: Testing and Maintenance
Guideline SO.31
Fire Systems: Testing and

Maintenance
Purpose
This guideline identifies fire-suppression equipment that requires periodic testing and
maintenance and provides guidance on the frequency and methods of these activities.
General Overview
Fire-suppression equipment routinely should be inspected and maintained. This guideline
consists of a chart of the monthly and annual servicing recommended for fire
extinguishers; fire hoses and hose reels; water spray systems; firewater pumps, monitors,
distribution systems, and hydrants; and mobile firefighting apparatus.

Fire Systems: Testing and Maintenance Safe Operations: Fire
Guideline
Testing/Maintenance
Equipment Item Activity Method Reference
Fire Extinguishers, General Monthly Checks Chevron Fire Protection Manual (FPM),
Appendix E, Page E-3; and Fig. E-1
Annual Maintenance FPM, Appendix E; Page E-3; and Fig. E-3
NFPA-10 Portable Fire Extinguishers
Fire Extinguishers, Specific Maintenance Instructions FPM
Carbon Dioxide Type Appendix E, Page E-3
Dry Chemical Type Appendix E, Page E-5
Halon Type Appendix E, Page E-5
Pump Tank Type Appendix E, Page E-3
Stored Pressure Type Appendix E, Page E-3
All Types Hydrostatic Pressure Test and FPM, Appendix E, Page E-6
Record Keeping
Dry Chemical Type Agent Clogging and Packing FPM, Appendix E, Page E-7
Fire Hose Reels Monthly Checks and Annual FPM, Appendix E; Figs. E-5, E-6
Maintenance
Fire Hoses Monthly Checks and Annual FPM, Page 1600-40 Hose Testing and
Hydrotesting and Maintenance Maintenance
NFPA-1962 Care, Use and Service Testing
of Fire Hose Including Connections and
Nozzles
Firewater Monitors Monthly Checks and Annual FPM, Appendix E; Figs. E-7, E-8
Maintenance
Fixed Water Spray Systems Monthly Checks and Annual FPM, Appendix E; Figs. E-9, E-10
Maintenance FPM, Page 1600-41 Fixed Fire Water
Systems
NFPA-15 Water Spray Fixed Systems
Firewater Pumps Weekly Pump Inspection FPM, Appendix F
Monthly Pump Load Test FPM, Page 1600-41 Fire Pumps
Annual Fire Pump
Performance Test API-610 Centrifugal Pumps for General
Refinery Service
Pump Manual Troubleshooting
Checklist, Page 1100-23
NFPA-20 Installation of Centrifugal Fire
Pumps
Manufacturer's recommendations

Safe Operations: Fire Fire Systems: Testing and Maintenance
Testing/Maintenance
Equipment Item Activity Method Reference
Structure Sprinkler Weekly Inspection, Annual FPM, Section 2100 Buildings/Facilities
Systems Cleaning and Testing Design
NFPA-13A Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems
Motor Apparatus (such as Daily and Weekly Inspections, FPM, Page 1600-41
foam pumper trucks) and Annual Performance Test NFPA-1901 Pumper Fire Apparatus
Certification
NFPA-11C Mobile Foam Apparatus
IFSTA Testing Apparatus No. 106
Foam Testing Annual Testing (may be FPM, Page 1600-18
extended to testing every three NFPA-11 Low Expansion Foam and
years for foam products stored Combined Agent Systems
inside,
In the original
manufacturer's container,
Within the manufacturer's
recommended
temperature range)
Fire Water Distribution Monthly Inspection and Annual FPM, Appendix E; Figs, E-11, E-12
Systems and Hydrants Maintenance FPM, Page 1600-41
NFPA-291 Fire Flow Testing and Marking of
Hydrants
Resources
Care, Use, and Maintenance of Fire Hose Including Connections and Nozzles. NFPA-
1962. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, 1988.
Centrifugal Pumps for General Refinery Service. Standard 610. 7th ed. Washington, DC:
American Petroleum Institute, February, 1989.
Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants. NFPA-291. Quincy, MA: National Fire
Protection Association, 1988.
Fire Protection Manual. Richmond, CA: Chevron Research and Technology Company,
June, 1990.
Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems. NFPA-13A. Quincy, MA:
National Fire Protection Association, 1987.
Installation of Centrifugal Pumps. NFPA-20. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection
Association, 1990.
Low Expansion Foam and Combined Agent Systems. NFPA-11. Quincy, MA: National
Fire Protection Association, 1988.

Fire Systems: Testing and Maintenance Safe Operations: Fire
Mobile Foam Apparatus.NFPA-11C. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association,

1990.
Portable Fire Extinguishers. NFPA-10. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection
Association, 1990.
Pumper Fire Apparatus. NFPA-1901. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association,
1991.
The International Fire Service Training Association, No. 106. Chapter 9 Testing
Apparatus in Introduction to Fire Apparatus Practices. 6th ed. Stillwater, OK:
Oklahoma State University, August, 1981.
Troubleshooting Checklist. Pump Manual: 1100-23. Richmond, CA: Chevron
Research and Technology Company, October, 1992.
Water Spray Fixed Systems. NFPA-15. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection
Association, 1990.

Safe Operations: Fire Halon in Fire Suppression
Guideline SO.32
Halon in Fire Suppression
Purpose
This guideline provides information about halons as fire suppressants and suggests
alternatives to them.
Content
Guideline SO.32-2
I. Fixed Halon Systems SO.32-2
II. Portable Halon Extinguishers SO.32-4
III. Decommissioned Halon Systems and Portable Extinguishers SO.32-4
Resources SO.32-5

Halon in Fire Suppression Safe Operations: Fire
General Overview
The Montreal Protocol agreement phases out production and consumption of CFCs and
halons by 1995 except for those essential services where alternatives are not yet
available. (See also Health, Safety and Environmental Guideline PP.2
Chlorofluorocarbons Usage and Disposal, in this manual.) Therefore, all existing and
planned applications for these substances should be evaluated and reduced or eliminated
wherever possible.
Halon that we no longer need should be stored (banked) so that it cannot be discharged
to the environment but is available for recharging existing systems.
Guideline
I. Fixed Halon Systems

A. General
The general guideline for fixed fire suppressant systems is the following:
1. Do not install new additional halon systems.
2. Leave existing halon systems in place until it is necessary to replace or recharge
them. At that time,
a. Review the justification for a fixed extinguishing system.
b. Consider alternative agents if a fixed extinguishing system is justified.
c. Replace or recharge the halon systems if alternatives are unavailable and
halon is available.
d. Not discharge halon while testing any fixed system.
e. Store (bank) unused halon obtained from decommissioned systems securely.
B. Testing System Reliability

Testing or false trips are the main cause of halon releases; therefore, releases can be
minimized if halon discharge testing is eliminated. Other tests that can confirm the
reliability of halon systems include:
1. At least annually, inspect and test (but not discharge test) all systems thoroughly
to ensure that they are in full operating condition.
2. At least semiannually, check the quantity of agent and the pressure in the
refillable containers.
If a container shows a loss in net weight or level of more than five percent or a
loss of pressure (adjusted for temperature) of more than ten percent, it should be
replaced or refilled.

3. At least quarterly, inspect and test all components of the enclosed space that are
required to make the halon system effective. These include but are not limited to:
a. Automatic door, louver, and vent closures
b. Automatic ventilation shutdown systems
c. Electrical de-energizing systems
d. All detection systems for smoke, flame, heat, etc.
C. Fire Protection Alternatives to Halon Systems

1. Computer, Control, and Electrical Switchgear Rooms
The best alternative to halon in these areas is to install a detection system and an
automatic sprinkler system.
Note: Do not use CO2 in enclosed spaces where people may be working.
Anyone trapped in a CO2-filled area will probably be asphyxiated. In a normally
unmanned, critical facility in which people may be working, a product
marketed under the name, Inergen that contains 52 percent nitrogen, 40
percent argon, and 8 percent CO2 can be used. Note that a full-flood fire
extinguishing system does not eliminate the damage to the equipment caused by
a fire in the equipment.
a. Reducing Fire Risk
1) Reduce to a minimum all combustible solids in computer equipment
room(s).
2) Store paper or other flammables away from the room itself.
3) Locate offices outside computer equipment rooms.
4) Separate rooms with fire-rated walls.
5) Select plenum wiring (wiring that will not support combustion) for
equipment.
b. Detection System
1) Select an approved smoke-detection system, one that annunciates at a
location manned 24 hours a day.
2) Provide a remote, well-identified means of cutting off the electrical
power to the equipment located inside the facility.
c. Sprinkler System
1) An automatic sprinkler system is intended to minimize structural
damage to a facility or building when initial, fire-suppression (e.g., fire
extinguishers) efforts fail.

Halon in Fire Suppression Safe Operations: Fire
2) After the emergency, the facility's computer equipment (that is wet from
the sprinkler system but not damaged by the fire) can usually be dried
and will continue to function properly.
3) A temperature high enough to activate a sprinkler system may damage
computer equipment.
4) To minimize damage from the very rare incidence of a leaking sprinkler
head, we should request that designers locate sprinkler heads to
minimize the exposure to equipment.
5) To minimize mechanical damage, we should request installers to recess
sprinkler heads in the ceiling.
2. Turbine Enclosures
CO2 systems may be selected for turbine enclosures because, as a routine, people
do not work inside these areas. However, a positive means of disengaging the
turbine's CO2 protection should be provided and used whenever anybody enters
the enclosure.
3. Existing Systems
To reduce the potential for false discharges, consider modifying systems from
automatic to manual in facilities manned 24 hours a day.
A good detection system with an alarm should allow time to investigate the
situation and decide whether or not it is one of the following:
a. A malfunction
b. An incident that can be suppressed by a portable extinguisher
c. One that needs full flood
Note: In facilities manned only part time, an abort switch should be used
to avoid false discharges during the time facilities are manned.
II. Portable Halon Extinguishers

The general guideline for portable halon extinguishers is that small Halon 1211
extinguishers are acceptable in control, computer, and electrical switchgear rooms until
satisfactory alternatives are developed and available, at which time Halon 1211 should no
longer be purchased.
III. Decommissioned Halon Systems and Portable Extinguishers

Halon can either be banked in place or sent to an offsite banking facility operated by
contractors. Never discharge surplus halon to the atmosphere unless discharging is
absolutely required to eliminate an unsafe condition.

A. Banking Unused Halon in Place

If bottles are stored locally, they should be inspected and weighed at least annually to
make certain they are not leaking halon. If they are losing halon, they should be sent
to a reclamation facility where the halon can be recycled.
1. Preparing and Storing Onsite
When a halon system is taken out of service, bottles can be disconnected,
plugged, and capped and left in their present location. This storage area was
designed for them and may be the safest place to leave them.
Keeping them onsite makes them available for use as replacement cylinders for
other similar critical halon systems, provided the cylinders are of the same size
and thread configuration.
2. Alternative Sites
a. Local
Alternatively, halon cylinders can be moved to a warehouse or other storage
area out of the sun and secured properly.
b. Other Corporate Sites
If there are no local applications for the cylinders, contact Chevron USA
Purchasing who can inventory the bottles for use elsewhere in the
corporation.
B. Recycling Halon
If banking surplus halon onsite is inappropriate, it can be sent to a reclamation
facility for recycling. These facilities are being set up around the world. Typically,
the reclaimers will weigh the halon, recycle it, and store it allowing re-purchase
up to 60 percent of the amount of halon they receive.
Contact Chevron Research and Technology Company's Fire Protection Team in the
Health, Environment and Safety Group in Richmond, California, for more
information on those reclamation operations closest to a particular facility.
Resources
Final Report of the Halons - Technical Options Committee. United Nations Environment
Program. Montreal Protocol Assessment Technology Review.
Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems. NFPA-12A. Quincy, MA: National Fire
Halon Application Within the Oil and Gas Exploration and Production Industry. The
E&P Forum Position Paper. Report No. 2.50/171. E&P Forum, March, 1991.
Ozone Depleting Substances Policy. Australia: Woodside Group of Companies, May 24,
1991.

Safe Operations: Fire Fuel: Storage and Handling
Guideline SO.33
Fuel: Storage and Handling
Purpose
This guideline provides information about safe practices for the storage and handling of
flammable and combustible liquid fuels.
Content
Guideline SO.33-2
I. Fire Characteristics of Fuels SO.33-2
II. Fuels: Storing, Handling and Dispensing, Loading and Unloading SO.33-4
Resources SO.33-5

Fuel: Storage and Handling Safe Operations: Fire
General Overview
When storing and handling liquid fuels, such as gasoline, diesel, and jet fuel, SBUs
should follow practices and codes detailed in this guideline. They are based on the
practices and codes of the American Petroleum Institute and U. S. National Fire
Protection Association.
Guideline
I. Fire Characteristics of Fuels

Requirements for the safe storage and handling of fuels are based on their fire
characteristics, particularly the flash and boiling points, as defined by NFPA-30
(Figure SO.33-1).
Fig. SO.33-1 NFPA 30 Liquid Classifications & Definitions

Reprinted with permission from NFPA 30; Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, Copyright 1990, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the National
Fire Protection Association, on the referenced subject which is represented only by the ...
NFPA-30
Classification Physical Properties Typical Uses
Class IA Flash point below 22.8C (73F), boiling Fuel additives (ether)
point below 37.8C (100F)
Class IB Flash point below 22.8C (73F), boiling Gasoline and fuel additives
point at or above 37.8C (100F) (ethanol & methanol)
Class IC Flash point at or above 22.8C (73F), and
below 37.8C (100F)
Class II Flash point at or above 37.8C (100F), Diesel, kerosene, jet fuel (Jet-A
and below 60C (140F) & JP5), and fuel additives
(Techroline)
Class IIIA Flash point at or above 60C (140F), and Not commonly used as fuel in
below 93C (200F) exploration and production
operations
A. Class I Flammable Liquids

Codes and standards restrict Class I flammable liquids most stringently because they
have the propensity to vaporize at ambient conditions and to form flammable vapor
mixtures in air.
B. Class II and III Liquids

As Class II and III liquids do not ordinarily vaporize at ambient conditions, they
present a lower fire risk until they are heated which increases their volatility. Treat
Class II and Class III liquids stored or handled within 11C (20F) of their flash
point as flammable liquids. This includes considering:

1. Ventilation (to keep vapor/air mixtures below the lower flammable limit)
2. Exposure to ignition sources
3. Drainage, diking, and impounding
4. Electrical area classification
C. Affect of Contamination on Classifications

1. In General
Contamination can change the classification of a fuel. Examples of this change
include:
a. Placing a Class II liquid into a tank that last contained a Class I liquid
b. Exposing a Class II liquid to the vapors of a Class I liquid through an
interconnecting vapor line
2. Contamination Limit
For guidance, be aware that, in the U.S., the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) sets a contamination limit of one percent.
If a flammable or combustible liquid with a lower classification (more volatile)
contaminates a reservoir of a liquid with a higher classification (e.g., gasoline
into a diesel tank), in a concentration of one percent (by volume) or more, the
entire reservoir should be considered to be composed of the lower classification.
3. Alterations to the Standard
In certain installations, the provisions of the industry standards that form the
basis for this guideline may be modified. Among the special features in a facility
or operation that may warrant such modifications are the following:
a. Topographic conditions
b. Barricades and walls
c. Adequacy of building exits
d. Nature of occupancies
e. Proximity to buildings and adjacent exposures
f. Structural characteristics and construction of buildings (wood or metal frame)
g. Characteristics of the liquids to be stored and handled
h. Nature of the operations at the facility
i. Degree of pre-fire planning and fire protection available at the facility
j. Adequacy of local emergency responders to cope with flammable or
combustible liquid fuel fires

Fuel: Storage and Handling Safe Operations: Fire
II. Fuels: Storing, Handling and Dispensing, Loading and Unloading

Figures SO.33-2, SO.33-3, and SO.33-4 provide references to U.S. industry standards for
fuels.
Specific editions of NFPA and API codes are referenced in parentheses beside paragraph
numbers because paragraphs may change from one edition to the next.
Fig. SO.33-2 Storing Fuels

Guideline
Topic (Industry Standard) Notes
Types of Approved Storage NFPA-395; 1-2.1 (1988)
Location of Storage Tanks NFPA-30; 2-3.1.1 (1990) See Table 2-1
(with respect to property lines)
Tank Shell-to-Shell Spacing NFPA-30; 2-3.2.1 (1990) See Table 2-7
Control of Spillage from NFPA-30; 2-3.3.2 (1990) Remote Impounding
Storage Tanks
Venting Storage Tanks NFPA-30; 2-3.3.3 (1990) Tank Diking
NFPA-30; 2-3.4 (1990) Tank Venting
NFPA-30; 2-3.5 (1990) Emergency Venting
Underground Storage Tanks NFPA-30; 2-4 (1990) Underground Tanks
NFPA-30A (1990) Storage, Handling, and
Dispensing
Containers and Portable Tanks NFPA-30; Chapter 4 (1990) See Table 4-2.3
NFPA-395; 1-3 & 1-4 (1988)
Tank Marking NFPA-395 (1988)
Tank Lightning Protection API-RP-2003; 3.5 (1991)
Fig. SO.33-3 Loading and Unloading Fuels

Guideline
Static Electricity Control NFPA-30; 5-4.4.1.2 (1990)
API-RP-2003; 2.3 (1991)
Stray Electrical Currents NFPA-30; 5-4.4.1.7 (1990)
API-RP-2003; Section 4 (1991)
Tank Truck/Railcar Loading NFPA-30; 5-4.4.1 (1990)
API-RP-2003; 2.4 & 2.5 (1991)
Marine Wharf Loading NFPA-30; 5-4.4.2 (1990)
API-RP-2003; 4.3.3 (1991)

Fig. SO.33-4 Handling and Dispensing Fuels

Guideline
Electrical Area Classification NFPA-30; 5-3.5 & 5-4.1.3 (1990)
NFPA-70 (1993)
Closed Containers NFPA-30; 5-4.1.1 (1990) Keep flammable liquids in
closed containers or in
properly vented flammable
liquid cabinets.
Leakage and Spills NFPA-30; 5-4.1.2 (1990) Clean up spills promptly.
Transfer from Pressurized NFPA-30; 5-4.1.4 (1990) Use of air is prohibited.
Containers (using air or inert Use of inert gas is
gas) permitted, but restricted.
Pressure Relief Valves on NFPA-30; 5-4.1.5 (1990) Use with positive
Pumps displacement pumps.
Low Melting-point Materials NFPA-30; 3-3.4 (1990) Use of low melting-point
materials is discouraged;
steel is preferred.
Dispensing NFPA-30A; Chps 4 & 9 (1990) Motor fuel dispensing
NFPA-30; 5-4.3 (1990) Incidental uses
Resources
Automotive and Marine Service Station Code. NFPA-30A. Quincy, MA: National Fire
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. NFPA-30. Quincy, MA: National Fire
National Electrical Code. NFPA-70. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protectional
Association, 1993.
Protection Against Ignitions Arising out of Static, Lightning, And Stray Currents. API
Recommended Practice 2003. American Petroleum Assoc., 1991.
Storage of Flammable and Combustible Liquids on Farms and Isolated Construction
Projects. NFPA -395. Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, 1988.

Safe Operations: Fire Liquefied Petroleum Gas: Storage and Handling
Guideline SO.34
Liquefied Petroleum Gas:

Storage and Handling
Purpose
This guideline provides information about the safe storage and handling of liquefied
petroleum gas (LPG).
General Overview
When designing LPG storage-and-handling facilities, the standards and practices detailed
in Chevron's engineering manuals and in publications of the American Petroleum
Institute should be followed.

Liquefied Petroleum Gas: Storage and Handling Safe Operations: Fire
Guideline
Guideline
Characteristics of LPG Chevron Fire Protection LPGs are hydrocarbon products with a vapor
Manual (FPM), Section 3500 pressure exceeding 276 KPa (40 psia) at 38C
(100F). These include propane, propylene, n-butane,
i-butane, and butylenes that are stored as liquids but
become gases at atmospheric temperature and
pressure.
LPG Tanks and Tank API-2510, Section 2 LPG is typically stored in ASME-Section-VIII-
Materials of pressure vessels, or in low-pressure, refrigerated,
Construction dome tanks or spheroids.
LPG Tank and API-2510, Section 3
Equipment Site FPM, Figure 3500-1
Selection
Spill Containment and API-2510, Section 3.2 Ensure that a release of LPG drains away from
Drainage FPM, Section 3540 tanks, equipment, and offsite exposures at a
minimum one percent slope.
Foundations and API-2510, Section 4
Supports for LPG Chevron Civil and
Storage Vessels and Structural Manual,
Related Piping Section 200
LPG Tank Accessories API-2510, Section 5 This topic is about mandatory equipment: liquid level
API-RP-520 & API-RP-521 gauging equipment, pressure gauges, relief valves
(Relief Devices) and venting, and shutoff valves. Optional equipment
API-RP-2000 (Venting) is also included.
LPG Piping Systems API-2510, Section 6 Follow ANSI/ASME B31.3 Piping Code.
LPG Loading, Product API-2510, Sections 7.1 This topic covers the design and construction of
Transfer, and through 7.3 and Section 7.5 facilities transferring LPG between stationary
Unloading Facilities storage and:
and Equipment A pipeline
Truck or railcar racks
Marine docks
Grounding and Bonding API-2510, Section 7.4 API Recommended Practice 2003 covers Protection
API-RP-2003 Against Ignitions Arising Out of Static, Lightning, and
FPM, Section 200 Stray Currents
Fire Protection for LPG API-2510, Section 8 The scope of API-2510A includes not only design
Facilities API-2510A philosophies for fire protection and safe operating-
FPM, Section 3500 and-maintenance procedures, but also fire control
and extinguishing techniques.
Refrigerated LPG API-2510, Section 9 This topic includes specific requirements for
Storage FPM, Section 3500 refrigerated LPG tanks.

Safe Operations: Fire Liquefied Petroleum Gas: Storage and Handling
Resources
Civil and Structural Manual. Richmond, CA: Chevron Research and Technology
Company, August, 1992.
Design and Construction of Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) Installations. API Standard
2510. 6th ed. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, April, 1989.
Fire-Protection Considerations for the Design and Operation of Liquefied Petroleum
Gas (LPG) Storage Facilities. API Publication 2510A. 1st ed. Washington, DC:
American Petroleum Institute, 1989.
November, 1992.
Guide for Pressure-Relieving and Depressuring Systems. API Recommended Practice
521. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, November, 1990.
Protection Against Ignitions Arising Out of Static, Lightning, and Stray Currents. API
Recommended Practice 2003. 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute,
December, 1991.
Sizing, Selection, and Installation of Pressure-Relieving and Depressuring Systems. API
Recommended Practice 520. 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute,
July, 1990.
Venting Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Storage Tanks. Nonrefrigerated and
Refrigerated. API Recommended Practice 2000. 4th ed. Washington, DC: American
Petroleum Institute, September, 1992.

Safe Operations: Fire Hot Work
Guideline SO.35
Hot Work
Purpose
This guideline provides information about safety considerations during hot work
operations in a producing facility. If hot tapping is also involved, see Health, Safety and
Environmental Guideline SO.36 Hot Tapping, in this manual.
General Overview
Workers should obtain a hot work permit before starting any work involving a source of
ignition near fuel. This permit should state in writing all appropriate precautions to be
taken for the specific work, including:
The type of equipment involved in the hot work
The type of hot work to be performed (e.g., cutting, welding, grinding)
The protective equipment required
Special hazards relating to the hydrocarbon product, hot work location, or type of
hot work to be performed, and measures taken to mitigate the hazards
Standby fire-suppression equipment and fire watches required
The expiration date and time of the hot work permit
We should clean equipment (vessels, manifolds, fuel tanks, etc.) to remove all
hydrocarbons before bringing the equipment into areas specifically designated as safe,
such as a welding shop.

Hot Work Safe Operations: Fire
Guideline
Guideline
Hot Work Permit Requirements API Pub. 2009 SafeCutting Covers general requirements, permit
and WeldingPractices extensions, and minimum spacing of 15
Chevron Fire Protection meters (50 feet) from hydrocarbon
Manual (FPM), Section 331 facilities.
Safety Items (to be considered API Pub. 2009, Section 8; The sample (see Figure SO.35-1) of
before starting hot work FPM, Section 331 PRO-851*, Hot Work Permit, in this
operations) guideline is preferred over Figure 300-2
shown in FPM, Section 331.
Testing for Flammable Vapor API Pub. 2009, Section 4
FPM, Section 331
Hot Work on Vessels, API Pub. 2009, Section 5
Exchangers and Tanks Chevron Tank Manual,
Section 200
Hot Work in Buildings API Pub. 2009, Section 6
Hot Work on Piping API Pub. 2009, Section 7
Chevron Piping Manual,
Section 692
* Supplies of PRO-851, Hot Work Permit, may be ordered from Chevron's Stationery Warehouse in Dublin, California.
Resources
November, 1992.
Piping Manual. Richmond, CA: Chevron Research and Technoology Company, August,
1992.
Safe Cutting and Welding Practices in Refineries, Gas Plants, and Petrochemical Plants.
API Publication 2009. 5th ed. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute,
August, 1988.
Tank Manual.Richmond, CA: Chevron Research and Technology Company, March, 1993.

Safe Operations: Fire Hot Work
Fig. SO.35-1 Sample PRO-851, Hot Work Permit
FRONT BACK

Safe Operations: Fire Hot Tapping
Guideline SO.36
Hot Tapping
Purpose
This guideline provides information about safety considerations when welding a hot tap
connection to a pipe, vessel, or tank containing hydrocarbon fluids.
General Overview
The scope of this guideline includes references to information about:
Hot tapping machinery
Metallurgy
Hot tapping preparations
Special conditions encountered during hot tapping
Procedures
Suggested hot tapping checklist

Hot Tapping Safe Operations: Fire
Guideline
Guideline
Hot Tapping API Pub. 2201Procedures for Welding
Machines or Hot Tapping On Equipment
ContainingFlammables, Section 2
Chevron Piping Manual
(PM), Sections 675 & 676.
Metallurgy API Pub. 2201, Section 3 Burn-through protection, minimum base metal
PM, Sections 671, 672, & 677 thickness, metal temperature, stress relief,
sour service, caustic, weld cracking,
properties of alloys.
Preparations for API Pub. 2201, Section 4 Written plans, personnel qualifications,
Hot Tapping PM, Sects. 673 thru 675 toxicity considerations, base metal suitability,
Chevron Fire Protection flow-through hot-tapped pipe or vessel,
Manual (FPM), Sect. 363. safety considerations.
Special API Pub. 2201, Section 5 Welding on in-service tanks, work above or
Considerations PM, Section 674 below grade in congested areas, compressed
FPM, Sect. 364 air in pipe lines or vessels, lined piping and
equipment, cased lines, special precautions
for liquids above their flash point, pipeline
plugging techniques, and welding on oil &
natural gas pipe lines.
Hot Tapping API Pub. 2201, Section 6 Selection of hot tap location, welding, weld
Procedures PM, Section 675 inspection, installation & testing of the hot tap
machine, and block valve installation.
Hot Tapping API Pub. 2201, Appendix
Checklist PM, Figure 600-10
Resources
November, 1992.
Piping Manual. Richmond, CA: Chevron Research and Technology Company, August,
1992.
Procedures For Welding Or Hot Tapping On Equipment Containing Flammables. API
Publication 2201. 3rd ed. Washington, DC: American Petroleum Institute, October,
1985.

Safe Operations: Health Medical Care
Guideline SO.61
Medical Care
Purpose
This guideline provides information about our medical care for workers who are injured
or become ill while involved in field operations.
Content
Guideline SO.61-2
I. Staff and Facilities in Field Operations SO.61-2
II. Local Hospitals and Clinics SO.61-3
III. Medical Evacuation SO.61-4
IV. Emergency Preparedness SO.61-4
Resources SO.61-5

Medical Care Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
The guideline about medical care covers a variety of working locations and conditions,
includes medical facilities and evacuation, and outlines emergency preparedness
activities. These medical guidelines should be revised as necessary to fit local conditions
and regulatory requirements and, as a result, introduce a higher standard of care than
suggested here.
Notes for foreign field operations:
It is important that an interpreter accompany any medical care giver who does not
speak the local language.
If English is not spoken commonly, medical labels/instructions should be provided in
both English and the host country's language.
Guideline
This guideline pertains to medical support for both company and contractor personnel.
I. Staff and Facilities in Field Operations

A. In General
Medical staffs the numbers of medical personnel and their qualifications
should be based on the following factors:
1. The total number of personnel employed in the particular location
2. The availability of medical service to contractors' and employees' dependents
3. The hazardous nature of the operation
4. The location of the operation in relation to distance from medical clinics and
hospitals
5. The qualifications of staff in local medical clinics and hospitals
B. For Exploration/Isolated Drilling Operations

At least one each of the following qualified personnel equipped with a suitable
field kit should accompany each producing, construction, drilling, surveying,
seismic recording or base camp operation.
1. For operations near population centers (where the patient can be transported to a
qualified doctor and medical facility in less than four hours), both:
a. A person with certified, advanced, first aid training
b. A person with an occupational first aid certificate

2. For operations in remote areas (where the patient cannot be transported to a

qualified doctor and medical facility within four hours), both:
a. A qualified physician's assistant or equivalent (e.g. a nurse practitionser)
experienced in handling industrial injuries
b. A person with certified advanced first aid training
3. For jungle/desert (or equivalent) operations with fly camps:
a. Base Camp
1) At least one qualified physician's assistant or the equivalent at all times.
2) Over 300 People: A suitably qualified doctor at all times
3) Under 300 People: A suitably qualified doctor on a monthly visit
schedule
b. Fly Camp of 20 People or More
Ideally, a suitably qualified nurse or physician's assistant; or, if that is
impractical due to local conditions, a person with certified first aid training.
C. For Large Producing Operations

Most established producing operations have medical support facilities consisting of
Company medical staff or contract medical care in an on-site clinic.
The staff's size and facilities' complexity varies. Chevron's Medical Staff has not
established staffing and facility criteria for large operations but will provide
assistance with establishing and periodically confirming the adequacy of staffing of
facilities.
All vehicles, aircraft, and watercraft should be equipped with suitable first aid kits;
workshops and offices with larger kits.
II. Local Hospitals and Clinics

A. Inspection and Agreements
Prior to start of operations, a Chevron medical officer and a representative from local
management should visit local hospitals and clinics to establish the standards of
expertise and determine the facilities available.
Agreements should be established with local medical administrators to accept, as
necessary, the transfer of patients from the field operations area to the local hospital
or an alternative hospital or both, as necessary.
B. Emergency Information
The contact, name, number, and location of the medical facilities should be posted
on the crew notice board and in the radio communication room of each field
operation.

Medical Care Safe Operations: Health
C. Other Medical Facilities

Generally, facilities of other companies or military establishments should not be
relied on for primary medical support.
III. Medical Evacuation

Procedures should be established for evacuating injured personnel whose injuries cannot
be treated at the operation's location or by the local hospital. Basically, this procedure
should involve arranging for the expeditious evacuation of the injured person by
helicopter, fixed wing aircraft, surface transportation, or a combination thereof.
COPI has contracted with International SOS Assistance to provide worldwide, 24-hour
emergency medical evacuation. Pocket or wallet cards with telephone numbers for this
service are available from any Chevron office or from the Chevron Medical Staff; the
telephone numbers are also listed in the Access Services Guide.
IV. Emergency Preparedness

A. Contingency Plan
Emergency contingency plans should be developed giving detailed information about
local medical facilities and medical evacuation procedures and including the
telephone number of SOS Assistance.
B. Training
Chevron's Medical staff is available to help develop training programs and drills.
Each organization should:
1. Arrange for appropriate employees to receive initial and periodic refresher
training in responding to medical emergencies.
2. Carry out regularly scheduled, full-scale MEDIVAC drills.
3. Provide periodic refresher training for all certified medical or paramedical
personnel to be consistent with the requirements of the individual's certifying
agency.

Resources
Refer any questions about health, medical training, emergency medical evacuation,
disability management, or site inspections to:
Dr. Ingeborg Nienhold
COPI San Ramon Clinic Director
San Ramon, CA., U.S.A
Phone: CTN-892-2979 (510-892-2979)
e-mail: ieni@chevron.com
Dr. Timothy L. Bridge (mtlb)
Chevron Corporation Medical Director
San Francisco, CA., U.S.A.
Phone: CTN-894-3926 (415-894-3926)
Fax: CTN 894-7669 (415-894-3926)
e-mail: mtlb@chevron.com

Safe Operations: Health Food and Galley Hygiene
Guideline SO.62
Food and Galley Hygiene
Purpose
This guideline provides information about:
The appropriate design, operation, and sanitation procedures for a food service
The causes of food poisoning and related diseases
Methods for preventing and steps for investigating outbreaks of disease
Content
Guideline SO.62-2
I. Sources of Exposure SO.62-2
II. Methods of Preservation SO.62-2
III. Protecting Against and Treating Contamination SO.62-2
IV. Storing and Cooking Temperatures SO.62-3
V. Handling Cooked Foods SO.62-5
VI. Facilities and Equipment SO.62-5
VII. Food Handlers' Health SO.62-6
VIII. Garbage and Refuse SO.62-8
IX. Inspections SO.62-8
X. Condemning Food SO.62-8
XI. Investigating Outbreaks of Disease SO.62-8

Food and Galley Hygiene Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
This guideline for adequate levels of food-service sanitation offers information to help
avoid outbreaks of food poisoning or intestinal disease in all food-service facilities.
Within this guideline is information about the sources of contaminants, such as:
Microorganisms (from soil, water, air, animals, insects, rodents, and people)
Chemicals (from soil, water, air, pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers)
and that food can be contaminated during:
Production
Transportation
Storage
Preparation and serving
Guideline
I. Sources of Exposure
Food can be contaminated by harmful microorganisms, toxic chemicals, poisonous
plants, and animals. Examples are as follows:
A. Microorganisms (e.g. Salmonella in raw poultry, Staphylococcus aureus in raw milk,
and C. botulinum in raw fish)
B. Toxic Chemicals (e.g. cadmium and zinc leaching from improperly utilized food
containers)
C. Poisonous Plants and Animals (e.g. poisonous mushrooms and harmful fungi and
also shellfish that have consumed the plankton, Gonyaulax)
II. Methods of Preservation

A. High Temperature (e.g. pasteurization, blanching, and canning)
B. Low Temperature (e.g. refrigeration and freezing)
C. Chemical Preservatives (e.g. acids, antioxidants, salt, and sugar)
D. Others (e.g. fermentation, smoking, dehydration, and radiation)
III. Protecting Against and Treating Contamination

Appropriate measures should be established for isolating, substituting, shielding,
treating, and preventing food from contamination.
A. Isolating
Keep all prepared, stored, or served food from:
1. Sources of harmful chemicals

2. Insects and rodents

3. Contaminating sewage and water
B. Substituting
Whenever possible, substitute mechanical processes for manual operations when
preparing food.
C. Shielding
Protect food on a buffet table from consumers by such means as:
1. Shields
Installing rigid, clear plastic shields at face height, angled outward, between the
consumers and the food to protect the food while allowing people to see and
reach it easily
2. Separations
Installing a glass or rigid plastic separation between the food and the consumers
so that they identify their choices, but the kitchen staff dishes out the food
D. Preventing
Prevention is the primary technique of disease control. Preventing contamination
involves all food processes; from the refrigerating and freezing, adequate cooking,
and proper storing of food, to refusing ill food-service workers access to food
preparation-and-service areas, or removing them from those areas if they become ill.
E. Treating
Food is treated by adding chemical preservatives to it, such as acids, antioxidants,
salt, and sugar.
IV. Storing and Cooking Temperatures

A. Storage Temperatures
Generally, high-risk foods should be stored at temperatures below 7C (45F) or
above 60C (140F) at all times to avoid bacterial growth. (See Figure SO.62-1.)

Fig. SO.62-1 Recommended Food-storage Temperatures for High-risk Foods

Type of Food Storage Period* Storage Temperature
Dairy Products 2 to 4C or 36 to 39F
For up to four days

storage only
Meat & Poultry -1 to 2C or 30 to 36F
Fish -1 to 0C or 30 to 32F
Fruits & Vegetables 2 to 7C or 36 to 45F
Eggs 2 to 4C or 36 to 39F
Frozen Foods -18C or below or 0F
storage
Long-
term
Canned Foods 21C** or up to 70F
* Establish an inventory procedure and coding system to facilitate a first-in-first-out (fifo) policy for
stored food.
** At 38C (100F) the storage life of most canned products is six months or less.
B. Frozen Meat, Poultry, Fish, and Other Bulk Items

Frozen foods should be thawed in one of the following ways:
1. In refrigerators below 7C (45F)
2. Under potable, running water at a temperature below 21C (70F)
3. In a microwave oven following one of these procedures:
a. The complete, uninterrupted, cooking process occurs in the microwave oven.
b. The food is to be transferred immediately from the microwave oven to a
conventional cooking unit where the cooking is completed without
interruption.
Some foods, such as frozen vegetables and chops, should not be thawed but should
be cooked directly after removing them from the freezer.
C. High-risk Foods
High-risk foods should be cooked so that all their parts are heated to at least 60C
(140F) without any interruption in the cooking, except:
1. Poultry, poultry stuffings, stuffed meats, and stuffings that contain meat should
be cooked so all parts are heated to at least 74C (165F)
2. Pork and pork-containing food should be cooked so that all parts are heated to at
least 66C (150F)
3. Rare roast beef or steak should be cooked to an internal temperature of 55C
(130F)

V. Handling Cooked Foods

The incubation range for pathogenic bacteria is 760C (45140F). To prevent
temperatures of cooked foods from reaching this range and causing potentially severe
health problems, cooked foods should be handled as follows:
A. In General
1. Serve them immediately.
2. Keep them on a warming table, heated above 60C (140F), until served.
Note: Be sure that warming tables maintain adequate internal and uniform
food temperatures.
3. Store them temporarily at 7C (45F) or lower.
B. Large Volumes
1. Serve promptly.
2. Refrigerate in shallow pans within 30 minutes at 7C (45F).
3. Cut bulk foods into small pieces and refrigerate within 30 minutes.
C. High-risk Foods
Reheat cooked-and-refrigerated, high-risk foods rapidly to 74C (165F) or higher
before placing them in hot-food-holding units.
Note: Do not reheat high-risk foods in hot-food-holding units.
VI. Facilities and Equipment

A. Facilities
Food storage and service facilities should be built of easy-to-clean materials. The
construction should prevent infestation from insects, rodents, dirt, etc. Specifically,
the ceiling and floor butts should be well fitted and sealed; the walls should be
smooth for easy cleaning; metal doors and doorways should be installed to hinder the
entry of mice or rats.
B. Equipment and Utensils: Selection and Cleaning

1. Criteria for selecting multiple-use equipment and utensils include:
a. Safe, corrosion-resistant, nonabsorbent materials
b. Smooth, easily cleaned and durable (under normal use) materials
c. Rust-resistant metals (stainless steel), plastics (approved for food use), or
glass

2. Guidelines for ensuring that food-service equipment and utensils are cleaned and
sanitized thoroughly include:
a. Tableware is washed, rinsed, and sanitized after each use.
b. Kitchenware and food-contact surfaces of equipment are washed, rinsed, and
sanitized after each use and after any interruption. An interruption is
considered a delay of approximately one hour or more after an operation has
begun.
c. Food-contact surfaces of grills, griddles, and similar devices are cleaned at
least daily.
d. Non-food-contact surfaces of equipment are cleaned when necessary of dust,
food particles, and other debris.
e. Equipment and utensils are immersed and sanitized for at least one-half
minute in clean, hot, potable water at least 77C (170F) or are immersed for
at least one minute in a clean solution containing at least 50 ppm of available
chlorine as a hypochlorite at a minimum temperature of 24C (75F).
Alternative: Rinse, spray, or swab equipment too large to immerse with a
solution of 100 ppm available chlorine.
3. Food-serving equipment and utensils may be cleaned and sanitized in a
mechanical dishwasher per the following guidelines:
a. Install, maintain, and operate them according to the manufacturers'
instructions.
b. Select those equipped with machine- or waterline-mounted indicating
thermometers to show the temperature in each tank and in the final rinse
water.
c. Pre-scrape and rinse off food residues in a detergent solution of at least 71C
(160F) for at least 40 seconds.
d. Ensure that the final rinse is of potable water at 82C (180F).
e. Sanitize, then air dry all equipment and utensils.
VII. Food Handlers' Health

The health, personal hygiene, and work habits of food handlers are an extremely
important part of protecting food from contamination.
A. Physical Examinations
Even food-service employees exhibiting no visible signs of sickness may carry
disease and should therefore have regular, semi-annual, physical examinations.

B. General Hygiene
Food handling workers should
1. Be removed from food preparation-and-service areas if they have respiratory
infections, infected wounds, sores, boils, fever, diarrhea, or if they vomit or have
any other disease that can contaminate food.
2. Wash their hands and the exposed portions of their arms thoroughly with soap
and warm water:
a. Before starting work
b. During work as often as needed to keep them clean
c. After smoking, eating, drinking, or using the toilet
3. Keep their fingernails clean and trimmed.
4. Refrain from using tobacco in food preparation or hygiene areas.
5. Wear effective hair restraints and plastic gloves to prevent contaminating food or
food-contact surfaces.
6. Consume food only in designated dining areas.
7. Wear clean outer clothing and maintain good personal cleanliness at all times
while in the food-service areas.
8. Follow good hygiene practices. Specifically, they should not
a. Scratch their heads.
b. Place their fingers in or around their mouths or noses.
c. Sneeze nor cough without covering their mouths with clean tissues and then
discarding the tissues and washing their hands.
9. Not pick up food with their fingers during its preparation or serving. Instead,
they should use spoons, forks, or tongs, or wear disposable gloves.
10. Handle cups and tableware by the handles and keep their fingers out of glasses,
cups, bowls, and dishes.
11. Keep the food processing and storage areas clean. The food storage areas should
be protected from:
a. Dripping of condensation from overhead pipes
b. Animal, human, rodent, and insect contamination

VIII. Garbage and Refuse

Food-service operations produce solid waste unusable food and packaging containers
that should be handled and disposed of properly.
A. Keep garbage and refuse in sturdy, easily cleaned, vermin-proof containers that do
not leak or absorb liquids.
B. Cover garbage and refuse containers with tight-fitting lids.
C. Using hot water and detergent or steam, clean containers often enough to discourage
insects and rodents.
D. Discourage rodents and insects by storing garbage properly on the food-service site
(e.g. in clean, special, vermin-proof, storage rooms that are made of easy-to-clean,
nonabsorbent materials.
E. Remove garbage frequently enough to avoid unpleasant odors and to discourage
insects and rodents.
IX. Inspections
Food service operations should be inspected at frequent intervals (not less than bi-
monthly) to ensure consistency with these guidelines.
X. Condemning Food
Local, suitably trained company or public health personnel should condemn and dispose
of any food that is considered contaminated or otherwise unfit for human consumption.
XI. Investigating Outbreaks of Disease

Plans for investigating possible outbreaks of food poisoning and for taking proper and
prompt corrective action should be developed. Such plans may include:
A. Identifying Causes
1. Initial Assessment
Make an initial assessment of the outbreak if most of the workers report the
problem. Usually, this happens within a short (three to six hour) incubation
period; and, if so, Staphylococci should be suspected.
2. Identifying Foods
Ask those affected about the specific food items they ate during the suspect
period.
In incidents where the causes are evident in the early stages of the investigation,
distribute to the workers a list of all foods served during the suspect period for
feedback on which items they ate and what symptoms they had, if any.

B. Samples
1. Food
Arrange to collect samples of the suspect foods immediately and send them to a
laboratory for analysis, looking for Staphylococci, Salmonella, or other
organisms.
2. Patients
Arrange to obtain stool and rectal swab samples from patients if Salmonella is
suspected.
3. Food Handlers
Arrange to examine food handlers' skin, nose, and throat and to collect stool
samples from them for culture tests.
C. Treatment and Prevention

From the patients' responses and from lab results, it should be possible to identify the
food consumed by all affected. Once the cause is identified and understood,
arrangements can be made for the affected workers to be treated properly and
prevention measures can be implemented.

Safe Operations: Health Potable Water Standards
Guideline SO.63
Potable Water Standards
Purpose
This guideline provides information to help ensure that an adequate supply of potable
water of proper quality is available for employees and contractors to be used for:
Consumption
Personal hygiene
Food service
Contents
Guideline SO.63-2
I. Water Sources SO.63-2
II. Safeguards for Water Systems SO.63-4
III. Treatment SO.63-6
IV. Collecting and Analyzing Samples SO.63-6
V. Remedial Actions for Contaminated Water Samples SO.63-8
VI. Disinfecting Pipeline and Tanks SO.63-10
VII. Record Keeping SO.63-12
Resources SO.63-12

Potable Water Standards Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
Storing, distributing, and protecting adequate supplies of safe and sanitary drinking water
for employees and contractors working in company facilities onshore, offshore, and
afloat is an issue of utmost importance.
When drinking water is
Improperly treated or contaminated in storage and distribution, it may transmit
harmful organisms of diseases, such as cholera, typhoid fevers, dysentery, and
common diarrhea.
Contaminated with organic and inorganic chemicals, it may cause serious,
permanent harm to human health.
The primary objectives of these guidelines are to provide :
Procedures to follow to protect the quality of drinking water, both purchased and
locally treated
Procedures for sampling and analyzing drinking water
Means of evaluating the quality of drinking water
Steps to follow for disinfecting water in an emergency
Actions to take if delivered water fails to meet acceptable criteria for quality
Note: In some remote, undeveloped areas, it may be physically impractical to comply
with all of these guidelines. Exceptions should be reviewed by local management, HSE
and Chevron's Medical staff .
Guideline
I. Water Sources
Sources of drinking water delivered to our facilities should meet the standards of the
World Health Organization (WHO) as shown in Figure SO.63-1. Samples of the
delivered water should be checked periodically to be sure that they contain an adequate
level of residual free chlorine and no coliform bacteria.

Fig. SO.63-1 Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality Reproduced by permission from: Guidelines for drinking-water
quality. Vol. 1: Recommendations. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1984. (1 of 2)
Constituents or Guideline
Character Unit Value Remarks
Physical Quality
Color TCU* 15
Odor & Taste Inoffensive to
most users
Turbidity NTU** 5 Preferably <1 for disinfection efficiency.
Total Solids mg/l 1000
(Dissolved)
Chemical Characteristics
pH Range 6.5 - 8.5
Detergents None set There should not be any foaming or taste-and-odor
problems.
Hardness mg/ml (as CaCO3) 500
Chloride mg/l 250
Copper mg/l 1.0
Iron mg/l 0.3
Manganese mg/l 0.1
Sulfate mg/l 400
Zinc mg/l 5.0
Fluoride mg/l 1.5 Natural or intentionally added; local or climatic
conditions may require modification of guideline.
Toxic Substances
Arsenic mg/l 0.05
Cadmium mg/l 0.005
Cyanide mg/l 0.1
Lead mg/l 0.05
Mercury mg/l 0.001
Nitrate mg/l (N) 10
Selenium mg/l 0.01
Radioactive Characteristics
Gross Activity Bq*** /1 0.1 If levels are exceeded, more detailed analysis may
be needed. Higher levels do not necessarily
indicate that the water is unsuitable for drinking.
Gross Activity Bq*** /1 1 Same as above

Fig. SO.63-1 Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality Reproduced by permission from: Guidelines for drinking-water
quality. Vol. 1: Recommendations. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1984. (2 of 2)
Constituents or Guideline
Character Unit Value Remarks
Bacteriological Quality
Coliforms in number/100 ml 0
distribution system
Same as above number/100 ml 3 In occasional sample but not in consecutive
samples
In emergency number/100 ml 0 Advise users to boil water in case of failure to
water supplies meet guideline.
* TCU = True Color Units
**NTU = Nephelometric Tubidity Units
*** Bq = Abbreviation for Bequerel, a unit of nuclear radioactivity that is defined as 1 disintegration per second. One Bq is 27 pico Curies (pCi)
Note: World Health Organization also requires monitoring for polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons and pesticides. If high levels are found,
alternate supplies should be considered.
II. Safeguards for Water Systems

The following design measures should be incorporated into potable water systems to
protect them from contaminated water and other materials:
A. Designing Potable Water Systems

Potable water systems should have all of the following:
1. The wells sealed from surface and near-surface contaminants
2. Pumps and storage tanks positioned to avoid runoff water
3. Back-flow preventers installed at key positions
4. Cross-connections minimized between potable and nonpotable systems
5. Certain hoses dedicated and identified for transferring potable water (to be
drained and capped after each use)
B. Well Seals
1. Seal formations containing a poor quality of water from the well.
2. Seal spaces between casings and well pipes, starting at the surface and extending
as deep as necessary to exclude surface water from entering the well.
3. Install sanitary seals and vent lines at the top of the well casing.
4. Ensure that, if there is a possibility of flooding,
a. Seals are water-tight or elevated at least one meter (3.3 feet) above the
highest known flood level, and
b. Vent openings are installed one meter above flood level.

C. Pumps
1. Install pumps at least one meter (3.3 feet) above the highest known flood level.
2. Protect them from damage by weather, vermin, and animals.
D. Storage Tanks
1. Position water storage tanks so that:
a. The bottoms are above the floodwater level.
b. There is good drainage around bottoms.
2. To keep out birds, insects, rain, and debris, provide screens for:
a. Vents
b. Overflows
c. Covered tops
Note: Covers block sunlight which warms the water and encourages the
growth of algae.
E. Cross-connections
Do not allow workers to make any connections that might allow contaminated
liquids to enter or flow back into the potable water systems, such as between:
1. Potable water systems and nonpotable water supplies
2. Sewer or drain pipes
3. Plumbing fixtures or other devices
F. Preventing Back Pressure and Back Siphon

Back pressure or back siphon may cause nonpotable water or other fluids to
contaminate potable water systems.
1. Problems
a. For back pressure to occur, the pressures in the nonpotable systems must
exceed those of the potable water systems.
Example: A fire truck at a dock pumping sea water into a hydrant system.
b. In back siphon, the pressures in the potable water systems become less than
those in the nonpotable water systems.
Examples:
1) When pressures are reduced in the potable water system by turning off
or draining these systems for repairs
2) When there is heavy usage in parts of a potable system

2. Prevention
The common means of preventing back flow are as follows:
a. Air-gap separations
b. Back-pressure units
c. Vacuum breakers
III. Treatment
A. Most Common
The most frequently selected water treatment involves the following three steps in
this order:
1. Adding chemicals to enhance combining small, suspended particles; a process
called, coagulation or flocculation
2. Removing the particles by sedimentation and filtration
3. Disinfecting to destroy microorganisms that may cause disease
Note: Chlorination is the most common disinfection method.
B. Residual Chlorine Level

Maintain the residual chlorine level for disinfection at:
1. 0.2 ml/l or higher through the distribution system
2. 0.5 ml/l or higher to remove waterborne cysts and viruses in areas where
amebiasis, hepatitis, etc. are endemic
IV. Collecting and Analyzing Samples

Collect and analyze samples for all contaminants listed in the World Health
Organization's International Drinking-water Quality in Figure SO.63-1. The frequencies
for collecting these samples are shown in Figure SO.63-2

Fig. SO.63-2 Suggested Potable Water Samples and Testing Frequencies

Contaminant No. of Samples Frequency
Residual Free Chlorine* 2 Daily
Turbidity 1 Weekly
Total Coliform Bacteria 2 Monthly
Inorganic Chemicals** 1 Annually
Nitrates 1 Monthly***
* Chlorination is not needed if we treat water by reverse osmosis, high-temperature
desalination, or ultra-violet light and store it in a totally enclosed unit (with minimal chance of
contamination).
** These inorganic chemicals are listed in Figure SO.63-1.
*** The MPL is 10 mg/l.
A. Collecting
To collect samples properly, follow these steps:
1. Contact the laboratory conducting the analysis and ask how much water should
be collected for each sample.
Note: This usually means at least 100 ml (3.4 oz) per sample for biological
samples and 250 ml (8.5 oz) for mineral and physical test samples.
2. Collect samples from randomly selected outlets of the system.
3. Allow faucets or hydrants to run at a moderate rate for two to three minutes,
without splashing, before taking a sample.
Note: Neither adjust flow rate nor rinse containers while collecting samples.
4. Fill containers to within one inch of the top; cap and label them.
B. Analyzing Samples
1. Chlorine, pH, Turbidity, and Coliform
In the absence of qualified, local, testing laboratories, the following analyses
should be performed locally. (See Figure SO.63-3 for suitable, portable test kits.)
After collecting samples, analyze them:
a. For free residual chlorine, pH, and turbidity within one to two hours
b. For coliform within 24 hours
Note: In warm climates, keep coliform samples in a refrigerator or packed
in a freezing mixture between 4 and 10C (39 and 50F) for the 24-hour
period during which we should have them analyzed.

Fig. SO.63-3 Hach Analytical Kits (or select equivalent)

PRICE
DESCRIPTION CAT. # (Approx.)
Free Chlorine Test Kit Model CN-66F
Free Chlorine Test Kit, Model CN-66F, range 0-3.5 mg/l (100 tests) 2231-02 US $34.75
ColiQuik MPN Coliform Kit
ColiQuik MPN Coliform Tubes (pkg of ten 5-in-1 test tube units with color 23851-50 US $50.00
comparator)
Whirl-Pak Bags, with dechlorinating agent (pkg/100) 20753-33 US $13.75
25-Well Dri-Bath Incubator, 115/230V 45900-00 US $395.00
Long-wave, UV lamp, 115v, 6 watt 21843-00 US $88.00
Alternative Lamp for ColiQuik MPN Coliform Kit
Long-wave, UV lamp, 230V, 6 watt 21843-02 US $89.00
pH Pocket Pal Tester
pH Test 44350-00 US $39.50
Portable Turbidimeter
Turbidimeter with three sample cells, 118 ml of 4000-NTU standard, a set of 46500-00 US $895.00
secondary standards, manual, quick-reference card, and carrying case.
Notes: 1. The address, phone and fax numbers for the Hach Company are as follows:
Hach Company World Headquarters Hach Europe, S.A./N.V.

P.O. Box 389 B.P. 229
Loveland, CO 80539 B5000 Namur 1
U.S.A. Belgium
Phone: (800) 227-4224 or (303) 669-3050 Phone: (32)(81) 44.53.81
FAX: (303) 669-2932 FAX: (32)(81) 44.13.00
2. The information in this figure is subject to change at any time.
2. Other Contaminants
Samples to be tested for other contaminants can be sent to more distant
laboratories because they do not require such prompt analysis.
V. Remedial Actions for Contaminated Water Samples

If the analytical results for any water samples exceed the Maximum Permissible Levels
(MPLs), take specific actions based on the circumstances listed below:
A. No Known Health Effects Observed

1. Collect samples again promptly from the points at which they were taken
previously.

Note: These samples should be analyzed as soon as possible, expediting

shipment to an independent off-site laboratory if analysis is not available at in-
house labs.
2. Undertake an immediate investigation to determine if any unusual conditions
have occurred within the vicinity of the sampling point, such as repairs to the
water mains, faucets, or piping.
3. If the contaminant is bacteria:
a. Conduct tests for residual free chlorine at various outlets to ensure that we
are administering the proper dosage.
b. Adjust chlorine concentration, if necessary.
4. Report to country/local authorities as required.
5. Carry out resampling if necessary.
B. A Major Disaster
In a major disaster, such as inundation of the water source, breakdown in treatment
plant units, gross contamination of the system,
1. Carry out the following emergency actions:
a. Reject the water supply system immediately.
b. Institute an emergency treatment supply system.
c. Treat all drinking water or supply bottled water.
2. Investigate and repair system.
3. After completing the necessary repairs,
a. Chlorinate and flush entire system.
b. Collect samples from representative points throughout the entire system until
the analysis is negative for bacteria in at least two consecutive sets of
samples collected on different days, after which the system can be returned
to normal use.
C. Outbreak of Waterborne Disease

Under an outbreak of waterborne disease,
1. Follow the recommendations under Section A., No Known Health Effects
Observed (above), placing special emphasis on investigating the source, such as
reservoirs, treatment processes, and distribution systems.
2. Increase both the chlorine dosage and residual levels in the system.
3. If the conditions contributing to the contamination are found to be serious,
a. Reject the supply

b. Institute emergency treatment until the condition is corrected.

c. See the suggestions in Section B., A Major Disaster (above).
VI. Disinfecting Pipeline and Tanks

A. Cleaning
1. Thoroughly flush all contaminated or new pipelines, storage tanks, or portable
tanks (such as tank trucks or barges) with clean water to remove any sediment.
2. After draining and flushing storage or portable tanks, follow confined space
entry procedures and:
a. Scrub tanks with a household abrasive cleaner containing powdered bleach
that is acceptable for food contact surfaces.
b. Flush them again to remove materials loosened during the tank cleaning.
B. Disinfecting
1. Solution
Fill the cleansed system with a disinfecting solution of calcium hypochlorite and
treated water. This mixture provides a solution of not less than 100 mg/l of
available chlorine and can be prepared in one of two ways:
a. Add 545 grams (1.2 pounds) of high-test calcium hypochlorite (HTH) to
each 3,800 liters (1,000 gallons) of water.
b. Add 8 liters (2 gallons) of ordinary household liquid bleach (5 percent
sodium hypochlorite) to each 3,800 liters (1,000 gallons) of water.
2. Process
Allow the disinfectant to remain in the pipeline, storage or portable tank for not
less than 24 hours, then examine it for residual free chlorine and drain it.
If no residual chlorine is found,
a. Repeat the process.
b. Flush the pipeline with potable water.
c. Fill the pipeline with potable water.
d. Analyze the water in the pipeline after 24 hours for bacterial contamination
1) If no harmful bacteria is found in the water, put the system into
operation.
2) If harmful bacteria is found in the water, repeat the flushing-and-testing
steps of the chlorine treatment, until no bacterial contamination is
detected.

C. Emergency Disinfecting
Under emergency conditions, it is infeasible to wait for results of bacterial analyses.
Instead, select and treat the cleanest and clearest water available.
1. Pre-disinfecting
Either of the following treatment methods require that we prepare turbid or
colored water before disinfecting it.
a. Filter it.
b. Allow it to settle.
c. Draw off clean water.
2. Disinfecting
Generally, select one of the following two methods for disinfecting small
quantities of water:
a. Boiling
Boiling is the best method for ensuring water is bacterially safe to drink. A
vigorous boiling for 15 minutes will kill any disease-causing bacteria present
in water.
Note: The flat taste of boiled water can be improved by pouring it back
and forth from one container to another or by allowing it to stand a few
hours. However, be careful not to recontaminate the water.
b. Chemical Treatment
The second method, chemical treatment, frees most waters of harmful
organisms.
1) Household Bleach
a) Add twenty drops of household bleach per liter (quart) of water.
b) Mix thoroughly and allow to stand for 30 minutes. The water should
have a slight chlorine odor at the end of this time. If not, re-treat it
and repeat the household-bleach method until the water has a slight
chlorine odor.
2) High-test Granular Calcium Hypochlorite (HTH)
a) Add and dissolve approximately 7 gms (1/4 oz or 1 heaping
teaspoon) of high-test, granular, calcium hypochlorite (HTH) for
each 8 liters (2 gallons) of water. This will produce a stock chlorine
solution of approximately 500 mg/l.
b) Add the stock solution to the water in the ratio of 1 part of chlorine
solution to each 100 parts of water to be treated. This is roughly
equal to adding liter (16 oz or 1 pint) of stock solution to each 47
liters (12.5 gallons) of water to be disinfected.

If, after standing for 30 minutes, the water has no chlorine odor,
repeat the HTH method until the water has a slight chlorine odor.
VII. Record Keeping

Maintain the following records (some of which have a specific period of retention) for
potable water:
A. Analyses
Bacterial analyses for two years and chemical analyses for five years
B. Surveys
Copies of reports, summaries, and communications about sanitary surveys of the
system for five years
C. Maps and Drawings

As-built system maps and drawings
D. Laboratory Reports
Either keep the actual laboratory reports or transfer data to tabular summaries,
provided that the following information is included:
1. Date, place, and time of sampling
2. Name of sampler
3. Identification of sample
4. Date of analysis
5. Laboratory and person responsible for performing analysis
6. Results of the analysis
Resources
Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality. Vols 1, 2, 3. Albany, NY: World Health
Organization, 1984/1985.
Last, J.M. and Wallace, R.B. (ed.). Public Health and Preventive Medicine. 13th ed.
1992.
Manual of Individual Water Supply Systems. EPA-430/9-74-0007. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, 1982.
Safe Drinking Water Guidance Document. Bakersfield, CA: Chevron Production
Business Unit, 1990.
Salvato, J.A. Environmental Engineering and Sanitation, 4th ed. 1992.

Safe Operations: Health Pest Control
Guideline SO.64
Pest Control
Purpose
This guideline provides information about pest control of mosquitoes, flies, roaches,
ants, scorpions, spiders, mites, rodents, and rabid animals.
Content
Guideline SO.64-2
I. Survey Process SO.64-2
II. Control Procedures, General SO.64-2
III. Control Procedures, Specific SO.64-5
IV. Source of Sprayers, Pesticides and Rodent Traps SO.64-7
Resources SO.64-8

Pest Control Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
This guideline is in three major parts:
The first section outlines a possible survey process (if the information is unknown)
to determine the type of vermin, their estimated populations, and their locations in
and around the facilities.
The second describes control procedures that may be applicable to several types of
vermin.
The third describes detailed control procedures that may be applicable to specific
pests.
Each organization should establish an appropriate:
Schedule for carrying out routine pest control
Training program for pest-control personnel
Process of evaluating pest-control methods by monitoring existing populations
Guideline
I. Survey Process
A. Properly trained, experienced personnel should conduct surveys to obtain and collect
initial information about the pests that are prevalent in and around company
facilities. This survey should determine:
1. The types of pests
2. Approximate populations
3. Locations of breeding and feeding areas of pests
B. Workers and individuals living in the area should be asked for information about the
existence of pests.
C. Medical and public health personnel should be contacted (if available) about locally
prevalent pests and the incidence of vermin-related diseases.
II. Control Procedures, General

A. Elimination of Food Sources
Follow these steps to eliminate food sources for pests:
1. Maintain meticulous hygiene and housekeeping in the kitchens, mess halls, and
food- and garbage-storage areas. Arrange to have these areas:
a. Swept and mopped frequently

b. Kept free of small pieces of food and litter

2. Provide hot water taps and floor drains in garbage handling-and-storage areas.
3. Arrange to have garbage cans cleaned frequently.
4. Arrange to have garbage removed frequently and disposed of in accordance with
the local waste management plan.
B. Isolate Food Sources

Take the following steps to isolate food sources from pests:
1. Food-service and Garbage-handling Areas
a. Seal all cracks and holes in walls, floors, and ceilings.
b. Equip doors with metal flashing and self-closing devices.
2. Provide tight-fitting fly screens for all windows and doors in office, housing, and
both food-service and garbage-handling areas.
3. Keep food in sealed or enclosed containers that are at least 15 cm (6 inches) off
the floor.
4. Equip garbage cans with tight-fitting lids.
C. Apply Pesticides (General Procedures)

To maintain an effective pest-control program, reapply pesticides at intervals
recommended by the manufacturers and verify the effectiveness of these substances
by inspecting and monitoring the sites periodically.
These steps should be followed when applying pesticides:
1. Avoid pesticides that have been banned or severely restricted within the host
country.
The Pesticide Action Network (PAN), a group of more than 300 non-government
organizations from 50 countries, has requested a global ban on 12 pesticides and
the United States has banned, suspended, or severely restricted 18 pesticides
(Figure SO.64-1).
2. Obtain a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) from the manufacturer for each
pesticide before applying any substance. The MSDS should contain information
on proper use, health hazards, personal protective equipment, and handling of
emergencies. Each MSDS should list an emergency telephone for obtaining
emergency assistance from the manufacturer.
3. Select pesticides suitable for application around the outside and inside of
buildings frequented by pests.
4. Cover or enclose all food when pesticides are applied in food-service areas.

Fig. SO.64-1 Pesticides Banned, Suspended, or Severely Restricted in the United States and
by Pesticide Action Network (PAN)
Pesticide U.S. Action Year Global Action
Aldicarb (Temik) PAN Ban
Aldrin All uses canceled except termite control 1974
BHC All uses canceled 1978 PAN Ban
Chlordane Cancellation for most uses except termite control 1978 PAN Ban
All uses canceled 1988
Chlordimeform Registration voluntarily withdrawn 1989 PAN Ban
DBCP All uses canceled except on pineapple in Hawaii 1979 PAN Ban
Use on pineapple canceled 1985
DDT All agricultural use canceled 1972 PAN Ban
Use only for public health emergencies
Diazinon Use on golf courses and sod farms canceled 1986
Dieldrin Cancellation of most uses 1974 PAN Ban
Dinoseb Emergency suspended and registration canceled 1986
EDB All uses canceled 1984 PAN Ban
Endrin Voluntary cancellation 1985 PAN Ban
EPN Use as mosquito larvacide canceled 1983
Heptachlor All uses canceled except seed treatment 1978 PAN Ban
Seed treatment canceled 1989
Lindane Indoor smoke fumigation use canceled 1986 PAN Ban
Mirex All uses canceled except on pineapple in Hawaii 1977
Nitrofen (TOK) Voluntary cancellation 1983
Paraquat PAN Ban
Parathion PAN Ban
(methyl & ethyl)
Pentachlor-ophenol PAN Ban
2,4,5-T/silvex Emergency suspension of registration 1979 PAN Ban
All uses canceled 1985
Toxaphene All uses canceled except sheep and cattle dip and on 1982
bananas and pineapple in Puerto Rico and The Virgin
Islands

5. Apply outside and around all areas of facilities, such as housing, offices, shops
and food-service areas. Consider fogging or spraying pesticides containing
malathion, lindane, pyrethrins or equivalent (as recommended by the
manufacturers) from pickup trucks or from trailer-mounted or back-carried units.
6. Apply inside housing, offices and shop areas. Consider fogging with pesticides
containing permethrin, malathion or equivalent chemicals as directed by the
manufacturers using a hand-carried unit that directs the fog to upper parts of
rooms, to windows, and other light sources that attract insects.
7. Apply inside food service areas. Consider fogging with permethrin or an
equivalent, using a hand-held sprayer and taking care to follow the
manufacturers' instructions for covering unpackaged food or food-contact
surfaces.
Note: If food and food-contact surfaces cannot be protected adequately,
consider using a hand-held sprayer with a lance that sprays only cracks and
corners of walls and floors.
8. Train and instruct pest-control crews to follow proper work procedures and to
wear proper protective clothing.
Note: Specifically, they should read and become familiar with the MSDSs or
comparable information or both for the pesticides in use.
9. Combine applying pesticides with previously mentioned measures (such as
isolating food sources) because many strains of pests are resistant to these
chemicals; therefore, chemicals alone may not control pests.
III. Control Procedures, Specific

In addition to carrying out the basic procedures survey process and general controls
itemized in both Survey Process and Control Procedures, General (above), consider
the following additional measures for specific pests.
Note: There are no specific procedures for flies beyond the basic ones.
A. Spraying for Mosquitoes

If practical and if basic procedures are insufficient,
1. Drain or spray with insecticides any stagnant water (pools, marshes, and creeks)
that serves as mosquito-breeding areas.
Note: Spray units may be hand carried or may be mounted on pickup trucks or
trailers. They may also be spray lances mounted on boats.
2. Apply insecticides containing pyrethrins, permethrin, Abate, or other equivalent
chemicals in dosages and at frequencies recommended by the manufacturers.

B. Roaches, Ants, Scorpions, Spiders, and Mites

Permethrin, pyrethrins, or an equivalent pesticide should be sprayed on:
1. Cracks, crevices, corners of walls and floors, around baseboards and bases of
machinery, and under pallets
2. Any insects or insect nests found inside or outside the facilities
C. Rats and Mice

1. Controlling food sources is generally a more effective means of rodent control
than poison.
2. Be extremely cautious when working with poisons because they can constitute a
hazard to human health and the environment if not managed properly.
Furthermore, poisoned rodents must be disposed of properly to eliminate the
possibility of the carcasses creating a health hazard. The carcasses of poisoned
rodents should be treated like any pesticide waste and precautions should be
taken to ensure that they are not consumed by other wildlife.
3. Setting traps is usually a highly effective control measure for rats and mice.
a. Set and tie down wooden-base or steel snap traps in quantities of at least 10
at a time.
b. Bait traps with pieces of bacon, fruit, peanut butter, or fish.
c. Check traps daily, remove trapped rodents, and re-bait traps.
Note: Glue boards may be used as an alternative to rodent traps. These
boards measure about 2.5 cm x 5 cm (about 6 in. x 12 in.) and are coated
with a glue that remains sticky and capable of trapping rodents for weeks.
Traps and glue boards should be purchased locally, if available, or from
other sources such as those listed in Figure SO.64-2.
D. Rabid Dogs, Cats, and Wild Animals

While it is impossible to eradicate rabies completely in areas where the disease is
well established in the wild, there are several measures that can be taken to minimize
risks to humans from domestic pets and wild animals.
1. Vaccinate all dogs and cats at the facility.
Note: Generally, domestic or tame animals should not be kept in any facility.
2. Collect and destroy any stray, ownerless or unwanted dogs and cats.

Fig. SO.64-2 Sources of Pest Control Materials & Equipment (current as of January 1, 1993)
Contact Information
Company Name Europe/Asia Western Hemisphere Items Offered
Tifa (Cl) Ltd. Unit 3 Tifa Square Sprayers and foggers (from
Forward Way Millington, NJ 07946 hand-carried to truck-
Laker Road U.S.A. mounted models), pesticides,
Airport Industrial Estate Tel: (908) 647-4570 glue boards, rodent traps, and
Rochester, Kent ME1 3QX FAX: (908) 647-2517 insect monitoring traps
ENGLAND
Also
Tel: (0634) 201811
FAX: (0634) 201822 Branch Offices in Lome, Togo;
Karachi, Pakistan;
Paramaribo, Surinam; and
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil
Micro-Gen 10700 Sentinel Dr. List of international Foggers (from hand- carried
Equipment Corp. San Antonio, distributors available on to truck- mounted models),
Texas 78217 request. pesticides, electronic fly
U.S.A. traps, and ant baits
Tel: (512) 654-8570

FAX: (512) 654-3613
Van Waters and 2256 Junction Ave. Pesticides, foggers and
Rogers Inc. San Jose, CA 95131 sprayers (all sizes), rodent
U.S.A. traps, glue boards, rodent and
roach baits, insect monitoring
Tel: (408) 435-8700 traps, and roach traps
FAX: (408) 435-1735
3. Ensure that workers know to report a bite by a dog, cat or wild animal to the
local medical department.
Note: Confine and study animal(s) involved for signs of rabies. If wild animals
are involved, they should be killed and tested promptly. If the animals cannot be
found, the person(s) bitten should undergo the series of rabies vaccinations.
Local Chevron medical personnel can explain the consequences of rabies
infection to anyone who is bitten.
IV. Source of Sprayers, Pesticides and Rodent Traps

Pesticides, sprayers, and rodent traps should be purchased locally if they are adequate
and suitable. If not, contact one of the companies listed in Figure SO.64-2 or an
equivalent company.

Resources
Maxcy, K., Rosenau, M.J., and Last, J.M. (1991), Public Health and Preventative
Medicine.
Salvato, J.A. Environmental Engineering and Sanitation. 4th ed. 1992.

Safe Operations: Health Hazard Communication
Guideline SO.65
Hazard Communication
Purpose
All COPI operations should establish procedures for communicating information to
employees and contractors concerning potential safety, health and environmental hazards
of chemicals and other materials present in the workplace. The purpose of this guideline
is to provide information for persons developing such procedures.
Content
Guideline SO.65-2
I. Key Definitions SO.65-2
II. Chemical Inventory SO.65-3
III. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) SO.65-3
IV. Labels and Other Forms of Warning SO.65-4
V. Employee Training SO.65-5
Resources SO.65-5
Appendix: New Chemical Product Acceptance Request
General Overview
Each COPI operation should implement a Hazard Communication Program which
includes the following key elements:
Chemical Inventories listing all hazardous chemicals present in the workplace

Hazard Communication Safe Operations: Health
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for all hazardous chemical available to
employees on all work shifts
Identification labels and appropriate warnings on portable and stationary chemical
containers
Training for employees on the hazards of chemicals in the workplace and the
requirements of the Hazard Communication program
Assignment of roles and responsibilities
Guideline
I. Key Definitions
A. Hazardous chemical - Any substance that is either a physical hazard or a health
hazard.
B. Physical hazard - Substance capable of causing damage from physical effects of
excessive pressures, fires, explosions, and chemical reactions, such as:
1. Compressed gases
2. Combustible liquids
3. Explosive, flammable, pyrophoric, unstable and reactive substances
C. Health hazards - Substances capable of causing acute (short term) or chronic (long
term) health effects, such as:
1. Toxic or highly toxic agents
2. Carcinogens
3. Reproductive toxins
4. Irritants
5. Corrosives
6. Sensitizers
D. Consumer Product - A product that is packaged for consumer use and can be readily
purchased over the counter at stores accessible to the public.
E. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) - A document containing information on a
hazardous chemical. Generally, an MSDS contains information on product
composition; manufacturers name; hazard identification; first aid measures;
handling and storage precautions; exposure controls; personal protection guidelines;
physical and chemical properties; stability and reactivity; toxicology; and handling,
transport and disposal.
F. Hazard Warning - Words, pictures, symbols or a combination of these on a label,
tag, placard or sign that displays the physical or health hazards of a chemical.

II. Chemical Inventory

Chemical inventories are used for managing MSDSs and for employee awareness and
training programs.
A. Chemicals to be inventoried are all potentially hazardous chemicals and materials in
the workplace that are used in an industrial manner, typically including:
1. Treating chemicals
2. Laboratory chemicals/solvents
3. Industrial cleaning agents
4. Bulk solvents/thinners/paints
5. Crude oil, natural gas, other products streams
6. Jet Fuel, diesel, gasoline
B. Neither Consumer Products (i.e. products that are packaged for consumer use and
can normally be purchased over the counter in stores accessible to the public) nor
food products, beverages, tobacco or drugs need to be inventoried.
C. Chemical Inventories should include information on each chemical such as
manufacturer name, chemical/trade names, location, facility name, department, work
area, MSDS designations, and date the chemical was added to the inventory.
Information contained on chemical inventories should match up with MSDSs and
container labels.
D. In order to help keep inventories manageable, operations are usually divided into
common work locations (field, warehouse, shop, etc.), and separate inventories are
maintained for each location. These separate inventories can then be combined to
produce a master inventory for the entire operation as needed.
E. Chemical inventories should be made available to all affected employees and
contractors at work locations, field offices or control rooms.
F. A process should be established for keeping chemical inventories current. This
process might include a requirement for obtaining management review and approval
for introducing new chemicals into the workplace, and might include the use of a
product acceptance form, such as the example shown in the Appendix.
III. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs)

A. MSDSs contain information about chemical properties, health and physical hazards,
first aid and medical treatment, emergency response, and the handling and disposal
of chemicals.
B. MSDSs are available for chemical products from all U.S. and most European
suppliers or manufacturers. An MSDS or equivalent documentation should be
obtained from the supplier or manufacturer with the purchase of any hazardous

chemical product. The purchasing departments should specify that MSDSs are
required for all orders of hazardous chemicals.
C. MSDSs should be made available to all affected employees and contractors at work
locations, field offices or control rooms.
D. Contractors should provide COPI with MSDSs or equivalent documentation for any
hazardous chemicals they bring into the workplace.
E. The Toxicology and Health Risk Assessment Team of the CRTC HES group is
available to answer questions about company or vendor MSDSs.
IV. Labels and Other Forms of Warning

All containers of hazardous chemicals in the workplace should have some form of
identification (labels, tags, or other markings) that informs employees about the contents
of the containers and allows them to find additional information (i.e. MSDSs and
chemical inventories) as needed. In instances where employees speak languages other
than English, consideration should be given to including the additional languages on
labels.
A. Portable Containers
1. Portable containers of hazardous chemicals should be labeled or stenciled to
identify their contents. Portable chemical containers typically include
skid-mounted tanks, drums, pails, bottles and cans.
2. Vendor products normally come with pre-printed labels applied by the
manufacturer. Purchasing departments should request appropriate labeling for
all orders of chemical products. For portable containers whose contents are not
properly identified, appropriate labels should be applied in the warehouse or the
field.
3. If a chemical is transferred from a properly labeled portable or stationary
container into a second portable container, the secondary portable container
should be properly labeled, unless the person making the transfer retains control
of it and uses all its contents during the same work shift.
B. Stationary Containers
1. Stationary containers of hazardous chemicals should be labeled or stenciled to
identify their contents. Stationary chemical containers typically include tanks
and vessels.
2. Piping and process systems do not need to be labeled. However, information on
the contents of unlabeled piping and process systems should be made available
to workers through drawings or plot plans.
3. To avoid confusion, labeling containers of non-hazardous chemicals such as
potable water should be considered.

V. Employee Training
Training is an important factor in meeting the overall objective of hazard
communication, which is to provide employees with appropriate information for working
with hazardous chemicals. All employees should receive initial training within the first 3
months of starting a new job, and then receive refresher training at least annually. Topics
which should be covered in Hazard Communication training include:
A. Location and availability of the written Hazard Communication programs, MSDSs
and chemical inventories
B. Labeling systems used in the workplace
C. How to read and apply MSDSs
D. Physical and health hazards of chemicals in the work area, either by individual
chemicals or by hazard category (acids, solvents, etc.)
E. How to work safely with hazardous chemicals in the work place, including use of
personal protective equipment, use of engineering controls, waste disposal
procedures and emergency response.
Whenever new physical or health hazards are introduced in the work areas, the workers
involved should be promptly trained to work safely with them.
Resources
Hazard Communication, Chevron Corporation Loss Prevention No. 18, August 1989

Guideline SO.65 Appendix
New Chemical Product

Acceptance Request

HAZARD COMMUNICATION
NEW CHEMICAL PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE REQUEST
All hazardous chemicals or materials not previously approved for use and listed on current Chemical
Inventories must be reviewed and approved by the ESF&H Department prior to purchase.
INSTRUCTIONS: (Please print)
Requester: Complete Section A, attach a copy of the MSDS for the chemical product, and
route to the ESF&H Coordinator.
ESF&H: Review the MSDS, complete Section B, and return approved form to the requester.
Section A
1. Chemical or material trade name or code:
2. Supplier or manufacturer:
3. Purpose for chemical or material:
4. Location/process area:
5. Anticipated quantity and type of storage:
6. New chemical or material?
Revised chemical or material use?
7. Chemical or material use, and intended precautions (Check all that apply):
Enclosed in System Maintenance
Batch Process Used in Confined Space
Manual Addition Spray Applied
Automatic Injection Eye Protection
Powered Ventilation Used Respiratory Protection
Skin Protection Spill Retention Provided
8. If known, what alternative chemicals or materials are available?

HAZARD COMMUNICATION
NEW CHEMICAL PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE REQUEST
(PAGE 2)
Yes No Unknown
9. Will the chemical/material be retained in the produced water?
10. Will the new chemical or material replace an existing one?
11. Will hazardous products, by-products, or wastes be created?
12. Will process chemical injection affect the wastewater treatment areas?
13. Will the chemical container be isolated from the environment if there is a
leak or spill via the use of a curbwall or retention pad?
14. Can the material be expected to wash down into process or storm sewers
under any routine or emergency condition?
Name:
Title:
Section B
ESF&H Coordinator:
Date Approved:
SPECIAL PROVISIONS OR PRECAUTIONS

Safe Operations: Health Respiratory Protection
Guideline SO.66
Respiratory Protection
Purpose
This guideline provides information about respiratory protection for workers.
Content
Guideline SO.66-2
I. Written Respiratory Protection Procedures SO.66-2
II. Classifications of Respiratory ProtectiveEquipment SO.66-3
III. Selecting and Wearing Respiratory Protective Equipment SO.66-4
IV. Training SO.66-6
V. Testing the Fit SO.66-6
VI. Medical Examinations SO.66-7
VII. Maintenance and Care SO.66-7
VIII. Work Area Surveillance SO.66-8
IX. Program Evaluation SO.66-8
Resources SO.66-9
Appendix:
I. Sample of Documented SCBA Practices SO.66-11
II. Quality of Compressed Breathing Air SO.66-15
III. Qualitative Fit Testing for Respirators SO.66-17
Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.66 - 1 May 1999

Respiratory Protection Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
Workers should be required to wear respiratory protection under any of the following
circumstances:
Airborne levels of contaminants cannot be controlled to appropriate levels with other
methods
While installing other control methods
During infrequent or non-routine tasks
During emergencies
Basically, a respirator allows a person to breathe safely by either removing a contaminant
from the ambient air or by supplying an independent source of clean, respirable air.
In this guideline, there is information about:
The need for and content of written respiratory protection procedures
The selection and use of respirators
Training
Fitting respirators
Medical surveillance
Maintenance of respirators
Guideline
I. Written Respiratory Protection Procedures

If respirators are available for workers to use, written procedures about how to select, use,
and care for them should be provided. Such procedures should include:
A. Situations in which respirators are to be worn
B. The limitations of the device
C. Instructions for wearing and operating the equipment properly
For an example of a written procedure, see Appendix I, Sample of Documented SCBA
Practices, at the end of this guideline.
May 1999 SO.66 - 2 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

II. Classifications of Respiratory ProtectiveEquipment

The three most common and general classifications of respiratory protective equipment
are as follows:
A. Air-purifying Respirators
Air-purifying respirators consist of three basic types:
1. Single-use Respirators
Disposable or single-use respirators should be used only for routine protection
against particulates and dust.
Traditionally, a disposable or single-use respirator is a molded or shaped fibrous
pad designed to trap particulates and provide protection against dusts. There are,
however, models that trap some mists and fumes and others that have
impregnated pads for removing airborne gases or vapors.
2. Cartridge Respirators
Cartridge respirators should be considered for low concentrations of
contaminants. Never use them where there is an immediately dangerous to life or
health (IDLH) atmosphere.
Constructed of a flexible face piece (half or full face), these respirators have
cartridges that remove certain gases, vapors, or particulates or a combination of
these contaminants. Some cartridges are replaceable; some respirators have non-
replaceable cartridges and so are disposable.
3. Canister-type Gas Masks
Canister-type gas masks are generally unacceptable for COPIs operations.
These masks are equipped with a canister through which air is drawn and
purified; however:
a. The breathing resistance through the canister may be excessive; thus
allowing contaminated air to be drawn in around the gap in the face seal.
b. Additionally, the large canister may be used beyond its saturation point as
there is no end-of-service-life warning.
B. Supplied-Air Respirators: Air-Line Apparatus

Use air-line respirators in situations where either:
1. Concentrations of contaminants exceed the acceptable limits for air-purifying
respirators
2. There is no adequate air-purifying cartridge.
Air-line respirators are to be worn, however, in immediately dangerous-to-life-or-
death (IDLH) atmospheres only with a self-contained unit that allows safe escape

from the contaminated area in case the air supply is interrupted or other problem
develops.
Providing respirable air from an uncontaminated, independent source, the
supplied air respirator: air-line apparatus connects the wearer by a hose to a
compressor or air cylinders that provide a long-term air supply.
C. Supplied-Air Respirators: SCBA

Purchase only pressure-demand (positive-pressure) self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA) units.
SCBAs may be used in IDLH atmospheres to ensure the safety of the wearer,
however, the air in the SCBAs must meet the quality requirements for breathing air as
described in Appendix II, Quality of Compressed Breathing Air, of this guideline.
An SCBA carries its own supply of respirable air and does not require an air line to
an external air supply.
D. Chemical Canister Re-breathers

Chemical canister re-breathers should only be considered for emergency egress and
if users have been fit-tested and were able to achieve a good face-to-mask seal and
are adequately trained to use them.
These closed systems are suitable for high concentrations of contaminants and
oxygen-deficient atmospheres, but they are negative-pressure respirators that rely
upon a perfect face-to-mask seal.
The canister contains a special chemical that evolves as oxygen when contacted by
the moisture and carbon dioxide in the exhaled breath while also retaining the CO2
and moisture.
Note: To ensure that all relevant selection factors have been considered, review the
use of rebreathers with the local HSE group.
III. Selecting and Wearing Respiratory Protective Equipment

Select respiratory protective equipment based on the atmospheric hazard in which it will
be worn and on the protection given by the device.
A. Approved Equipment
Equipment should be approved or accepted by a recognized standards organization. If
that is not possible, the quality of devices being considered should be evaluated to
determine that they are designed and constructed appropriately.
B. Protection Factors
Because no respirator has a leak-proof seal around the face piece regardless of
how well fitted each type is limited in the protection it gives wearers against a
certain level of airborne contaminants. As a result, respirators have been assigned a
protection factor (PF). PF is the ratio of the contaminant's concentration outside to the

contaminants concentration expected inside the face piece while being worn. See
Figure SO.66-1.
Fig. SO.66-1 Protection Factors for Respirators

Respirator Protection Factor
Single Use or Disposable 5
Half-mask Cartridge 10
Full-face Cartridge or Re-breather 50
Half-mask Air Line in Positive-pressure Mode 1,000
Helmet or Hood Air Line with Continuous Flow 1,000
Full-face Air Line in Positive -pressure Mode 10,000 +
Self-contained-breathing Apparatus with Full Face Mask in Positive- 10,000 +
pressure Mode
Example: A respirator with a PF of 10 can withstand atmospheres up to 10 times the allowable
exposure level so long as the levels do not exceed the immediately dangerous-to-life-or-health
(IDLH) level for that substance.
C. Respirators in IDLH Atmospheres

1. Procedures for Workers
Any worker entering an IDLH atmosphere must follow both of these procedures:
a. Wear a supplied-air respirator (either an SCBA or an air-line unit with a self-
contained escape bottle).
b. Have a similarly protected and trained standby employee located to provide
immediate assistance.
2. Definition of IDLH in Respirator Selection
In terms of selecting respirators, the IDLH level is the maximum concentration in
which a person could breathe for 30 minutes without experiencing any escape-
impairing or irreversible health problems, even without a respirator.
3. Inspecting Equipment (see Maintenance and Care later in this guideline.)
D. Emergency Equipment
In emergencies, some workers may be required to wear SCBAs. As a result,
emergency preparation efforts should consider the following points:
1. Training (see Training later in this guideline.)
2. Locating this equipment outside the emergency zone and accessible during the
emergency
3. Instructing workers not to enter an IDLH atmosphere alone, even when wearing
SCBAs (see also above.)

IV. Training
Respiratory protection training should be provided for employees who wear respirators in
the normal course of their work, or who can be expected to wear them in emergency
situations. The scope and content of the training depends on the complexity and severity
of the hazard and the respiratory protection required for specific work tasks.
A. Suggested Topics
1. The reason for selecting a particular type of respirator
2. The function, capabilities, and limitations of the selected respirator
3. The procedure for donning the respirator and checking its fit and operation
4. The proper maintenance of the respirator
5. Recognizing and responding to emergency situations
B. Courses and Records

Provide both initial and routine refresher training and maintain records of those
employees who are trained, including:
1. The level and type of respirator training they have received
2. The dates of the training sessions
V. Testing the Fit

Respirators must fit snugly against the face to ensure that they will perform effectively
and achieve their assigned PFs.
A. Testing
When testing a persons respirator to judge its fit,
1. Explain the procedures for fitting and demonstrate how to operate the respirator
properly.
2. Allow the person to familiarize him/herself with the respirator by wearing it in an
uncontaminated area.
3. Perform a qualitative fit test for all negative-pressure respirators to determine that
the face-to-mask seal is adequate. For a description of this test, see Appendix III,
Qualitative Fit Testing for Respirators, of this guideline.

B. Wearing Respirators with Beards, Mustaches, Sideburns and

Prescription Eyewear
1. Facial Hair
For their own protection, employees should always be clean-shaven in the area
where the mask contacts the face if they may be expected to wear respiratory
protection either during their normal duties or under emergency conditions.
These employees should not be allowed to wear beards, mustaches, or sideburns
where the face area is in contact with the mask.
2. Prescription Eyewear
a. For employees who need to wear prescription spectacles with a full face
mask, order a special face piece designed to accommodate spectacles.
b. Employees who need to wear contact lenses with a full face mask must
choose either soft or gas-permeable lenses. Except for gas-permeable lenses,
people should not wear hard lenses under a full face mask.
VI. Medical Examinations

Until they pass a physical examination to prove them able to wear respirators and
perform the work, individuals should not be assigned respirators nor to tasks requiring
respirators (except infrequent use of disposable masks). Respiratory protection should be
documented on a GO-1310 (Medical Certification for Respirator Use) or comparable
form.
Follow-up exams should be scheduled as a part of the employees periodic health
evaluations.
Note: Contractors should also be required to provide evidence that they have
determined that their employees are capable of performing work while wearing a
respirator.
VII. Maintenance and Care

For respirators to provide the intended protection, they should be inspected, maintained,
cleaned, and stored properly. Maintenance-and-care programs should include:
A. Inspection
1. Routinely Worn Respirators
The wearer should inspect the respirator before and after each wearing for:
a. Tight connections
b. Condition of the face piece, headbands, valves, connecting tubes, and
cartridges
c. Rubber parts remaining pliable

d. Signs of deterioration
e. Adequate air supply (if applicable)
f. Functioning user-warning devices (if applicable)
2. Emergency Respirators
Ensure that workers inspect each emergency or rescue respirator after each
wearing or at least monthly and keep records of these inspection dates and
findings.
B. Cleaning and Disinfecting

Ensure that workers clean respirators as follows:
1. Routinely Worn Respirators
Clean and disinfect as frequently as necessary to protect the wearer from skin
irritation or to clean up any contaminants inside the mask.
2. Emergency Respirators
Clean and disinfect after each wearing.
C. Repair
Replace worn or deteriorated parts but do not attempt to replace or repair components
beyond the manufacturers recommendations.
D. Storage
Ensure that workers store respirators in a clean and dry location (i.e., sealed plastic
bag, cabinet, etc.) protected from heat, extreme cold, excessive moisture, and
damaging chemicals.
Ensure that workers store emergency respirators so they are quickly accessible, in
clearly marked cabinets or cases, and outside the area of potential emergency.
VIII. Work Area Surveillance

Before selecting a respirator, determine the degree of respiratory hazard in the work area
and re-evaluate the risk frequently enough thereafter to ensure that no new respiratory
hazards develop that would require use of another type of respirator.
IX. Program Evaluation

Conduct periodic evaluations of the overall respiratory protection program by inspecting
respirator use in the field and by reviewing such records as:
A. Medical Surveillance Documentation
B. Exposure Monitoring Records
C. Fit Test Records

D. Training Records
E. Monthly Emergency Equipment Inspection Records
Resources
American National Standard Practice for Respiratory Protection. Z88.2-1991. New
York: American National Standards Institute.
Commodity Specification for Air. ANSI Z86.1. New York: Compressed Gas Association,
Inc.
Respiratory Protection. Loss Prevention Guide No. 17. Chevron Research and
Technology Company, Health Environment and Safety Group.

Guideline SO.66 Appendix I
Sample of Documented
SCBA Practices
This sample illustrates the type of information that should be included in the documented
procedure and is written as though the audience were workers.
Respiratory Protection Procedure for

Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus
General
A full-face, positive-pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) protects you
against inhaling all airborne contaminants. Generally, you would wear an SCBA for
short-duration tasks, emergency rescue, escape, and process-control activities.
Limitations
The air supply is rated for 30 to 60 minutes, depending on the unit, but depletes more
rapidly during strenuous work. It is essential that you leave the contaminated area
immediately when the alarm indicates a low air supply. The weight of SCBA may make it
difficult for you to use.
In IDLH Atmospheres
Before wearing an SCBA under immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)
conditions, be sure you understand the written supplement to this general procedure as it
details your need for a standby employee and other job-specific requirements.

Monthly Inspections
You will inspect a routinely worn SCBA before and after each wearing (at least monthly)
and all emergency SCBAs at least monthly.
Record the date and findings.
Check all parts to ensure they are serviceable.
Verify that the air bottle is full and that the regulator and low-pressure alarm work.
For more detailed information, see the manufacturer's manual for your unit.
Medical Limitations
Do not use any respirator if it complicates a medical condition that prevents you from
working safely. Talk to your supervisor.
Initial Fitting and Training

You should receive training and fit-testing before you wear this equipment.
Dos and Donts

Dont wear the mask if anything (glasses, beard, etc.) prevents your making a good
face-to-face piece seal.
Do inspect the unit before and after wearing it.
Do make sure the air cylinder is full before wearing the SCBA.
Do open the cylinder air supply valve.
Do put on the unit so the cylinder is on your back with the valve pointing down.
Do hook the harness and tighten.
Do put on the mask and adjust it for a snug but comfortable fit.
Do test the fit by closing the hose and inhaling gently. Hold your breath for 10
seconds; if the mask remains collapsed to your face, the seal is good.
Do connect the mask hose to the regulator and make sure the regulator supply valve
is open.
Do make sure that the selector is in the pressure-demand mode before entering the
contaminated area if the regulator has demand and pressure-demand settings.
Do open the bypass valve to obtain additional flow, and then leave the contaminated
area immediately if airflow is insufficient due to regulator failure or other factors.
Do leave the contaminated area immediately in case of malfunction, including the
sounding of the low-air supply alarm.

Care, Maintenance, and Storage

After wearing a face piece, wash it with soap and warm water, scrub it with a brush
to remove dirt as needed.
Rinse and hang it up to dry.
Also wash other parts that are soiled or contaminated.
Refer to the manufacturer's procedures for further information.
Have the air bottle refilled with breathing air meeting at least the specification for
Grade D breathing air in Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification
G-7.1-1966. Do not use pure oxygen.
Repack the unit if it is in good operating condition; otherwise, tell your supervisor or
arrange for repair or servicing of the unit.

Guideline SO.66 Appendix II
Quality of Compressed
Breathing Air
This appendix describes the steps that help maintain the purity of compressed breathing
air for supplied-air air line and SCBA respirators. SBUs should
Label breathing air cylinders properly to reduce the chance of employees selecting a
cylinder of another gas.
Ensure that connections for breathing air are incompatible with all other fittings in
our facilities to prevent a respirator from being serviced inadvertently with other
gases.
Purchase air that meets or exceeds the quality specifications of a recognized
standards organization.
Note: One widely used standard, which can easily be met by a properly functioning
compressor in an uncontaminated location, is the requirements for Grade D air as
specified by American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and the Compressed Gas
Association Commodity Specification G-7.1-1966. See Figure SO.66-2.

Fig. SO.66-2 Compressed Gas Association Grade D Air - Limiting Characteristics

Oxygen 19-23% (vol./vol.), balance N2
Hydrocarbons (condensed) 5 mg/m3
Carbon Monoxide 20 ppm
Carbon Dioxide 1000 ppm
Water Content* May be specified if required
Odor A pronounced odor should render the air
unsatisfactory for breathing purposes
* Excessive moisture can cause regulator freezing as air expands through the regulator valve.
We should be particularly careful when using an air compressor for air-supplied respirators
or for filling breathing air cylinders to avoid these common sources of contaminated
breathing air.
We should
Not locate the compressor air-inlet so that exhaust (from the compressor engine, motor
vehicle, or vessel exhaust) is drawn (or can be blown by wind) into the compressor
inlet.
Not have the oil-lubricated compressor either:
Generate excessive oil mist in the compressed air (due to worn rings, etc.).
Overheat and generate carbon monoxide as the oil breaks down.
Ensure that all oil-lubricated compressors have a high-temperature or carbon monoxide
alarm, or both.
Note: We should test the air frequently for carbon monoxide if we have only a high-
temperature alarm.
Prohibit general facility compressed air (e.g., instrument air) from being used in a
breathing air supply.
Check vendor- or supplier-filled air cylinders to make sure they contain breathing air.
Note: At a minimum, we should collect a sample of compressed air in a plastic bag
and then measure oxygen content with a portable oxygen meter to avoid the serious
risks of filling cylinders with a gas other than air. We should perform this check for
oxygen content even if the supplier certifies that the air meets Grade D or higher
criteria.
Consider purchasing kits that measure carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, water vapor,
and oil mist and vapor from companies1 if there are any questions about the purity of
the breathing air.
Instruct users to tag and report to the supervisor immediately any suspect or mislabeled
bottles.
1. Such as National Draeger, Inc. (Aerotest system), and Sensidyne/GasTec (Airtec system).

Guideline SO.66 Appendix III
Qualitative Fit Testing

for Respirators
Qualitative tests are a good way to evaluate how well face pieces fit. They involve no
complicated, expensive equipment. The common characteristic of these tests is that they
require some subjective response (i.e., odor or taste recognition) from the individual
being tested.
There are two major qualitative tests.
Major Qualitative Tests

Isoamyl Acetate Test (Banana-oil Test)
Isoamyl acetate, a low toxicity substance with a banana-like odor, is widely used to test
the fit of the face piece on organic, vapor, cartridge respirators. Ampoules1 of this
chemical are discharged within a plastic fit hood (i.e., a large plastic bag is suspended so
the employee can stand with his/her head and upper body inside the bag).
While in the bag and wearing a respirator, the worker should perform the following
exercises, each lasting about 15 seconds:
Normal breathing without talking while in a standing position
1. For example, the North 7002 Fit Test Ampoules

Deep breathing while in a standing position, turning his/her head from side to side
and inhaling on each side
Moving head up and down while in a standing position and inhaling on each
side when his/her head is in both the up and the down positions
Reading a passage of about 100 words loud enough to be heard by the tester
If, at any time during the test, the employee detects the banana-like odor of isoamyl
acetate, he/she has failed the test and must:
Exit quickly from the test bag.
Leave the test area to avoid experiencing olfactory fatigue.
Irritant Fume/Smoke Test

The irritant fume/smoke test, similar to the isoamyl acetate test in concept, is popular
because no other equipment (i.e., fit hood) is required, just the test substance. This test
can be run on air-purifying and atmosphere-supplying devices with high efficiency
filter(s). The test substance is an irritant that is available commercially in sealed glass
tubes (Smoke-tube kits are available from Mine Safety Appliances and from Draeger).
After the worker being tested has donned a mask, the tester should:
Inform the employee to keep his/her eyes closed during the test as the smoke is
irritating to the eyes.
Break both ends of a tube and attach one end to the rubber bulb.
Direct the smoke from about 12 inches away to the face seal around the whole
perimeter of the mask.
During the procedure the worker should perform the same exercises as for the banana-oil
test (described above) except for the one involving reading.
If the worker detects the irritating effects of the smoke at any time during the test, he/she
has failed the test. The tester should stop the test.
Wearer Tests
Two other types of fit checks are suitable for the wearer to check the fit of the respirator
each time he/she wears it in the work place. They are not, however, substitutes for a
qualitative fit test. These tests include:
Negative-pressure Check
In this test, the wearer closes off the inlet of the cartridge or filter by covering it with
his/her palm or squeezing the breathing tube. The wearer then inhales so that the face
piece collapses slightly and holds his/her breath for about five seconds. If no inward
leakage of air is detected, the fit is considered satisfactory.

Positive-pressure Check
During this test, similar to the negative-pressure test, the wearer closes the exhalation
valve and exhales gently into the face piece. The fit is satisfactory if slight positive
pressure can be built up inside the face piece without any evidence of outward leakage.

Safe Operations: Health Hearing Conservation
Guideline SO.67
Hearing
Conservation
Purpose
Hearing Conservation Programs are intended to protect employees from occupational
noise-induced hearing loss. This guideline provides information which COPI operations
can use to develop their own Hearing Conservation Programs.
Content
Guideline SO.67-2
I. Noise Exposure Assessment SO.67-2
II. Control of Noise Exposure SO.67-3
III. Audiometric Testing SO.67-4
IV. Training SO.67-4
Resources SO.67-5
General Overview
High noise levels are common in oil and gas exploration and production operations. Any
COPI location where noise exceeds 85 dB should be considered a high noise level area.
High noise levels are typically caused by transportation and operating equipment, such as
helicopters, workboats, pumps, generators, compressors and cranes, and also by product

Hearing Conservation Safe Operations: Health
streams moving through process equipment at high pressures and velocities. High noise
levels should be reduced through engineering design where feasible. When high noise
levels (>85 dB) cant be eliminated, hearing protective devices (ear plugs or ear muffs)
should be required for all personnel who enter high noise areas.
Employees who regularly work in areas of high noise should participate in a hearing
conservation program. These employees should receive initial and periodic hearing
conservation training, and should also receive initial and periodic audiometric
examinations if feasible. Employees and visitors who only enter high noise levels on an
occasional basis do not need to participate in a hearing conservation program, but should
still be required to use hearing protective devices in high noise areas.
Guideline
I. Noise Exposure Assessment

A. Any COPI location where noise exceeds 85 dB should be considered a high noise
area. Sound level meters and formal sound level surveys should be used to help
identify high noise areas.
1. Sound level surveys should be conducted on a periodic basis (typically five
years) for existing facilities to ensure that high noise areas are posted
appropriately. Surveys can be conducted more frequently if process changes
have occurred that could significantly affect noise levels.
2. Sound level surveys should also be conducted at all new facilities following start-
up.
3. Noise meters should be operated by qualified Chevron or contract personnel
using properly maintained and calibrated instruments.
4. Results of sound level surveys and recommended actions should be reported to
management and maintained at the nearest field office.
5. Survey results should also be shared with affected employees by posting of the
results and/or discussion at safety meetings.
B. Noise level meters are not always necessary to identify high noise areas. In general,
any noise that is loud enough to interfere with normal face to face conversation is
probably greater than 85 dB. Most internal combustion engines and turbines
generate noise well in excess of 85 dB. An experienced operator with normal
hearing can usually identify appropriate high noise areas without the use of a noise
meter. In these cases, noise meters can be used as needed to verify the operators
determination.
C. Warning signs (Hearing Protection Area or equivalent) should be posted in areas
where noise levels exceed 85 dB as measured by a sound level meter or in locations
determined by operators to be high noise areas.

II. Control of Noise Exposure

There are three recognized methods for controlling the exposure of noise to
employees.
A. Engineering Controls
The preferred method of controlling noise exposure is by use of engineering
controls, where feasible. Some examples of engineering controls are:
1. Sound barriers or mufflers
2. Sound-absorbing enclosures
3. Low-noise-level equipment
Noise reduction engineering controls should be considered during the design of new
and upgraded facilities.
B. Administrative Controls
Some examples of administrative controls are:
1. Restricting access to high noise areas
2. Limiting the amount of time employees spend on high noise tasks or in high
noise areas.
C. Hearing Protection Devices

1. Hearing protection devices should be required for personnel who enter posted
high noise areas.
2. Hearing protection devices should not be required in posted areas when the
equipment or process which normally produces the noise is not operating.
3. Hearing protection should also be worn in areas with apparent high noise levels,
even if these areas are not posted. In general, hearing protection should be worn
anytime noise is loud enough to interfere with normal face to face conversation.
Common examples may include:
. Bleeding down high pressure wells and gas lines
. Operating pneumatic tools
. Helicopter flights
. Boat passengers and crew members on boat decks while boats are underway
4. Hearing protection should be made readily available at common entrances to
high-noise-level areas.
5. A combination of ear plugs and ear muffs offers greater noise protection, and
may be appropriate for employees working in extreme high-noise-level areas for
long periods of time (e.g. turbine mechanics).

Hearing Conservation Safe Operations: Health
III. Audiometric Testing

Employees who work in high noise areas on a regular basis should participate in a
hearing conservation program and receive initial and periodic audiometric examinations.
If it is not feasible to provide employees with audiometric tests at remote locations, then
extra emphasis should be placed on employee training and enforcement of the use of
hearing protection devices in high noise areas.
A. Testing Frequency
1. Where audiometric testing is feasible, employees working in high noise areas on
a regular basis should receive baseline audiograms within 12 months of starting
work.
2. These employees should receive annual follow-up audiograms as long as they
continue to work in high noise areas.
It is important that loud noises on or off the job be avoided for at least 14 hours
preceding an audiogram. Hearing protectors can and should be worn during this 14-
hour period if needed.
B. Noise-Induced Hearing Loss

1. If an audiometric test indicates that an employee has had a noise-induced hearing
loss, the loss should by confirmed by re-testing at the earliest practical
opportunity.
2. The employees supervisor should counsel the employee to continue using
hearing protection devices in high noise areas both on and off the job.
C. Notification and Documentation

1. Employees should be notified of the results of their audiometric tests.
2. Audiometric test records should be retained by local management (or by the
Corporate Medical Department) for at least the duration of the affected workers
employment.
IV. Training
Employees who work in high noise areas on a regular basis and participate in a hearing
conservation program should receive initial and periodic hearing conservation training.
The purpose of this training is to make the employees fully aware of the adverse effects
of noise exposure and the procedures for protecting themselves from noise.
Recommended training topics include:
Identification of high-noise work areas or activities
Effects of noise on hearing
Types of hearing protection devices available
The advantages, disadvantages, and proper fitting/use of each type

Refresher training should be provided annually, in order to maintain employee

awareness and active participation.
Training should be documented and records kept by the Business Unit or facility for at
least the duration of the affected workers employment.
Resources
Hearing Conservation, Loss Prevention Guide No. 23, Chevron Corporation, December
1989
Code of Federal Regulations 1910.95, Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Noise Control in Design Manual. Richmond, CA: Chevron Research and Technology
Company. November 1989

Safe Operations: Health Exposure Monitoring Plan
Guideline SO.68
Exposure Monitoring
Plan
Purpose
This guideline describes industrial hygiene monitoring plans which are intended to
protect employees from occupational exposures to various health hazards, and provides
information which COPI operations can use to develop their own plans.
Content
Guideline SO.68-2
I. Why Conduct Exposure Monitoring? SO.68-2
II. Health Hazard Assessments SO.68-3
III. Exposure Monitoring Strategies SO.68-4
IV. Developing an Exposure Monitoring Plan SO.68-5
V. Evaluating Results SO.68-8
VI. Periodic Reviews SO.68-9
Resources SO.68-9

Exposure Monitoring Plan Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
Exposure monitoring helps to determine if workplace exposures are acceptable or if
controls need to be instituted. Since it is impractical to monitor all employees for every
potential exposure, a strategy should be developed for gathering representative samples.
Exposure monitoring plans should focus resources on identifying exposures with the
highest priority, and should be revised as needed to reflect new priorities. A well
designed and effectively implemented plan should:
Help managers, supervisors, and Company and contract employees understand
potential risks created by the presence of chemical, physical, and biological agents
in the workplace
Demonstrate that personnel are adequately protected from occupational health
hazards
Identify areas where additional engineering controls or process improvements may
be needed to reduce exposures
Help ensure effective use of occupational health resources, including manpower
Help ensure compliance with applicable regulations and Company policy.
This guideline pertains to routine operations, maintenance activities, and planned
shutdowns and turnarounds. Each facility should also consider what monitoring may be
needed in emergency situations, and include appropriate guidelines in their facility
emergency response plans.
Guideline
I. Why Conduct Exposure Monitoring?

A. Monitoring to Meet Compliance Requirements
Some host countries have established exposure standards and requirements for
exposure assessments for specific agents, such as asbestos, noise and benzene.
Exposure monitoring plans should be designed to meet all local government
requirements.
Recommended exposure limits have also been developed by various organizations,
such as the TLVs (Threshold Limit Values) published by the ACGIH (American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists). COPIs practice is to meet all
local government legal standards, and to meet recommended consensus standards
that are based on sound scientific principles. If published limits are either
unavailable or do not reflect current information, exposure limits set by Chevrons
Exposure Standards Committee should be followed for internal purposes.
B. Monitoring to Evaluate Controls

Personnel exposures can be monitored to establish before and after data to help
evaluate the effectiveness of engineering controls, such as ventilation systems or

enclosed process sampling systems. Monitoring might also be useful to help ensure
that personal protective equipment is adequate.
C. Discretionary Monitoring
In many cases, exposures to various agents in the workplace will appear to be low
based on subjective observations related to the quantities in use, the frequency of
use, the lack of dust or visible odors, and/or the use of engineering controls or closed
systems. Even if exposures are apparently low, it may still be appropriate to conduct
discretionary monitoring to:
1. Confirm assumptions about low exposure levels
2. Establish baseline exposure levels for employees in various jobs. This
information may be used for:
a. Future exposure monitoring plans
b. Litigation support
c. Epidemiological studies
3. Address specific complaints and demonstrate concern for the safety and health of
all personnel.
4. Provide information to government agencies and industry groups to help with
legislative and regulatory advocacy efforts.
II. Health Hazard Assessments

All work locations should be periodically assessed to determine health hazards. Health,
Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.68 lists some factors that should be considered
during health hazard assessments.
A. Frequency and Scope

The frequency and scope of these assessments depend on hazards involved, changes
in processes and work schedules, and the results of previous assessments.
B. Recommendations
Recommendations resulting from assessments should clearly identify monitoring
needed to:
1. Meet legal and compliance requirements
2. Determine the status of compliance with exposure limits
3. Provide information for other discretionary purposes as described above
C. Considerations for Assessing Health Hazards in the Workplace

1. Health concerns and perceived hazards -- based on discussions with manager,
supervisors, and employees

2. Systems which ensure that new and experienced employees are properly trained
and motivated to follow procedures, observe precautions, and use personal
protective equipment.
3. Plant layout drawings, flow diagrams, work schedules, job classifications and
descriptions, and known exposures which occur under normal conditions.
4. Types, frequency, and duration of routine and periodic maintenance activities
which may result in exposures.
5. Changes, or potential changes, in processes, schedules, or working conditions.
6. A current list of chemicals present at the facility, usually available from the
chemical inventory in the facilitys Hazard Communication Program Chemical
Inventory
7. Recommendations and actions taken from previous industrial hygiene surveys.
8. Quantities, concentrations, and toxicities of chemicals presents at the facility.
9. Potential sources of exposure to physical agents such as, noise, heat, and
radiation.
10. Environmental conditions such as, wind, heat, humidity, and cold, which might
cause exposure levels to vary.
11. Existing engineering controls which are being used to reduce exposures.
12. Results of previous exposure monitoring at the facility.
13. Results of exposure monitoring during similar activities at other facilities.
14. Chemical that are brought on site by contractors and vendors.
D. Assessors Qualifications
Personnel conducting health hazard assessments should:
1. Have a good understanding of current industrial hygiene principles and practices,
including regulatory requirements, exposures limits and Chevron methodology.
2. Be familiar with the types of exposures existing or anticipated at the facility
being reviewed.
3. Be able to identify tasks where potential exposures occur and gauge which
exposures may be significant, based both on health risks and on compliance
requirements.
4. Develop an appropriate plan for monitoring exposures and identify resources
required to execute it.
III. Exposure Monitoring Strategies

Since exposure monitoring can be time consuming and expensive, an effective
monitoring strategy should be developed to help minimize costs. To make the most of

exposure monitoring, personnel should be grouped by similar exposures, work location

and job classification or tasks (or both if exposures are equivalent). Then personnel
should be selected from each group and monitored, by applying the following strategies:
A. Worst-Case Strategy
This strategy is most often used for obtaining exposure assessments, evaluating
compliance with established limits, and evaluating effectiveness of engineering
controls. A sample or group of samples is collected when exposures are likely to be
highest. The rationale is that if these samples -- representing the worst-case
exposures -- are clearly below established limits, then lower exposures should be no
problem. If worst-case samples exceed exposure limits, appropriate controls should
be implemented and follow-up monitoring should be scheduled.
B. Baseline Strategy
Even when significant exposures are unlikely, monitoring might be appropriate to
establish background or typical exposure levels for specific work activities and jobs.
Baseline exposure data might be used to confirm assumptions about exposures and to
document low exposure levels for a given area.
C. Statistical Strategy
From the standpoint of economy, worst-case sampling strategies are usually
preferred over statistical sampling. However, where exposures are approaching
established limits or where a large number of samples have already been collected,
statistical strategies may be useful.
To compile statistical data from the results of exposure monitoring, collect an
adequate number of random, representative samples for each exposure group. A
minimum of six samples are generally required for statistical analysis packages, such
as DuPonts LOGAN program.
IV. Developing an Exposure Monitoring Plan

A. Assessments in General
Health hazard assessments described in Section II should identify:
1. Which exposure are significant
2. What exposure monitoring is required for compliance
3. What additional exposure information will be useful
B. Overall Content
The next step is to design a plan which establishes:
1. The activities and jobs to be monitored
2. How many and what types of samples should be taken

3. A monitoring schedule
4. Responsibilities for conducting the monitoring
An example of a typical exposure monitoring plan is shown in Figure SO.68 - 1.
Fig. SO.68-1 Typical Exposure Monitoring Plan
Exposures Number and

Location, Activity, Source of to be Sampling Type of Purpose of the Samples
and/or Job Title Exposure Measured Method Samples and Comments
Production operator Sour Hydrogen Hydrogen 2 Sets of area Evaluate need for PPE and
gauging sour crude crude oil Sulfide Sulfide samples per engineering controls. Use
tanks meters and tank open hatch gauging H2S
detector guidelines. Take samples
tubes on hot days with minimal
wind.
Mechanic working Compresso Noise Dosimeter 6 TWA on Evaluate mechanics for
in gas plant, pump rs, with OSHA each shift inclusion in the hearing
station generators settings (minimum) conservation program.
, etc.
Welder in Welding Chromium, Hi-flow 2-3 TWA Identify worst-case
maintenance shop fumes pump, 2 pc exposure during stainless
manganes 37 mm steel welding on cold days
e, nickel cassette when shop is closed up.
and iron with MCE Identify welding rods and
filter materials used.
Removing or Kaowool Refractory 25 mm 6 TWA Obtain baseline exposures
installing RCF insula- insulation ceramic asbestos 6 STEL during shutdown. Take as
tion during boiler fibers cassette per many samples as possible
shutdown NIOSH 6 Area to characterize exposures
method 7400 during this activity.
Notes: PPE - Personal Protective Equipment
NIOSH - National Institute of Occupational Safety & Health
STEL - Short-Term Exposure Limit
TWA - Time Weighted Average
C. Format
Formats for exposure monitoring plans will vary, but most plans should include the
following basic information:
1. Location, Activity, or Job Title (or combination)
Information to help:
a. Identify the exposure group and activities involved
b. Classify the sample for future reference

2. Source of Exposure
The material or activity which is the source of the exposure, such as:
a. Gasoline for total hydrocarbons and benzene
b. Crude oil for hydrogen sulfide
c. Operating equipment for noise
d. Catalyst material for metals
3. Exposures to be Measured
Specific agents of concern which can be analyzed and compared to an
established limit, such as:
a. Benzene from gasoline
b. Noise from operating equipment
4. Sampling Method
The equipment needed and procedures to be followed to collect the sample
5. Number and Type of Samples
The number of TWA (time weighted average), STEL (short term exposure limit),
Peak, and Area samples needed to help characterize the exposure.
6. Purpose of the Samples and Comments
To explain:
a. The reason for taking the sample
b. The sampling strategy and notes on any special procedures or information
needed.
D. Resource Requirements
The plan should help identify the resources needed to carry it out, such as:
1. Equipment
New or repaired and calibrated sampling equipment.
Note: Arrangements may also be made to borrow equipment from other facilities
or from the Health, Environment, and Safety (HES) Groups, Occupational Safety and
Health Staff of Chevron Research and Technology Company (CRTC).
2. Supplies
Additional sampling supplies, such as Organic Vapor Monitor (OVM) badges or
detector tubes.
3. Manpower

a. Local staffs
b. Temporary contract staff
c. CRTCs HES OSH Team
d. Outside consultants
4. Training
Additional training and professional development for local staffs through outside
or in-house courses, such as CRTCs course, Industrial Hygiene Monitoring.
V. Evaluating Results
A. Submitting Samples
Samples should be submitted to one of the following:
1. A lab accredited by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA)
2. A lab which uses an adequate quality assurance plan to detect sample
contamination and other problems
3. CRTCs HES OSH Team, who will route the samples to an outside lab with an
established quality control program. CRTCs HES OSH Team can help identify
and evaluate labs and establish systems for submitting spikes and blanks for
quality control.
B. Reviewing Results
All monitoring results should be reviewed as they become available. Conclusions
drawn from reviewing sample results may include:
1. Exposures Well Below Established Limits
When representative samples are clearly low, additional measurements are not
usually needed. Additional sampling may be scheduled if more baseline data is
needed or if operating conditions change.
2. Sampling Inconclusive
Results may be inconclusive if they are approaching established limits.
Additional samples may be needed to confirm exposure levels and/or to apply
statistical analysis.
Sampling might also be inconclusive if the results show a wide range or do not
appear reasonable. In this case, the sampling strategy might not have identified
personnel with equivalent exposures, or significant errors might have been made
during monitoring or analysis. In these cases, either additional samples should
be taken or the sampling strategy be redesigned.
3. Exposures Above Established Limits

If exposure results exceed established limits, the following hierarchy for

reducing exposures should be instituted:
a. Engineering controls, or
b. Administrative controls, and then
c. Personal protective equipment, if necessary
Follow-up testing should be conducted when administrative and engineering
controls are implemented to ensure that the controls are adequate.
VI. Periodic Reviews

Exposure monitoring plans should be reviewed and updated periodically to reflect both
the results of previous monitoring, and also changes in operating conditions, regulations,
and exposure limits.
Resources
Threshold Limit Value for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological
Exposure Indices (Current Edition)/ American Conference of Industrial Hygienists
(ACGIH)
Chevron Industrial Hygiene Manual, Chevron Research and Technology Company
(CRTC)
Exposure Monitoring Plans, Loss Prevention Guide No. 19, Chevron Corporation,
December 1991

Safe Operations: Health Laboratory Safety and Industrial Hygiene
Guideline SO.69
Laboratory Safety and

Industrial Hygiene
Purpose
This guideline provides information for laboratory personnel to help them conduct their
work safely and to minimize:
The risk of injury
Damage to facilities
Content
Guideline SO.69-2
I. General Procedures for Laboratory Safety SO.69-2
II. Working with Equipment SO.69-4
IV. Personal Protective Equipment SO.69-5
V. Chemicals in the Laboratory SO.69-6
VI. Disposal of Wastes SO.69-8
VII. Emergency Procedures SO.69-9
Resources SO.69-11

Laboratory Safety and Industrial Hygiene Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
The scope of this guideline includes:
Procedures for working safely with chemicals or other laboratory substances that
exhibit hazards, such as:
Acute or chronic toxicity
Flammability or explosivity
Corrosivity
High reactivity
Chemical instability
Information about:
Training for laboratory workers
Wearing personal protective equipment
Procedures for storing and disposing of chemicals and laboratory wastes
Emergency procedures
Under certain conditions, people are at risk from most chemicals. Laboratory personnel
should be provided with procedures to follow for working safely with specific chemicals.
These procedures should help workers minimize the risk of injury or illness and the
potential for spills or leaks, thus protecting human health and the environment.
Note: In those host countries in which workers do not speak English, all written
precautionary statements and postings should be provided in both English and the host
country's language.
Guideline
I. General Procedures for Laboratory Safety

Employees should thoroughly understand the safety and health requirements for all the
tasks they perform.
A. Overall Awareness
Ensure that employees are aware of potential risks with:
1. Chemicals
2. Applicable exposure limits
3. Applicable toxic properties

B. Safe Practices in the Laboratory

Teach personnel working in laboratories to follow certain basic safe practices.
Instructions should include:
1. Avoid skin contact with chemicals.
2. Avoid working alone for long periods.
Note: If it is impractical to assign two employees to work in close proximity,
arrange for someone to make safety checks of lone workers at regular intervals.
3. Do not store or consume food or beverages in the work and storage areas for
chemicals (including laboratory refrigerator and ovens).
4. Do not smoke in laboratory areas.
5. Do not drink from beakers or other laboratory containers because a chemical
solution may too easily be mistaken for a beverage if both are in laboratory
containers.
6. Do not mouth suction pipetting.
7. Do not work with an open flame unless necessary and appropriate. Do extinguish
it when it is no longer needed.
8. Do not work with an open flame to heat a flammable gas or liquid or to conduct
a distillation under reduced pressure.
9. Do not participate in horseplay.
10. Do conduct all laboratory procedures in a hood when they involve volatile toxic
substances or solid or liquid toxic substances which may result in the generation
of aerosols.
11. Do perform, specifically, all hydrofluoric acid (HF) operations in hoods or other
places where the vapors are removed from the user.
12. Do obtain approval from the laboratory supervisor before working with any
known carcinogen.
Note: Lists of human carcinogens and suspected carcinogens are available in
Appendix A of the booklet, American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists (ACGIH) TLV.
13. Do remove from close proximity, before lighting a flame, all flammable
substances that may be affected.
14. Do work with only non-sparking electrical equipment when volatile flammable
materials are present.

II. Working with Equipment

Train all employees in the techniques for working safely with equipment, and instruct
them to:
A. Safety Devices and Conditions

1. Look at all guards and safety devices to ensure they are installed properly and in
good working order before operating the equipment.
2. Do not work with electrical equipment that has frayed or bare wires, that has
missing plugs or plug components until it is properly repaired.
B. Shutting Down
Request the approval of the laboratory supervisor to leave equipment running
overnight. Otherwise, turn off equipment after completing an operation or when
leaving the immediate area.
C. Electrical Equipment
Never touch or operate electrical equipment, switches, or connections in any of the
following conditions:
1. With wet hands
2. When wearing wet clothes
3. When standing on a wet surface
4. When liquid has been spilled on it until a qualified electrician dries it
thoroughly and checks it
III. Training
A. Overall Awareness
Make all laboratory workers aware of the potential risks from chemicals and
equipment within the laboratory and about ways to minimize the risks.
B. Topics
The training should include such topics as:
1. Procedures for conducting the work safely
2. First aid procedures for burns and exposures to acids and caustics
3. Locating and using:
a. Safety showers
b. Eye washes
c. First aid kits

d. Fire extinguishers
e. Fire blankets
f. Spill control kits
g. Emergency exits
4. Locating and learning about the contents of Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDSs) or comparable documents about chemicals in the laboratory
IV. Personal Protective Equipment

Instruct workers to wear appropriate personal protective equipment at all times when
working in the laboratory.
A. Protecting Feet
Workers should wear safety shoes where foot hazards exist or when handling heavy
items such as, gas cylinders and large glass or metal containers.
No one should be permitted to wear sandals, open shoes, cloth-top shoes or to go
barefoot in the laboratory.
B. Protecting Faces
Everyone should wear:
1. Safety glasses or other appropriate eye protection while doing laboratory work
2. Chemical goggles and a face shield if there is a risk of injury to the eyes, face, or
neck from splashing liquids
3. Safety glasses and a face shield if there is a risk of injury to the eyes, face, or
neck from flying debris
C. Protecting Hands
Workers should wear:
1. Suitable chemical-resistant gloves when handling chemicals
2. Insulated gloves when handling items at extreme temperatures
3. Leather gloves for other types of work, as warranted
D. Precautions for Hydrofluoric Acid (HF)

1. Supervisor consultation
Before starting any new operation using HF, employees should consult with the
laboratory supervisor.
2. Protective apparel

Employees not separated from the HF by a protective barrier should wear

neoprene gloves, a plastic raincoat with the opening in the back, and a face
shield with goggles.
Note: Personal protective equipment used for HF exposures should be
neutralized before being placed in refuse containers.
E. Respiratory Protection
Employees should wear appropriate respiratory protection whenever there is
significant risk of exposure to airborne contaminants that exceed applicable limits.
See Health, Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.66 Respiratory Protection, in
this manual for information about selection of and training with respirators.
F. Laboratory Clothing
There are no special requirements for the type of clothing worn in the laboratory;
however, employees should be encouraged to wear laboratory coats and aprons and
discouraged from wearing:
1. Shorts
2. Loose-fitting, ragged, or soiled items of clothing
V. Chemicals in the Laboratory

A. Chemical Inventory and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs)
For laboratory workers, a chemical inventory and MSDSs or comparable documents
should be readily available for all harmful chemicals in the laboratory.
MSDSs or comparable documents should be used to help develop appropriate safety
measures for working with new chemicals.
B. Labels for Chemicals

1. Label all containers in the laboratory, except portable containers if they are both:
a. Filled from labeled containers, and
b. Intended only for immediate use by the worker who makes the transfer.
2. The label should contain information such as:
a. The identity and concentration of the contents
b. A hazard warning, if appropriate
c. Special storage instructions, if needed
3. We should not remove or deface labels on containers of chemicals.

C. Chemical Storage
Instruct those handling chemicals to:
1. Segregate chemicals by their compatible properties.
a. Acids from caustics, flammables, and combustible materials
b. Flammables from strong oxidizers such as, oxygen, hydrogen peroxide, and
sodium peroxide
Note: Such chemicals should be separated by one to two meters (three
five feet) in the storerooms.
2. Store
a. Flammable liquids in polyethylene or polypropylene trays in fireproof safety
cabinets, vented to the outside and not close to any open flames
b. Large bottles of chemicals no higher than one meter (three feet) from the
floor
Notes:
1) Store bottles of strong acids or caustics away from direct sunlight or
heat.
2) Carry stock bottles of strong acids and caustics in special containers
from the storage areas to the laboratory.
c. Samples in proper containers labeled with information, such as:
1) Sample number
2) Material name
3) Originator
4) Date of origin
5) Any special hazards they represent, such as degree of flammability or
toxicity
d. Cylinders of compressed gases secured in racks in well-ventilated places
with the valve end up and covered by protective caps.
1) Protect cylinders from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
2) Group cylinders with the same contents together.
3) Segregate full and empty cylinders.
e. Stored cylinders of oxygen separated from cylinders of flammable gases by
6 meters (20 feet) or by a 30-minute fire partition at least as high as the
tallest cylinder.

D. Housekeeping
Personnel should be instructed to:
1. Keep the laboratory bench spaces and floors clear of equipment, unused
chemicals, and literature.
2. Keep all floors, aisles, exits, fire extinguishing equipment, eyewash, shower
stations, and other emergency equipment unobstructed and within easy access of
laboratory personnel.
3. Clean up all chemical spills immediately and dispose of wastes as described in
the following section.
VI. Disposal of Wastes

Instruct laboratory personnel in the proper handling of wastes.
A. Solid and Liquid Chemical Wastes

Follow one of these methods:
1. Re-use or recycle these wastes if practical, treat or neutralize them (or both) as
appropriate
2. Dispose of them according to local waste management plans.
3. Store such wastes, when necessary, in suitable containers and label the
containers properly.
B. Specific Wastes
Segregate incompatible wastes. Do not pour chemical wastes down drains in sinks
unless the sinks have been designated and labeled to receive the specific wastes
involved.
C. Safety Cans
1. Accumulate small quantities of waste liquids such as organic solvents, spent
acids, and spent bases in labeled, self-closing safety cans dedicated to each
appropriate waste.
2. Empty these cans into appropriately labeled drums at the end of each workday
for short-term storage, pending disposal in accordance with our waste
management plan.
D. Broken Glassware
Store broken glassware in an appropriately labeled container before discarding it.

VII. Emergency Procedures

A. In General
1. A list of emergency procedures and information necessary to contact emergency
personnel should be posted in a worker-accessible location in the case of serious
incidents such as fires, explosions, or other laboratory accidents.
2. Emergency contacts should be notified immediately and medical help summoned
for any injured workers.
Note: Workers should be moved away from possible exposure to further
injuries, if necessary, and first aid rendered as appropriate.
B. Laboratory Fires
1. In General
In the event of a laboratory fire:
a. The observer should notify designated response personnel and other workers
in the laboratory.
b. Generally, no one should attempt firefighting alone.
2. Readily Controllable
If the fire appears small and readily controllable, the observer or other trained
personnel should
a. Attempt to put it out using the proper extinguisher (either CO2 or dry
chemical, depending on the fuel or equipment being protected).
b. Not use halon.
3. Difficult to Control
If there is doubt whether the fire can be controlled by locally available personnel
and equipment, the workers should
a. Confine the fire area by closing the hood sashes, doors, and windows.
b. Evacuate the building to avoid further risk to themselves.
c. Seek prompt medical treatment, as appropriate.
4. Clothing on Fire
If a worker's clothing is on fire, others should help to extinguish it immediately
in one of two ways, by:
a. Rolling the person in a fire blanket on the floor to smother the flames
b. Putting the person under an emergency shower

C. Chemical Spills
1. If harmful chemicals are spilled on workers, they should
a. Take an emergency shower to flood the exposed area with sufficient running
water.
b. Remove any contaminated clothing promptly.
2. If a chemical enters a worker's eye, the worker should
a. Flush the eye (including the inner surfaces of the eyelids) in an eyewash
fountain with plenty of water for 15 minutes.
b. Seek prompt medical treatment as appropriate.
D. Exposures to Hydrofluoric Acid (HF)

HF exposures can cause severe tissue damage and intense pain if not treated properly.
1. Skin Contact
For skin contact with liquid HF:
a. Wash the area immediately with large amounts of running water for at least
10 minutes and preferably more than 20 minutes to remove all traces of HF.
Note: While concentrated HF causes immediate pain, dilute HF may not
cause redness or burning for several hours.
b. With calcium gluconate gel (2.5 percent), massage the thoroughly washed
burn and other areas where acid may have contacted the skin. The gel is
available as Adrifax from Industrial Pharmaceuticals Services Ltd.,
Manchester, England.
Note: Persons applying the gel should wash their hands thoroughly before
touching affected skin.
c. Continue massage and repeat applications of the gel until five minutes after
the pain has subsided.
d. Transfer the patient to the medical clinic or hospital as appropriate.
2. Eye Contact
For eye contact with liquid HF:
a. Hold eyes open and irrigate copiously with normal saline solution for 15
minutes.
Note: If normal saline is not available, substitute plain tap water.
b. Transfer the worker to the clinic or hospital.

3. Inhalation of Vapor
a. Treat workers for probable shock and keep them warm.
b. Contact the clinic immediately for first aid treatment and advice about the
need to transport the patient to the clinic or hospital.
E. Spills
To protect human health and the environment, properly trained personnel should
clean up all spills immediately and consideration should be given to purchasing
commercial spill cleanup kits for such spills as strong acids, caustics, and solvents.
Note: Generally, mercury spills must be cleaned up with vacuum devices and require
special materials for decontaminating the waste.
Resources
Bretherick, L. Hazards in the Chemical Laboratory. 4th ed. Oxford: The Royal Society
of Chemistry, Alden Press, 1990.
Freeman, N. R. Introduction to Safety in the Chemical Laboratory. Oxford: Academy
Press, 1982.
Green, M. E., and Turk. A. Safety in Working With Chemicals. Oxford: McMillan
Publishing Co., Inc., 1978.
National Research Council. Prudent Practices for Handling Hazardous Chemicals in the
Laboratory. Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1981.
TLV Booklet. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).

Safe Operations: Health Hydrogen Sulfide, H2S
Guideline SO.70
Hydrogen Sulfide,
H2S
Purpose
This guideline contains general information about recognizing and controlling exposure
to hydrogen sulfide (H2S).
Content
Guideline SO.70-2
I. Characteristics SO.70-2
II. Health Effects and Exposure Standards SO.70-4
III. Monitoring Hydrogen Sulfide SO.70-5
IV. Hazard Controls SO.70-7
V. Training SO.70-11
VI. Emergency Procedures - Contingency Plans, Rescue, and Treatment SO.70-12
Resources SO.70-14

Hydrogen Sulfide, H2S Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) is a highly toxic chemical compound that is heavier than air in
its gaseous form. It is a colorless, flammable gas with a pungent odor at low
concentrations. Despite its characteristic odor, sense of smell cannot be relied upon to
detect the presence of H2S because the gas rapidly deadens the sense of smell by
paralyzing the olfactory nerve. Exposures to H2S at concentrations as low as 600 parts
per million (ppm) can cause death in a matter of minutes due to paralysis of the
respiratory system.
H2S is naturally present in some hydrocarbon reservoirs and therefore may be present in
toxic concentrations in piping and processing equipment associated with oil and gas
production. It also occurs in wastewater, asphalt, bunker fuel, molten sulfur and as a
product of the decomposition of sulfur-containing organic matter.
This guideline describes the characteristics of H2S and the health effects of exposure. It
includes a listing of the various processes where H2S may be encountered. Because of the
dangers associated with an accidental exposure to H2S, this guideline describes various
methods for monitoring areas where personnel may be exposed and the hazard controls
necessary during normal operations, maintenance and emergencies. Additionally, this
guideline contains information for training personnel and developing contingency plans
in order to prepare for accidental releases of H2S.
Guideline
I. Characteristics
H2S is a colorless, flammable gas that may be liquefied under pressure. It can occur in a
variety of oil and gas exploration and production operations (see Figure SO.70- 1) and
has the following properties:
A. Toxicity. H2S is extremely toxic. The lethal concentration is 600-700 ppm.
B. Heavier than Air. H2S is approximately 19 percent heavier than air (vapor density =
1.19). It tends to accumulate in low or enclosed places such as pits, trenches,
enclosed well bays and cellars, sumps, the tops of floating roof tanks, buildings,
shale shakers and portable containers. However, H2S mixed with natural gas may
form a lighter-than-air mixture.
C. Soluble in Liquids. High concentrations of H2S may be present in crude oil, molten
sulfur, tank and pit-bottom sludge, produced water, etc., all which may release H2S
when agitated, heated, or depressurized.
D. Odor. At very low concentrations, H2S has a characteristic odor suggestive of rotten
eggs. However, smell cannot be used as an adequate means of detecting its presence
because hydrocarbon vapors in asphalt, banker fuel and some crude oils can mask the
rotten egg odor. Additionally, at higher concentrations (>100 ppm), H2S deadens the
sense of smell, leading people to believe falsely that no H2S is present. Consequently,
sense of smell is not dependable as a means of detection.

E. Flammable. H2S is an extremely flammable gas with a wide range of flammability

(4.3 - 45.5% by volume in air). When burned, H2S forms sulfur dioxide (SO2),
which is a colorless, highly toxic and very pungent gas.
F. Highly Corrosive. H2S accelerates corrosion, producing a general loss of metal and
strength, deformation, and cracks. Copper alloys corrode rapidly in H2S service.
G. Reactive. In an oxygen-deficient atmosphere, iron and steel will react with H2S to
form iron sulfide deposits on the surface of the metal. Some iron sulfides (known as
pyrophoric iron sulfide) are unstable and when exposed to air will undergo a rapid
chemical reaction creating an ignition source that should be considered during
equipment shutdowns.
Fig. SO.70-1 Exploration and production processes where H2S may be present.
Process H2S Source

Crude Oil and Gas Drilling and In recycled drilling mud, crude and natural gas. Can
Lifting Operations accumulate in low-lying areas, ditches, mud tanks and
trenches during climatic conditions that inhibit dissipation
of the gas.
Field Maintenance of Wells When replacing packing; pulling pumping rods; etc.
Well Injections When re-injecting sour gas into a formation to stimulate
oil production; injecting steam or water.
Tanker and Floating Storage Unit From leakage of cargo piping and emissions from vapor-
Cargo Handling control systems during cargo handling; when
disconnecting cargo hoses or drop arm lines; in pump
rooms; in pockets on deck, engine room spaces, and
forecastle head space.
Confined Space Entry During maintenance activities in tanks, vessels, trenches,
pits, sumps, on the roof of floating roof tanks.
Oil Processing In vapor-recovery systems, topping units, sulfur-recovery
plants, sour water tanks, pits, etc.
Gas Plants In fugitive emissions from process equipment, emergency
relief systems, etc.
Tank Gauging and Tank Vents When opening the gauge hatch of storage tanks
Barge, Tank Truck, and Rail Car In emissions from open hatches during loading of molten
Loading sulfur, crude, and condenses.
Other Operations When acid cleaning equipment containing iron sulfide
deposits; venting fuel gas manifolds; drawing water from
tanks; repairing leaks in pumps or lines; and in gas
releases from tank vents, still vents, valve boxes, pump
packing glands, fuel gas lines, wellheads, or draining
catch basins, or sewers.

II. Health Effects and Exposure Standards

A. Depending on the concentration, the effects of acute exposure to H2S may range
from detecting a recognizable odor to causing death (see Table H.70-2).
B. H2S oxidizes rapidly in the body; therefore, there are normally no permanent after-
effects from acute exposure if the victim is rescued promptly and resuscitated before
experiencing prolonged oxygen deprivation.
C. Symptoms from repeated exposures to low concentrations usually disappear after not
being exposed for a period of time.
D. There is little or no data on the effects of chronic exposure; however, frequent
exposures to low concentrations that do not produce effects initially may eventually
lead to irritation of the eyes, nose, and throat.
Note: For additional health data on H2S, refer to Chevrons Material Safety Data
Sheet No. 301.
Fig. SO.70-2 Acute effects of exposure to H2S in various concentrations.
H2S in Air By Volume Remarks

>1 ppm Perceptible odor except for masking by other odors, as described in
the General Information section.
10 ppm A small percentage of workers may experience eye irritation.
Threshold Limit Value (TLV) for an eight-hour Time-Weighted Average
(TWA) recommended by the American Conference of Governmental
Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).
15 ppm Minimum eye and lung irritation.
Short term exposure limit (STEL) as a 15 minute TWA (as recommended
by the ACGIH).
50 ppm Mild eye and throat irritation after one-hour exposure
100 ppm Deadens sense of smell in 3 to 15 minutes and may cause coughing,
and burning of the eyes and respiratory tract.
200 ppm Immediate loss of sense of smell. Marked eye and respiratory irritation.
300 ppm The maximum concentration from which one could escape within 30
minutes without a respirator and without experiencing escape-
impairing or irreversible health effects.
Generally recognized Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH)
concentration.
500 ppm Respiratory disturbances in 2 to 15 minutes. Dizziness, collapse, and
unconsciousness after half to one hour.
700 ppm Loss of consciousness quickly. Breathing will stop and death will result
if not rescued promptly.
1000 ppm Immediate unconsciousness. Death in three to five minutes.

III. Monitoring Hydrogen Sulfide

Hydrogen sulfide levels should be monitored in any work area that may reasonably be
expected to exceed an atmospheric concentration of 5 ppm (one-half of the Threshold
Limit Value). There are two broad categories of monitoring devices available: fixed
systems and portable units.
A. Fixed Monitoring Systems

1. Fixed monitoring systems, which continuously measure the concentration of H2S
in an atmosphere, should be installed in facilities containing process equipment
handling gases or fluids containing H2S when the locations are both an enclosed
area (room, building, or space) and are inadequately ventilated. (Inadequately
ventilated is defined as ventilation that is not sufficient to prevent the
accumulation of H2S in concentrations exceeding 10 ppm.)
2. Additionally, fixed monitoring systems may also be installed in other locations
where the possibility exists for a significant release of H2S that may expose
personnel or the public to hazardous concentrations of H2S.
3. Sensor Location
a. H2S sensors should be placed in locations to maximize the area of detection
for personnel who are working in the area.
b. The following are some locations where H2S sensors are typically installed:
i) Potential sources of major leaks such as pump seals, compressor and
turbine seals
ii) Pump/compressor buildings, where small releases of H2S can accumulate
iii) Control buildings, living quarters and other manned buildings near inlet
air plenums
4. Alarm Set Point
a. Alarm set points should be chosen to minimize the likelihood that personnel
are exposed to levels over 10 ppm.
b. If sensors are located in the general work area, alarm set points may need to
be set lower than 10 ppm to provide adequate protection to workers nearer
the point of release.
5. Alarm Methods
a. Alarms provide personnel with audible warning or notice to evacuate, shelter-
in-place or to don respiratory protective equipment to prevent exposure over
10 ppm.
b. Flashing lights are useful in high noise areas where conventional alarms are
difficult to hear.

c. Alarms indicating an H2S emergency should be easily distinguishable from

other alarms at locations with multiple sirens, horns or lights.
d. Alarms should be well distributed to ensure that all personnel receive early
warning of elevated concentrations of H2S.
e. Warning lights at sensor locations are useful in areas with multiple, fixed
sensors for indicating which monitor has detected a high concentration of
H2S.
6. Panel Locations
a. Fixed monitoring system control panels should be located in manned
locations such as plant or offshore platform control rooms so those personnel
outside the area of the release:
i) Are aware that a release has occurred.
ii) Can advise other operators by radio to don breathing equipment and
investigate.
iii) Can make additional emergency notifications by telephone or radio as
needed.
b. In the event that a panel cannot be located in a manned location, consider
installing a "repeater" enunciator in a manned location (such as a dispatchers
office), or ensuring that the alarm panel has telephone dialing/messaging
capability to a manned location.
7. Fixed monitoring systems should be connected to emergency power supplies to
ensure that the systems continue to operate during power failures.
B. Personal Electronic Monitor/Alarm Units

1. Personal electronic monitors are small devices designed to fit in a shirt pocket or
attach to a belt to provide personnel with monitoring and early warning of an H2S
release in their immediate work area.
2. Personal electronic monitors should be used when the atmospheric concentration
of H2S in a persons immediate work area could exceed 10 ppm and fixed
monitoring systems are not installed or do not provide adequate coverage of the
immediate area.
3. Portable electronic monitor/alarm units rely upon natural air currents and
diffusion principles to detect the presence of H2S. Sensors monitor H2S levels
constantly and are usually set to activate an audible or visible alarm at 10 ppm.
Most personal monitor/alarm units are available with earphones to wear in high
noise areas.
4. A disadvantage with this type of equipment is that it cannot be used to detect H2S
at more than arms length and requires personnel to be in close proximity to H2S
before an alarm occurs.

C. Portable H2S Detectors

1. Portable H2S Detectors use a battery-operated pump to pull air/gas samples to a
sensor. They can be used with an extendable wand and hose to test an atmosphere
without requiring a person to enter the area.
2. Portable H2S detectors are generally used to test spaces for the presence of H2S
before conducting work in the area and to search out release sources.
3. Portable H2S detectors are often combined with oxygen and combustible gas
sensing equipment to serve as multiple gas detectors. Portable detectors are
typically rugged and reliable but function most dependably when they are fully
charged and have been recently calibrated.
D. Direct-Reading Detector Units

1. Direct-reading detector units draw air through color-metric tubes to indicate H2S
concentrations. Some manufacturers of pumps and detector tubes include Draeger
and Kitagawa.
2. Direct-reading detector units should not be used as a substitute for personal or
portable H2S detectors because they have limited sensitivity, may not detect low
concentrations and do not provide continuous readings.
E. Routine Maintenance
1. Routine maintenance procedures, consistent with the manufacturers
recommendations should be established and followed to ensure that H2S
monitoring and alarm systems continue to operate properly.
2. Only trained personnel should calibrate, test, and conduct maintenance on
monitoring equipment.
3. Since known concentrations of H2S are utilized to calibrate monitoring
equipment, such work should only be carried out in well-ventilated areas.
IV. Hazard Controls

Standard operating procedures that describe steps to minimize exposures should be
established at each location where the potential exists for exposure to H2S. These
procedures should address the topics covered in this guideline in addition to site specific
information such as equipment venting or purging procedures and H2S monitoring
requirements.
A. Typical Operational Activities

Typical operational activities where personnel may be exposed to H2S include
drawing samples, handling and testing samples, gauging tanks, and when opening
lines and equipment. (Other activities are listed in Table H.70-1.) Some methods of
controlling exposures to harmful quantities of H2S while performing typical duties
are discussed below:

1. Workers should always remain upwind from the source of hydrogen sulfide gas
while completing tasks. Workers should verify the wind direction with a
windsock, streamer, or vane before initiating work.
2. Personnel must use breathing equipment (as provided in Table H70-4) or
ventilation must be provided when the potential for exposure to hazardous
concentrations of hydrogen sulfide occurs during routine operations and
maintenance activities.
3. Laboratory operations involving H2S gas or materials containing hydrogen
sulfide should be conducted under a properly functioning laboratory hood or with
local exhaust ventilation placed at the source of emission.
4. For indoor work (such as in buildings containing transfer pumps, gas processing
equipment, gas compressors, treaters, or other equipment), the accumulation of
H2S can be prevented by general/dilution ventilation.
5. Signage
a. Where facilities or equipment may contain hazardous concentrations of H2S,
signs using appropriate symbols and languages to ensure that they are
understandable to all personnel, should be displayed at the following
locations (see Figure SO.70- 3):
i) Entries or passageways to areas where H2S may be present
ii) The plot limit of facilities
iii) Points where equipment containing H2S can be opened such as vessel
manways, drains, and sample connections
iv) Locked fences at isolated locations
b. At locations where process fluids may contain 1% H2S by volume or greater,
the equipment containing such fluids (including vessels, drains, flanges,
valves, meter connections and tanks) should be identified by color coding and
warning signs.
Fig. SO.70-3 Typical signs to indicate presence of H2S.
DANGER DANGER DANGER

HYDROGEN SULFIDE HYDROGEN SULFIDE HYDROGEN SULFIDE
OPERATIONSENTER ONLY POISONOUS GAS POISONOUS GAS
WHEN MONITORING SHOWS AUTHORIZED HARMFUL IF INHALED
THE AREA TO BE SAFE
PERSONNEL ONLY
Use a sign similar to the one Use a sign similar to the Use a sign similar to the one
above at points of access to one above to limit access above to identify equipment
areas that may contain H2S. to authorized persons. that may contain hazardous
concentrations of H2S.

B. Maintenance Activities
Typical maintenance activities where personnel may be exposed to H2S include tank
cleaning and repair, vessel or sump clean-outs and repair, and well maintenance.
These and other similar activities may place workers at a higher risk of exposure to
H2S. This section describes methods of controlling exposures to harmful quantities of
H2S during typical maintenance activities:
1. Respiratory protection (breathing equipment) is required for employees whenever
the work area atmospheric concentration of H2S is 10 ppm or greater.
2. Maintenance work may be conducted in areas with an atmosphere containing an
H2S concentration of 300 ppm or less. Figure SO.70- 4 lists a range of H2S
concentration levels and the types of breathing equipment required.
3. General ventilation that is provided by explosion-proof tank top blower fans or
air eductors (driven by compressed air) can prevent hazardous concentrations of
H2S from accumulating in low-lying areas.
4. Air supplying compressors, air cylinders, and supplied air manifolds should be
located to keep the airline at a minimal length (not to exceed 300 feet).
5. Communication devices should be provided for workers outside of voice or
visual range of other workers.
6. When personnel work in locations where the work atmosphere concentration of
H2S could be 300 ppm or higher, a standby rescue person trained in rescue
techniques and with suitable rescue equipment, including appropriate breathing
equipment shall be provided.
7. At locations where the potential exists for exposure to H2S at concentrations of
300 ppm or higher, suitable rescue equipment shall be provided. In addition to
appropriate breathing equipment, rescue equipment may include a lifeline and
harness. The type of rescue equipment required will vary depending on the type
of job and work being performed.
8. For maintenance or other non-emergency work in a enclosed or confined space
that may contain an atmospheric concentration of H2S greater than 10 ppm,
follow the requirements set forth in COPI HSE Guideline SO.2, Confined Space
Entry.
9. Contractors must provide training and equipment for their employees unless the
company agrees to do so. See COPI HSE Guideline SO.66, Respiratory
Protection for the elements of an effective program.

Fig. SO.70-4 Respiratory protective equipment for various activities.
Concentration Activity Respiratory Equipment Requirements

10 ppm Entry for work or Respiratory protection not required but personal
rescue, < 8 hours exposures should be continuously monitored
only whenever H2S hazards may exist.
Emergency egress
> 10 ppm Entry is permitted for Self-contained, positive-pressure breathing
< 300 ppm work or rescue equipment (SCBA)
Emergency egress Positive-pressure/pressure-demand air-line
breathing equipment coupled with a SCBA
rated for a minimum of fifteen minutes
Positive-pressure/pressure-demand air line
breathing equipment with an auxiliary self-
contained air supply rated for a minimum of 5
minutes if the air-line is connected to a source
of breathing air
> 300 ppm No entry except for Requires the same equipment as above (>10 ppm)
rescue but also with a second SCBA-equipped person
Emergency egress nearby in a safe area for rescue.
Note: Gas mask canister-type or air purifying (negative pressure) respirators are not recommended for
controlling exposures to H2S.
C. Emergencies
1. At locations where the work atmosphere concentration of H2S could exceed 10
ppm, personal breathing equipment must be provided for essential personnel.
Essential personnel are those required to provide proper and prudent safe
operations activities and those required to effect control of a hazardous H2S
condition.
2. When personal breathing equipment is required for essential personnel, it should
be strategically located so that it is quickly and easily available. These locations
should be clearly marked within the work area and at least one apparatus more
than the normal complement of essential personnel should be provided. Breathing
equipment should be provided in pairs to facilitate the use of the buddy system
when responding to an H2S emergency.
3. Communication devices should be provided for workers outside of voice or
visual range of other workers.
4. Wind direction indicators such as windsocks, streamers, flags, or other suitable
device may be used for indicating wind direction at the facility. These should be
readily visible to personnel on or approaching the facility so that the safest route
of entry or evacuation can be determined.
5. Flags may be used to alert personnel to the risk of dangerous levels of H2S. Color
coded flags may be used to indicate the degree of hazard:

a. Green: Normal
b. Yellow: Moderate Danger (10-50 ppm)
c. Red: Extreme Danger (in excess of 50 ppm)
V. Training
A. All employees subject to H2S exposure in their work areas should receive appropriate
initial and periodic training that addresses the following:
1. Hazards, characteristics, and properties of H2S
2. Sources of H2S
3. Proper use of H2S detection methods used in the workplace
4. Symptoms of H2S exposure
5. Rescue techniques and first aid to victims of H2S exposure
6. Proper use and maintenance of breathing equipment including fit testing and
demonstrating proficiency by donning equipment.
7. Workplace practices and relevant maintenance procedures that have been
established to protect personnel from the hazards of H2S
8. Wind direction awareness and routes of egress
9. Recognition of and proper response to warning signals or alarms and procedures
to follow during an alarm condition
10. Locations of emergency assembly areas and shelter-in-place locations
B. Employees should also participate in periodic drills to practice using breathing
apparatus and rescuing workers. Contractors should be required to provide training to
their employees unless the company agrees to do so.
C. H2S trained personnel should receive badge-sized plastic laminated certificates that
should be shown when entering H2S restricted areas.
D. Visitors
1. Prior to entering an H2S restricted facility, visitors and non-regularly assigned
personnel shall be briefed on routes of egress, emergency assembly areas,
warning signals, and how to respond in the event of an emergency including the
use of personal protective equipment if required.
2. Visitors should be informed that breathing equipment is reserved for essential
personnel only. Otherwise, should an alarm occur, an operator could travel to a
breathing equipment location to find it had been removed.

VI. Emergency Procedures - Contingency Plans, Rescue, and Treatment

Any spill or leak of H2S may be a potential hazard. Procedures should be established for
notifying appropriate personnel when a leak is detected. These procedures should be
readily accessible at each work location affected. (See Figure H.70-5.)
A. Contingency Plans
Each location where employees, contractors or the public may be exposed to
potentially hazards levels of H2S should prepare a site specific, written contingency
plan. In order to prepare such a plan, operations should be evaluated to identify
potential emergencies and their impact on operating personnel and the public. The
plan should offer an organized means of alerting and safely evacuating all persons
affected by an accidental release. The H2S plan can be incorporated into emergency
response.
The following is a suggested outline for a contingency plan:
1. Emergency Procedures
a. Responsibilities of personnel.
b. Immediate action plan
c. Call-out and notification lists, communication methods
d. Locations of nearby residences, businesses, parks, schools, etc.
e. Shelter-in-place locations or assembly areas
f. Evacuation plan and routes
g. Safety equipment and supplies available
2. Characteristics of H2S
3. Facility Descriptions, Maps, and Drawings
4. Training and Drills
a. Responsibilities and duties of essential personnel.
b. On-site or tabletop drills.
c. Informing nearby residents on protective measures during emergencies.
d. Training attendance and documentation
e. Briefing of public officials on issues such as evacuation or shelter-in-place
plans.
B. Immediate Action Plan

Each contingency plan should contain a condensed Immediate Action Plan to be followed
by designated personnel any time they receive notice of a potentially hazardous discharge
of H2S. For the protection of personnel and the public and abatement of the discharge, the
plan should include the following:

1. Alert and account for facility personnel.

a. Move away from the H2S source and get out of the affected area.
b. Don proper personal breathing equipment.
c. Alert other affected personnel.
d. Assist personnel in distress.
e. Proceed to the designated emergency assembly area.
f. Account for on-site personnel.
2. Take immediate measures to control the present or potential H2S discharge and to
eliminate possible ignition sources. Emergency shutdown procedures should be
initiated as deemed necessary to correct or control the specific situation. When
the required action cannot be accomplished in time to prevent exposing operating
personnel or the public to hazardous concentrations of H2S, proceed to the
following steps, as appropriate for the site-specific conditions.
3. If appropriate, alert the public (directly or through appropriate government
agencies) that may be subjected to an atmosphere exposure exceeding 30 ppm of
H2S. (This concentration is based upon the American Industrial Hygiene
Associations Emergency Response Planning Guidelines, ERPG-2)
4. Initiate evacuation operations.
5. Contact the first available designated supervisor on the call list.
6. Make recommendations to public officials regarding blocking unauthorized
access to the unsafe area.
7. Make recommendations to public officials regarding evacuating the public.
8. Monitor the ambient air in the area of exposure to determine when it is safe for
re-entry.
The sequence of events listed above should be altered to fit the prevailing situation.
Certain actions, especially those dealing with the public, should be coordinated with
public officials.
C. Rescue
Rescuers should never attempt to rescue anyone overcome in an H2S hazard area
without wearing SCBA, or supplied-air-line respirator with an escape bottle.
D. Treatment
1. Move the victim to fresh air.
2. Begin mouth-to-mouth resuscitation immediately if breathing has ceased or is
labored, or CPR if needed.

3. Keep the person warm and at rest.

4. Place the victim under a physicians care as soon as possible.
Resources
Recommended Practice for Safe Drilling of Wells Containing Hydrogen Sulfide, API
Recommended Practice 49. American Petroleum Institute, 1987.
Recommended Practices for Oil and Gas Producing and Gas Processing Plant
Operations Involving Hydrogen Sulfide, API Recommended Practice 55. American
Petroleum Institute, February 15, 1995
Recommended Practice for Analysis, Design, Installation, and Testing of Basic Surface
Safety Systems for Offshore Production Platforms, Appendix F-Toxic Gases Section,
API Recommended Practice 14C. American Petroleum Institute, March 1998
Piping Manual. Chevron Research and Technology Company, August 1992
Material Safety Data Sheet No. 301, Hydrogen Sulfide. Chevron Research and
Technology Company, August 1992.
Marine Regulations, 210.3000. Chevron Shipping Company, April 1993
Safety in Designs. Chevron Research and Technology Company, September 1996.
Loss Prevention Guide No. 11. Chevron Corporation, January 1992
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 30, Part 250.417, Hydrogen Sulfide. Minerals
Management Service, May 29, 1998.
Emergency Response Planning Guidelines, American Industrial Hygiene Association,
1991

Safe Operations: Health NORM Handling and Disposal
Guideline SO.71
NORM (Naturally Occurring

Radioactive Material)
Handling and Disposal
Purpose
This guideline provides general information for detecting, monitoring, handling and
disposal of NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material). Application of these
procedures should help to minimize health and environmental risks from NORM.
Content
Guideline SO.71-2
I. Accumulation of NORM in Production Equipment SO.71-2
II. NORM Surveys SO.71-3
III. Controlling NORM-Containing Scale SO.71-5
IV. Managing NORM In-Place SO.71-5
V. Worker Protection During Maintenance Activities SO.71-6
VI. Storage of NORM SO.71-7
VII. NORM Disposal SO.71-7
Resources SO.71-8

NORM Handling and Disposal Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material) is found throughout the natural
environment, typically in the form of radioactive isotopes of uranium, thorium, radium,
radon, polonium, bismuth and lead. NORM can be found in rocks, soil, water, man-made
materials such as bricks, concrete and steel, and also in some oil and gas deposits. When
NORM is transported from such oil and gas deposits to the surface in production streams,
it can precipitate and accumulate inside tubing strings and surface equipment and piping.
NORM is not considered hazardous to personnel as long as concentrations are low or
higher concentrations are confined inside of process equipment and piping. Personnel
can work on an ongoing basis in the immediate vicinity of process equipment and piping
containing accumulations of NORM without any significant increased health risk.
However, NORM may present a health hazard during maintenance or other activities
where workers open or enter NORM-contaminated equipment. If workers inhale or
ingest NORM-contaminated scale, dust or sludge, the resulting internal radiation
exposure may potentially cause health effects.
In addition, NORM-contaminated process equipment, piping, sand, scale and sludge
should be disposed of properly. Unlike most other waste materials, NORM decays very
slowly. NORM is also difficult to alter or destroy. Therefore the goal for disposal is to
minimize the possibility of future contact with NORM-contaminated materials.
Oil and gas production and processing equipment should be periodically evaluated for
NORM contamination. For the typically low concentrations of NORM found in the
oilfield, the precautions described in this guideline should adequately protect workers
from harmful exposures. For higher concentrations, more detailed site specific NORM
management strategies should be developed in consultation with NORM experts.
Guideline
I. Accumulation of NORM in Production Equipment

NORM can accumulate inside production and processing equipment in two ways:
A. As produced water approaches the surface and its temperature drops with pressure
and/or velocity changes, precipitates can form in the tubing strings and surface
equipment. The resulting scales and sludge may contain radium, as well as other
radioactive uranium and thorium decay products (also called progeny or sometimes
daughters) that co-precipitate with barium or strontium sulfate. These scales and
sludge can build up in well tubing, piping, heater treaters, separators, storage tanks,
produced water disposal/injection wells and associated equipment. In addition,
NORM may be found in soils contaminated during maintenance activities, such as
well workovers and tank and pipe cleaning operations.
B. Radon, a radioactive gas, is sometimes present in oil and gas formations. Radon has
a boiling point between those of ethane and propane, and thus, when produced with
the oil and gas, will usually follow the gas stream. Radon decay products (such as

Lead in the form of Pb2lO) can form thin radioactive films on the inner surfaces of
gas processing equipment such as scrubbers, compressors and product lines.
II. NORM Surveys

A. To determine whether NORM is present in significant concentrations, initial and
periodic NORM surveys should be conducted. These surveys should encompass:
1. All segments of production processing systems, including well heads, production
manifolds, separators, dehydrators, pipeline pumps and storage tanks.
2. Process equipment that has been removed from service.
3. Locations where scale or sludge might have been deposited during maintenance
activities.
B. Measurements can be made directly from NORM materials or from the external
surfaces of the equipment containing NORM materials using a gamma radiation
detector, such as the Ludlum Model 19 which gives readings in units of micro
Roentgen per hour (R/hr) as used in the US. These instruments are also available
with displays in SI units of micro Sieverts per hour (Sv/hr). Note that the
conversion from microRoentgen per hour to SI units involves dividing by 100, so
100 R/hr is equal to 1 Sv/hr. The choice of the display scale should be in
accordance with local usage and custom. When taking readings on external surfaces,
the instrument should generally be held in contact with lines and vessels. When
taking readings to assess ground contamination, the instrument should be held about
1 meter above the ground.
C. For NORM deposited as a film on gas processing equipment due the presence of
radon, measurements can be made externally using the Ludlum Model 19 if the gas
processing system is in operation. If the gas processing system has not been
operating for at least 4 hours, measurements should be made internally with an
alpha/beta radiation detector such as the Ludlum Model 3 with 44-9 probe placed
inside the open equipment or vessel.
D. Readings taken during surveys should be recorded on a map or sketch of the site
and/or equipment. Background readings should also be taken in nearby areas that are
free of NORM for comparison.
E. Based on the results of surveys, process equipment, piping and materials should be
classified as shown in Figure SO.71- 1.

Fig. SO.71-1 Interpretation Of Survey Meter Measurements
Radiation Type Instrument Reading Classification

Gamma Ludlum No. 19 < 50 R/hr above background NORM-free
(< 0.5 Sv/hr above background)
Gamma Ludlum No. 19 50-250 R/hr above background Low-NORM

(0.5-2.5 Sv/hr above background),
not extensive
Gamma Ludlum No. 19 50-250 R/hr above background NORM-
(0.5-2.5 Sv/hr above background), contaminated
extensive
Gamma Ludlum No. 19 250-2500 R/hr above background NORM-
(2.5-25 Sv/hr above background) contaminated
Gamma Ludlum No. 19 >2500 R/hr above background High-NORM

(>25 Sv/hr above background)
Alpha Ludlum No. 3 with Any detectable alpha level NORM-

44-9 probe contaminated
Beta Ludlum No. 3 with 250-2500 R/hr above background NORM-

44-9 probe (2.5-25 Sv/hr above background) contaminated
1. NORM-free - no gamma readings greater than 50 R/hr (0.5 Sv/hr) above

background. In-service process equipment and piping classified as NORM free
should be re-surveyed and re-evaluated every 3-5 years to ensure that
concentrations have not increased beyond the low NORM range.
2. Low-NORM - some gamma readings greater than 50 R/hr (0.5 Sv/hr) above
background, but these readings are not widespread, and there are no readings
greater than 250 R/hr (2.5 Sv/hr). Low-NORM process equipment and piping
should also be re-surveyed every 3-5 years. As long as readings remain in the
low-NORM range, then no additional precautions are necessary.
3. NORM-contaminated - gamma readings in the 50-250 R/hr (0.5 -2.5 Sv/hr)
above background range are widespread, there are readings greater than 250
R/hr (2.5 Sv/hr) above background, or any alpha levels are detected. Process
equipment and piping classified as NORM-contaminated should be maintained,
handled and disposed of as described in the following sections.
4. High NORM - gamma readings greater than 2500 R/hr (2.5 Sv/hr). A
detailed, site specific NORM management plan should be developed in
consultation with NORM experts. Precautions for maintenance activities
involving high-NORM accumulations might include the use of personal radiation
dosimeters by workers to monitor exposures. Worker exposures should be
limited to the standards of the US Nuclear Radiation Commission NRC as shown
in Figure SO.71- 2.

Fig. SO.71-2 Estimated Doses For Varying Degrees Of Injury To Man
Dose Rate1 Period Of Time Effect

500,000,000 R/day 2 days Death rate close to 100%
100,000,000 R/day Until death Mean survival time approximately 15
days. 100% death rate for 30 days.
60,000,000 R/day 10 days Sickness and death rates high with
crippling disabilities.
30,000,000 R/day 10 days Moderate disability and death rates
10,000,000 R/day 365 days Some deaths
3,000,000 R/day Few months No drop in efficiency
500,000 R/day Many months No large scale drop in life span
20,000 R/day2 Continuous No measurable effect
(5 R/year) On work days
500 R/day Continuous Estimated background exposure for
(0.2 R/year) Every day workers with no involvement with
radioactive materials
20,000 R Typical X-ray No measurable effect (shown for
comparison)
2000 R 10 hour jet flight No measurable effect (shown for
comparison)
1 Human doses of nuclear radiation are usually expressed in units of "rem" (Roentgen equivalent
man) instead of "R" (Roentgen). In this guideline, units of "R" are used throughout because the
monitoring instruments measure in units of R and because the two units function essentially the
same for measuring NORM. "Rem is measured in units of alpha, beta or gamma radiation that
causes a specific amount of cell damage in man. For gamma radiation, one rem is approximately
equivalent to 1 R. The SI unit for biologically significant radiation is the Gray (Gy). One Gray is
equal to 100 Rem.
2 This exposure is the US Nuclear Regulatory Commission limit per work day for occupationally
exposed radiation employees who work 5 days (40 hours) per week. This limit is estimated at
27,000 R/work day for 7/7 or 28/28 rotational workers.
III. Controlling NORM-Containing Scale

Engineering controls and chemical scale inhibitors are available which can reduce the
deposition of NORM-containing scale on surface production equipment and piping.
Scale tends to accumulate in portions of systems downstream of points where major
pressure drop and turbulence occur. Modifying these components may help in reducing
scale formation and NORM accumulation.
IV. Managing NORM In-Place

As long as NORM accumulations are contained within process equipment and piping,
external radiation is generally so low that no changes in normal work procedures are
needed. NORM-contaminated process equipment and piping can continue to be used in

oilfield service. It is not necessary to clean, remove or dispose of process equipment or

piping merely because NORM is present. However, to help ensure that appropriate
precautions are followed during maintenance activities, the following steps should be
taken for managing NORM in-place:
A. Warning symbols or signs should be posted on NORM-contaminated process
equipment and piping to remind operators that NORM is present and that certain
precautions must be followed when opening, entering, working on or working inside
the equipment.
B. Workers who work on or around NORM-contaminated process equipment and piping
should be advised about the potential hazards associated with NORM and the
meaning of any posted symbols and/or warning signs.
V. Worker Protection During Maintenance Activities

During maintenance and cleaning activities involving NORM-contaminated process
equipment and piping (well workover, vessel entry, valve repair, sand removal, etc.), the
following precautions should be observed:
A. A pre-job plan should be prepared which specifies procedures to be followed and
precautions to be observed during the work.
B. No eating, drinking, smoking, or chewing by workers in the immediate work area.
After working on NORM-contaminated equipment, workers should wash their hands
and faces before eating, drinking, smoking, chewing or using the toilet.
C. Workers should wear washable rubber boots, gloves and rubber slicker suits or
impermeable disposable paper suits.
D. Plastic ground covers should be placed around the work area and openings on
equipment should be capped as appropriate to contain NORM materials and facilitate
clean up.
E. NORM materials should be kept wet to minimize dust generation. Activities that
tend to generate airborne dust include cutting, grinding, drilling, polishing, welding
and direct handling of dry NORM scale. If dry maintenance or cleaning procedures
are used, appropriate personal protective equipment (e.g. half face respirators with
High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filters) and engineering controls (e.g.
vacuum systems with HEPA filters) should be used.
F. If maintenance work involves extensive handling of NORM materials, then before
and after background radiation surveys should be taken around the work site to
ensure that containment measures are effective.
G. If maintenance activities include entry into a process tank or vessel, the process tank
or vessel should be assumed to be NORM-contaminated unless a recent NORM
survey has confirmed otherwise. NORM-contaminated vessels and tanks should be
emptied and ventilated for at least four hours prior to cleaning or entry to allow
adequate decay of any short-lived radon daughters, and all other appropriate
precautions described in this section should be followed.

H. Contaminated equipment should be cleaned in a designated area. Contaminated

gloves, respirators, coveralls, boots and tools should be decontaminated by rinsing
with soapy water or laundering.
I. Process piping, equipment and vessels that are to be released for non-oilfield use
(e.g. released to the general public or scrap dealers) should be cleaned so that
external surfaces are less than 50 R/hr (0.5 Sv/hr) above background.
VI. Storage of NORM

NORM-contaminated scale and sludge removed from process piping, equipment and
vessels should be placed in drums. Plastic drums are preferred for corrosion resistance.
Even though the activity level of the deposited material is unchanged, the gamma
radiation levels may increase somewhat when the material is drummed because of the
consolidation of the deposits.
If contained or uncontained bulk amounts of NORM materials or equipment containing
NORM needs to be temporarily stored at a centralized location (e.g. prior to repair,
decontamination or disposal), appropriate precautions such as the following should be
observed:
A. NORM-contaminated containers, piping, and equipment should be labeled with a
nuclear radiation warning symbol and/or wording such as "Warning, Naturally
Occurring Radioactive Materials, Avoid Unnecessary Contact or Breathing Dusts".
B. Loose NORM materials should be placed in sealed and labeled containers on pallets
or racks if long term storage is likely before permanent disposal. All openings on
stored equipment or tubing containing NORM should be capped, plugged or wrapped
in plastic to prevent the spread of radioactive materials. Containers and equipment
should be inspected periodically and resealed or repacked if found leaking. If
needed, NORM scale or sludge can be stored temporarily on impermeable pads with
a secured cover to prevent leaching, erosion or blowing of the material.
C. Containers of NORM materials should be stored in well ventilated areas with limited
access. Radiation levels at the perimeter of storage areas should not exceed 60 R/hr
(0.6 Sv/hr).
D. Storage areas should be secured and posted with warning signs such as "Caution,
Radioactive Material Storage Area".
E. Records should be maintained of NORM-contaminated equipment and materials sent
to temporary storage to help ensure that it is eventually disposed of properly.
VII. NORM Disposal

Few countries currently have regulations directly applicable to management and disposal
of oilfield NORM. However, host country regulations should always be reviewed before
disposing of NORM. One of the aspects of NORM which must be considered is its
persistence - the half-life of Radium226 is 1620 years. Any disposal option should either
dilute the NORM to concentrations of no consequence (offshore procedure), or isolate the

material at a depth in the earth where it is unlikely that it will ever be encountered again.
The following methods are suggested for disposal of NORM:
A. If NORM is present, then NORM should be identified as a waste stream in local
Waste Management Plans. Local procedures for handling and disposing of NORM
should be identified.
B. Offshore platforms can use the procedure which is approved for disposal of NORM
in the North Sea. The material should be wet ground to a size smaller than one
millimeter (the finer the better) and discharged overboard. In relatively shallow
water, wave action during storms should cause re-suspension and redistribution of
bottom sediments and prevent long term build-ups on the sea floor. In deeper waters
where storm disturbances are not as common, differing settling rates, tidal variation
and current changes should cause the NORM material to disperse over large areas.
C. NORM-contaminated waste water from washing or cleaning process equipment or
piping can generally be discharged directly overboard offshore. Onshore, this waste
water can generally be discharged or disposed of along with produced water (see
Health, Safety and Environmental Guideline PP.15 Produced Water Discharge
Criteria).
D. NORM-contaminated tubing, scale, sand and sludge may be sealed in wells during
plugging and abandonment operations. Cement plugs and/or full cement columns
should be used to isolate NORM materials from the surface and from fresh water
sources.
E. NORM-contaminated equipment and material can be buried at selected locations and
depth where it is unlikely that it will be uncovered in the future through natural
events or unplanned human activity. Burial should be at a depth of at least three
meters (ten feet), but not less than one meter.
Resources
Bulletin on Management of Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM) In Oil
and Gas Production, American Petroleum Institute (API) Bulletin E2, 1992.
NORM Guidance Manual, Chevron USA. 1990. Revised 1996.
Chevron Intranet: http://www-crtc.chevron.com/HES/THRA/norm.htm.
Low Specific Activity Scale Origin, Treatment and Disposal, Report No. 6.6/127, E&P
Forum. January, 1988.

Safe Operations: Health Asbestos
Guideline SO.72
Asbestos
Purpose
This guideline provides information about the hazards of asbestos and describes
appropriate practices to help control workers' exposure and to avoid environmental
problems.
Content
Guideline SO.72-2
I. Definition and Classifications SO.72-2
II. Health Effects SO.72-3
III. Determining the Presence of ACMs SO.72-4
IV. Management in Place vs. Removal and Disposal SO.72-5
V. Occupational Exposure Limits and Exposure Monitoring SO.72-7
VI. Engineering Controls and Work Practices SO.72-8
VII. Personal Protection and Employee Training SO.72-9
VIII. Warnings and Labels SO.72-11
Resource SO.72-11

Asbestos Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
Virtually all industries including construction, automotive, shipbuilding, and
petroleum have used asbestos-containing materials (ACMs). Usage of ACMs peaked
in the early to mid 1970's when the health hazards of asbestos became widely
recognized, and when governments of many countries began to regulate asbestos
currently one of the most regulated substances in the workplace. ACMs should be
handled carefully to protect our workers' and the public's health.
In most facilities, the companys role is limited to specifying and auditing the work of
qualified contractors who perform major asbestos abatement work. Our employees do,
however, have a potential for exposure when they are involved in small-scale tasks, such
as removing asbestos-containing pipe insulation as part of a valve replacement.
Custodial, maintenance, or utility employees may also be exposed to asbestos while
working in crawl spaces, utility areas, or above suspended ceilings where asbestos is
present in the structural fireproofing, pipe insulation, or sprayed-on textured ceilings.
This guideline:
Reviews the definitions and health effects of exposure.
Describes typical locations and how to identify ACMs.
Recommends allowable asbestos exposure limits.
Describes engineering controls, good work practices, and personal protective
equipment to control workers' exposures.
Guideline
I. Definition and Classifications

A. Definition
Asbestos is a group of naturally occurring mineral silicates that consist of very fine
fibers. The three types of asbestos commonly found in industrial applications are as
follows:
1. Chrysotile (white asbestos)
2. Amosite (brown asbestos)
3. Crocidolite (blue asbestos)
There is now growing evidence that crocidolite is the most dangerous form of
asbestos while chrysotile, the most common in industrial and construction
applications, is the least hazardous.

B. Types
From the point of view of hazard, ACMs can be divided into two types:
1. Friable ACM
This asbestos material releases fibers into the air when crumbled by simple hand
pressure. The primary asbestos exposures result from people damaging or
disturbing friable ACMs in:
a. Sprayed-on fireproofing
b. Thermal insulation on pipes, vessels, boilers, heaters, and other equipment
Note: Asbestos-containing insulating materials should no longer be used.
2. Nonfriable ACM
Although products of nonfriable ACMs can be broken into smaller pieces, the
asbestos fibers are tightly bonded or locked in so that they cannot be released and
become airborne. Nonfriable ACMs, however, can become friable when sawed,
drilled, sanded, or otherwise treated severely.
Nonfriable ACMs include:
a. Vinyl/asbestos products such as floor tiles and sheet flooring
b. Asphalt/asbestos products such as roofing and underground pipeline coatings
c. Asbestos/cement products such as Transite board or pipes
d. Chemical-resistant materials such as gaskets, bearings, packings and seals
e. Automotive parts such as brake pads and clutch linings
II. Health Effects

Asbestos is primarily an inhalation hazard. When inhaled, tiny, sharp asbestos fibers can
become embedded in the lungs. Asbestos-related diseases that may develop (perhaps not
until 10 to 30 years after exposure) include:
A. Asbestosis
Asbestosis a chronic disease of the lungs makes breathing progressively more
difficult. There is often a permanent scarring of lung tissue which causes an
emphysema-like condition.
B. Mesothelioma
Mesothelioma cancer of the lining of the chest and abdominal cavity is almost
exclusively related to asbestos exposure.

C. Lung Cancer
Lung, pleura, and bronchogenic carcinoma is one disease to which workers who
smoke and are exposed to asbestos have a higher risk of developing than non-
smoking exposed workers.
D. Other Cancers
Less commonly, asbestos has been associated with cancers of the digestive system,
e.g., the esophagus, stomach, and colon.
III. Determining the Presence of ACMs

Although variations may occur from country to country, in general, it is unlikely that
friable ACMs were used in the construction of a facility built after 1980. When
conducting surveys for ACMs, surveyors should follow this procedure:
A. Records Review
1. Check construction plans, remodeling records, and prior ACM inspection reports.
2. Interview maintenance and operations staff who are familiar with the facility's
history.
B. Facility Inspection
Conduct walk-through inspections covering all areas of plants and every floor in
buildings, focusing on friable ACMs.
1. Check every room, utility space, crawl space, and area above suspended ceilings.
2. Wear an appropriate respirator if the inspection is likely to dislodge suspect
materials or if the environment is very dusty.
3. Touch test all surfaces for friability and note the presence of nonfriable ACM,
especially if it could be subjected to severe disturbance.
C. Bulk Sampling
1. Select one to three representative sampling sites.
Note: Representative sampling sites should be uniform in color, texture,
construction/application date, and general appearance (e.g., edges and ends of
piping and boiler insulation may not be representative sampling sites as previous
repairs may have altered the material).
2. Collect core samples of the material from these sites.
3. Wear, as a precaution, a supplied-air respirator or a cartridge respirator equipped
with a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter while collecting samples.
4. Moisten the collection site with water from a spray mist.
5. Extract the sample with a laboratory cork borer or knife.

6. Extract a 0.5 - 1.0 cm ( to inch) diameter core, penetrating all layers.

7. Label sample containers (sealable plastic bags or capped glass bottles) with
proper identification placed on the container itself, not on the lid, since lids can
be inadvertently switched.
8. Seal holes, after sample extraction, with caulking compound, acrylic spray
adhesive or duct tape (or both) and label them, if appropriate, for future
identification.
D. Bulk Sample Analysis

Any material containing more than one percent asbestos, as determined by Polarized
Light Microscopy (PLM) should be considered an ACM. Piping insulation and
building materials often contain asbestos in amounts less than one percent.
It is important to confirm that the materials to be removed, abated, and disposed of
do in fact contain more than one percent asbestos.
Laboratories should verify all bulk samples showing between one and five percent
asbestos by the more precise point-counting technique to avoid making costly
decisions about abatement or disposal.
E. Record Keeping and Reporting

Prepare a written report summarizing the findings and actions to avoid future
duplication of effort and to document the basis for our asbestos-related decisions.
IV. Management in Place vs. Removal and Disposal

If friable ACMs are present, choose between removing them and managing them in place.
A. Factors in the Decision

The preferred approach where practical is to manage the ACMs in place. The
decision about whether to remove ACMs or to implement a maintenance program is
based on factors, such as:
1. Health risks
2. The estimated remaining useful life of the facility
3. The likelihood that operations will disturb the ACMs
4. Host country regulations
5. Removal costs (current vs. future)
6. The physical configuration of the work area

B. Managed in Place
If ACM is to be managed in place, implement an ACM maintenance program that
includes both the clean up of asbestos previously damaged or released and the
prevention of future release. Items that may be included in a maintenance program
are as follows:
1. An inventory of all ACMs in the facility
2. Periodic examination of all ACMs to detect deterioration
3. Written procedures for:
a. Handling ACMs during maintenance and renovation activities
b. Asbestos disposal
c. Dealing with asbestos-related emergencies
C. Removal and Disposal

1. Removal
As an ill-conceived or poorly conducted removal project can actually increase
rather than eliminate health risk, removal may not be always the best course of
action to minimize asbestos exposure as it:
a. Disturbs the friable ACMs.
b. Can elevate airborne levels of asbestos fibers significantly.
2. Waste Disposal
a. In General
Take precautions to minimize the airborne emission of fibers during asbestos
waste collection, transportation, and disposal.
1) Dispose of scraps and debris of friable ACMs in sealed plastic bags or
other closed containers.
2) Dispose of waste from nonfriable ACMs, in general, without bagging.
3) Affix labels to containers of friable ACM waste.
a) Indicating the presence of asbestos, warning against creating dust
b) Conveying the danger that asbestos is a hazard that exacerbates
cancer and lung diseases
b. Landfills
Unlike many oil and chemical wastes, asbestos will not dissolve nor leach
into water nor will it contaminate ground water.
In general, asbestos waste may be disposed of (and promptly buried) in a
nonrestricted (e.g., sanitary) landfill.

On large asbestos abatement projects, ensure that the asbestos abatement

contractor is contractually responsible for disposing of the asbestos waste
properly according to the host country's and local regulations and standards
for disposing of asbestos.
V. Occupational Exposure Limits and Exposure Monitoring

A. Occupational Exposure Limits (OEL)
Limits governing occupational exposure to asbestos may differ even within countries.
1. In the United States
In 1986, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) established
two Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs) for occupational exposure to asbestos:
a. 0.2 fiber per cubic centimeter of air (0.2 f/cc) as an eight-hour, time-
weighted, average (TWA) exposure
b. 1 f/cc averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes as an Excursion Limit
(EL).
Note: In 1991, OSHA proposed to reduce the PEL-TWA to 0.1 f/cc.
2. Other Countries
The U.S. OSHA 0.2 f/cc PEL-TWA for asbestos is by no means the most
stringent.
a. Norway has a 0.1 f/cc limit for asbestos
b. Australia has a 0.1 f/cc limit for amosite.
3. By Type
Since 1980, the widely followed Threshold Limit Values (TLVs), established by
the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
specify:
a. 0.2 f/cc for crocidolite
b. 0.5 f/cc for amosite
c. 2 f/cc for chrysotile
Note: In 1991, the ACGIH proposed under Notice of Intended Change to
adopt a 0.2 f/cc TLV for all forms of asbestos.
4. Limits
At this time, these asbestos allowable exposure limits should be followed unless
the host country's regulations are more stringent:
a. 0.2 f/cc for an 8-hour TWA

b. 1 f/cc for a 30-minute excursion
B. Exposure Monitoring
Apply the U.S. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
Method 7400 (or equivalent) which collects air samples on mixed cellulose ester
(MCE) filters and analyzes the samples (counting the fibers) by phase contrast
microscopy (PCM). During asbestos handling and abatement activities, conduct
monitoring to:
1. Determine workers' exposure.
2. Help select personal protective equipment for the specific task and for similar
operations in the future.
VI. Engineering Controls and Work Practices

Before prescribing respirators for asbestos exposure protection, consider the feasible
engineering controls or good work practices necessary to bring workers' asbestos
exposures to within the allowable exposure limits.
A. In General
One or any combination of the following control measures may be feasible and
effective in reducing exposures to below the allowable exposure limits:
1. Ventilating through local exhausts equipped with high-efficiency-particulate air
(HEPA) filter dust-collection systems
2. Vacuuming with machines equipped with HEPA filters
3. Enclosing or isolating processes that produce asbestos dust, e.g., using glove bags
4. Using wet methods, applying wetting agents (surfactants such as detergents)
during removal and clean up
5. Disposing promptly of asbestos waste in leak-tight containers
B. Asbestos Brake and Clutch Linings

1. In General
New asbestos brake and clutch linings require no special handling under normal
conditions as the asbestos fibers are encapsulated and are nonfriable. If, however,
these new asbestos brake or clutch linings are ground to fit, asbestos fibers can
be released into the air. In this case, treat and handle these products as friable
ACMs.
Installing non-asbestos replacement brake and clutch linings made of non-
asbestos will eliminate this hazard.

2. Brake and Clutch Repair or Replacement

The following are guidelines specific to asbestos brake and clutch lining repair
and replacement:
a. Use wet methods or a HEPA filter vacuum to clean out the dust in brake
shoes, drums, or clutch housing.
b. Do not use compressed air to remove clutch and brake dust.
c. Do not work with high-speed abrasive disc saws or grinders unless they are
equipped with appropriate engineering controls, such as a local exhaust hood
connected to a HEPA filter vacuum.
C. Asbestos Gaskets
Asbestos gaskets are installed extensively in piping, valves, pumps, and other
equipment to prevent fluids from leaking between solid surfaces.
1. Minimal Exposure
Data indicates that workers' exposures to asbestos are minimal during gasket
handling when:
a. Replacing after-service sheet or spiral-wound gaskets
b. During on-site fabrication (cutting) of new sheet gaskets
2. Short-term, High-airborne Concentration
A concentration of short-term, high-airborne asbestos can be created if both:
a. An after-service sheet gasket is dry-removed.
b. The contaminated seating surfaces is dry polished with a power sander.
These concentrations can be controlled simply by wetting the gaskets and the
seating surfaces prior to replacing the gasket.
Note: Continue to consider installing appropriate asbestos gaskets as long as
they are commercially available.
VII. Personal Protection and Employee Training

A. Respiratory Protection
Provide workers with HEPA-filtered or positive-pressure supplied-air respirators
under those circumstances in which feasible engineering controls or good work
practices do not reduce exposures to below the allowable exposure limit. See Health,
Safety and Environmental Guideline SO.66 Respiratory Protection, in this manual.
Do not provide or allow workers to wear disposable dust-mask respirators.

B. Special Protective Clothing

For employees exposed to asbestos above the allowable exposure limit, provide
protective work clothing, such as:
1. Whole-body clothing
2. Head covering
3. Gloves and foot coverings
4. Single-use, throwaway full body coveralls to avoid laundry services
Note: If soiled clothing is sent to commercial laundries, label laundry bag as
described in Warnings and Labels and inform the laundry that the clothing contains
asbestos.
C. Personal Hygiene
Workers should
1. Not eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or apply cosmetics while in
asbestos work sites.
2. Remove asbestos fibers from clothing with an HEPA filter-equipped vacuum
(not with compressed air).
3. Remove asbestos-contaminated clothing before leaving the work site and not
wear them into a lunchroom or the general locker room.
4. Remove contaminated protective clothing first and the respirator last before wash
up for lunch and at the end of the shift.
5. Take a shower at the end of the shift when skin or clothing or both are
contaminated.
D. Employee Information and Training

A training program should be instituted for employees who handle ACMs regularly
and who are exposed above one-half of the allowable exposure limit.
Training should include such information as:
1. Methods of recognizing asbestos
2. Health effects associated with asbestos exposure
3. Relationship between smoking and asbestos exposure in producing lung cancer
4. Nature of operations that could result in exposure to asbestos
5. The importance of protective controls to minimize exposure
6. Any necessary instruction in the use of these controls and procedures
7. Purpose, proper use, fitting instructions, and limitations of respirators

8. Appropriate work practices for performing the asbestos job

9. Appropriate medical surveillance
10. Appropriate signs and labels
E. Medical Surveillance
An appropriate medical surveillance program should be provided for those
employees who are exposed to asbestos regularly, e.g., whose exposures for 30 or
more days per year exceed 0.1 f/cc as an 8-hour TWA, or 1 f/cc as a short-term
excursion.
Note: Asbestos abatement contractors should administer medical surveillance
programs for their own employees.
VIII. Warnings and Labels

A. Signs
Warning signs readily understood by employees should be posted to demarcate
any work area in which airborne asbestos concentrations are expected to exceed the
allowable exposure limit. Signs should convey the danger that:
1. Asbestos is a hazard that can cause cancer and lung diseases.
2. Respirators and protective clothing are required.
3. Only authorized personnel are allowed in this area.
B. Labels
Bags and containers containing friable ACM waste should be labeled or tagged to:
1. Indicate the presence of asbestos.
2. Warn against creating dust.
3. Convey the danger that asbestos can cause cancer and lung diseases.
C. Communications
At multi-employer work sites, other employers in the vicinity of an asbestos project
should be advised about:
1. The location of the asbestos work areas
2. The nature of the asbestos work
3. The precautions to follow
Resource
Asbestos. Loss Prevention Guide No. 1. Chevron, December, 1991

Safe Operations: Health Handling Refractory Ceramic Fibers
Guideline SO.73
Handling Refractory
Ceramic Fibers
Purpose
This guideline describes the potential hazards of refractory ceramic fiber (RCF) and
suggests practices for controlling exposures to RCF.
Content
Guideline SO.73-2
I. Health Effects of RCF SO.73-2
II. Monitoring Exposure SO.73-4
III. Exposure and Protection SO.73-5
IV. Engineering Controls and Work Practices SO.73-7
V. Employee Information and Training SO.73-8
VI. Communication of Hazards SO.73-9
VII. Medical Surveillance SO.73-9
VIII. Waste Disposal SO.73-9
Resources SO.73-10

Handling Refractory Ceramic Fibers Safe Operations: Health
General Overview
RCF, a man-made mineral fiber, is an amorphous, glassy, fibrous product made from
molten kaolin clays, oxides of alumina, and other metal oxides. Due to its light weight
and superior insulation properties, RCF has been a widely used thermal insulator for
high-temperature applications. In COPI facilities, RCF may be found as:
Linings inside furnaces, fired heaters, and steam boilers
Removable exterior insulation covers for flanges, valves, and vessel manways
Thermal insulation for heat treating and stress relieving during construction
RCF is sold in many forms, including blankets, folded modules, bulk fibers, blocks, and
boards. The most common trade names for RCF products include Kaowool, Fiberfrax,
Inswool, Saffil, and Cer-wool.
Results of recent toxicological studies on laboratory animals reveal that RCF is an
animal carcinogen and that it may pose a human cancer risk similar to asbestos. As a
result, the exposure standards and work practices in this guideline should be observed
and inventories, by facility, should be developed where RCF is installed.
Guideline
I. Health Effects of RCF

A. Carcinogenic Risk of RCF
1. Animal Tests
a. Studies
Toxicological and cancer studies in the 1980's proved RCF to be carcino-
genic to laboratory animals.
1) Two toxicological studies, completed in the early to mid-1980's (see the
first two resources at the end of guideline).
2) A more comprehensive cancer study by TIMA, Inc., a trade association
of North American manufacturers of fibrous glass, mineral wool, and
RCF, based on exposing groups of rats and hamsters to one of the
following:
a) 200 fibers of RCF per cubic centimeter of air (f/cc)
b) 5,000 f/cc of chrysotile asbestos (as positive controls)
c) Pure filtered air (as negative controls)

b. Results
The RCF-exposed animals produced many more cases of cancerous tumors
in the lungs and thorax than the asbestos-exposed animals, while the pure-air-
exposed animals produced no cancer cases.
2. Additional Risk due to Crisobalite Formation
When exposed over time to temperatures in excess of 1,000C (1,800F), RCF
converts partially to cristobalite, a specific form of crystalline silica. The Interna-
tional Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) has given crystalline silica a 2A
classification (probably carcinogenic to humans). The existing eight-hour, time-
weighted average, Threshold Limit Value (TLV) for exposure to cristobalite is
0.05 mg/m3.
When removing after-service RCF from furnaces, workers may be exposed to
both RCF and cristobalite. The engineering controls, good work practices, and
personal protective equipment for RCF are, however, also adequate for cristo-
balite.
B. Irritation
RCF dust can irritate the eyes, skin, and the upper respiratory tract and may result in
a temporary and light case of dermatitis.
C. Comparing RCF and Other Man-made Mineral Fibers (MMMF)

RCF belongs to the MMMF family of products which includes mineral wool and
fibrous glass.
1. Temperature
RCF products are useful in extremely high-temperature applications of up to
1,600C (2,900F); less expensive mineral wool and fibrous glass thermal insula-
tion are useful in lower temperatures of less than 600C (1,100F).
2. Toxicity
RCF is considered much more hazardous than both fibrous glass and mineral
wool.
D. Comparing RCF and Asbestos

1. Diameter
The nominal diameters of fibers in common RCF products range from 1.2 to 3.5
micrometers and are much larger and heavier than the generally submicrometer
asbestos fibers.
2. Physical Characteristics
Under mechanical force, asbestos fiber tends to split longitudinally, creating
many thinner and more toxic fibers than RCF which breaks traversely, creating
shorter, less-harmful fibers.

3. Health Risk
The results of animal studies indicate that, fiber for fiber, RCF may be biologi-
cally more active than chrysotile asbestos; however, ounce for ounce, an emis-
sion of RCF may create a lower health risk than an emission of asbestos.
The reasons are that a given weight of asbestos may create 100 times more
airborne fibers than the same weight of RCF; and, the RCF because of its
fiber's larger size and heavier weight settles out of the air more quickly.
II. Monitoring Exposure

A. Exposure Limits for RCF
At this time, the following maximum, allowable, exposure limits for RCF should be
recognized unless host country regulations are more stringent:
1. 0.2 f/cc for an 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA)
2. 1 f/cc for a 30-minute excursion
Note: These are the same limits as for asbestos exposure.
B. Monitoring
Note: Data collected when monitoring for RCF can be useful for selecting
personal protective equipment for RCF and other similar activities.
1. Air Sampling and Analytical Methods for RCF
A procedure equivalent to the U.S. National Institute's Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH) Method 7400 should be followed when monitoring for RCF
which is identical to the air sampling and fiber counting recommended for
airborne asbestos fiber. Collect air samples on mixed cellulose ester (MCE)
filters and analyze them (counting the fibers) under phase contrast microscopy
(PCM).
a. Caution Overloading the Filter
Under dusty conditions, the filter might be overloaded quite easily when
sampling for RCF and, therefore, the sample becomes unreadable. To avoid
this problem when there is a visible dust cloud in the area, either:
1) Collect only partial-shift samples (from 30 minutes to a few hours) at a
flow rate of 0.5 to 1 liter per minute, or
2) Inspect the filter frequently and change it if there is any visible dust
build-up (discoloration) on the filter. (The better practice!)
b. Caution Formation of Fur Balls
During sample handling or shipping, the fibers of RCF insulation much
larger than those of asbestos may curl up or break loose from the surface

of the MCE filter and tangle with other fibers to form fur balls. This is
another reason to keep filters lightly loaded.
III. Exposure and Protection

A. Typical Exposure for Workers
Figures SO.73-1 and SO.73-2 summarize the results of monitoring exposure to RCF
during typical construction, maintenance, and shutdown operations within US-based,
Chevron operations. In general, RCF-related tasks can be divided into two catego-
ries: those performed within an enclosed space and those performed in open ventila-
tion. RCF exposure levels can often exceed 0.2 f/cc for tasks performed within an
enclosed space (SO.73-1); however, exposures are typically less than 0.2 f/cc for
tasks performed in open, ventilated spaces (SO.73-2).
Until RCF-exposure monitoring data are available for other specific applications, the
typical exposures in Figures SO.73-1 and SO.73-2 can be referred to as a guide in
planning workplace control measures and for selecting personal protection equip-
ment.
Fig. SO.73-1 Observed Task Exposures to RCF Within an Enclosed Space (during repair of furnaces)
Number of Exposure Range, Geometric Mean,
Task Description Samples Fibers/cc Fibers/cc
TASKS INDIRECTLY CAUSING RCF RELEASE
Inspection & Minor Repairs 5 0.023 - 0.34 0.08
Erecting Scaffolds 9 0.07 - 2.2 0.18
Refractory Repairs 4 0.05 - 0.34 0.14
Welding, Burning & Arc Grouping 16 0.003 - 17. 0.39
REMOVING RCF INSULATION
Removing RCF Blankets 9 0.059 - 17. 1.3
Removing RCF Modules 8 0.19 - 2.5 0.62
Removing bulk RCF Insulation 7 0.18 - 2.2 0.46
INSTALLING RCF INSULATION
Packing bulk RCF insulation 10 0.094 - 1.7 0.62
Installing RCF Blankets 29 0.024 - 2.6 0.14
Installing RCF Modules 14 0.061 - 1.7 0.23

Fig. SO.73-2 Observed Task Exposures to RCF in Open, Ventilated Spaces

Number of Exposure Range, Geometric Mean,
Task Description Samples Fibers/cc Fibers/cc
Job-site Heat Treating & Stress 6 0.005 - 0.14 0.038
Relieving(1)
Handling Removable Exterior Insu- 4 <0.02 - 0.09 0.03
lation Covers(2)
Removing Fire Damaged Reactor 5 0.1 - 4.0 0.45
Exterior RCF Insulation(3)
Handling RCF Waste(4) 3 0.009 - 0.05 0.02
(1) Wrapping equipment with RCF blanket, removing blanket, removing RCF debris from heating tapes and waste
disposal.
(2) Removing and disposing worn-out and slightly torn exterior insulation covers (two personal samples and two
area samples).
(3) Worker brushed off fire-damaged RCF insulation which stuck to the shell of the reactor (five short-term samples).
(4) Gathering and bagging RCF scraps and debris.
B. Guide to Respirators
In confined spaces, such as furnaces, workers wear respirators as the main protection
against excessive exposure to RCF.
In general, all workers handling RCF products should wear respirators unless moni-
toring data shows that they will not be exposed to RCF in excess of allowable limits.
Figure SO.73-3 is based on the 0.2 f/cc allowable RCF exposure limit and provides a
basic respirator selection guide until RCF exposure monitoring data are available for
their specific applications.
Fig. SO.73-3 Respirator Selection Guide for Various RCF Tasks

RCF-related Tasks & Activities Minimum Recommended Respirators
IN OPEN, VENTILATED SPACES
All RCF tasks, e.g., cutting RCF blanket, heat treating In atmospheres containing up to 2 f/cc: Half-face air-
& stress relief, handling exterior insulation covers, purifying respirator with HEPA filters.
and cleanup and disposal of RCF waste.
WITHIN AN ENCLOSED SPACE
Tasks not creating a significant dust cloud, e.g., In atmospheres containing up to 2 f/cc: Half-face air-
inspection, erecting scaffolds, repairs, installing purifying respirator with HEPA filters.
modules & bulk RCF, welding and bagging waste.
Tasks creating a significant dust cloud, e.g., In atmospheres containing up to 10 f/cc: Full-face air-
removing blankets, modules, & bulk RCF, installing purifying respirator with HEPA filters.
blankets, and arc gouging.
In atmospheres containing up to 20 f/cc: Any powered
air-purifying respirator with HEPA filters or any supplied-
air respirator operated in positive pressure mode.
Note: Facility monitoring data, if available, should be used for proper respirator selection.

The table indicates that the minimum respiratory protection is a half-face air-puri-
fying respirator equipped with high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters.
Workers should not wear disposable dust masks when handling RCF.
C. Special Protective Clothing

Workers should wear disposable full-body coveralls (including head, neck, and foot
coverings) and gloves to prevent skin contact with RCF. Under certain conditions,
workers should wear safety goggles to reduce eye contact with RCF in particular
when they may encounter airborne RCF in concentrations greater than one f/cc.
D. Personal Hygiene
Provide workers with the following instructions when they are assigned to RCF work
sites.
1. Do not eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or apply cosmetics in RCF work
sites.
2. Do not use compressed air to remove fibers from contaminated clothing. Do use
a HEPA-filter equipped vacuum.
3. Do remove RCF-contaminated clothing when ready to leave the work site.
4. Do not wear RCF-contaminated clothing into a lunchroom or the general locker
room.
5. Do remove contaminated protective clothing first and the respirator last before
washup for lunch and at the end of the shift.
6. Do take a shower at the end of the shift when skin or clothing or both are contam-
inated.
7. Do flush eyes with water (in the case of eye contact) and seek medical attention
if irritation persists.
IV. Engineering Controls and Work Practices

Feasible engineering controls and good work practices are the preferred means of
reducing RCF exposure levels. Many exposure situations, however, are due to non-
routine operations, e.g., a furnace shutdown. In such cases, as engineering controls are
often impractical or infeasible, it should be emphasized strongly that workers handling
RCF should reduce fiber releases.
A. Wet RCF
Where practical, remove RCF when it is wet as this reduces the number of fibers that
will break free and become airborne when the material is handled. Wetting agents
(soaps or surfactants) can be added to water to help soak the RCF.
Wetting may not, however, be appropriate for some porous refractory materials that
may crumble or become muddy when wet.

B. Tools and Techniques

RCF should be handled to create the least amount of airborne dust. Among the tools
and techniques to avoid or use are the following:
1. Do not saw RCF with high-speed abrasive disc saws unless they are equipped
with HEPAfiltered vacuum exhaust.
2. Do not remove surface dust or clean up RCF wastes with compressed air.
3. Do bag RCF materials removed from elevated locations or otherwise contain
them before lowering them to ground level.
4. Do not allow scrap material to pile up on floors and surfaces.
5. Do use plastic sheeting in open areas to contain the fibers and prevent their
dispersing in the wind.
6. Do clean and vacuum (using a HEPA-filtered vacuum) all debris outside an
enclosed space as soon as possible.
7. Do not dry sweep.
Note: For certain operations, consider using intrinsically safe HEPA-filtered
vacuums to ensure against ignition of flammable or combustible vapors.
V. Employee Information and Training

An appropriate training program should be instituted for employees who handle RCF
products regularly and whose exposures may exceed 0.1 f/cc as an 8-hour TWA, or 1 f/cc
as a short-term excursion. Conduct training appropriate for employees' understanding,
and include such information as the:
A. Nature of operations that could result in exposure to RCF
B. Potential health effects associated with RCF exposure
C. Importance of protective controls to limit exposure and any necessary instruction in
the use of these controls and procedures
D. Appropriate work practices for performing the RCF tasks
E. Purpose, proper use, fitting instructions, and limitations of respirators
F. Appropriate medical surveillance
G. Appropriate signs and labels
Note: The Chevron Material Safety Data Sheet on Refractory Ceramic Fibers
(Generic), listed in the Resources at the end of this guideline, provides current health
and safety information on RCF.

VI. Communication of Hazards

A. Warning Signs
Warning signs that employees can understand easily should be posted to demarcate
any work area where airborne RCF concentrations can exceed the allowable expo-
sure limits. Signs should convey the concepts that:
1. RCF is a lung disease hazard.
2. Respirators and protective clothing are required.
3. Only authorized personnel are allowed in this area.
B. Labels
Affix labels to bags and containers of friable RCF waste that:
1. Indicate the presence of RCF
2. Warn against creating dust
3. Convey the danger that RCF is a lung disease hazard.
VII. Medical Surveillance

An appropriate program of medical surveillance should be offered to those employees
who are regularly exposed to high levels of RCF (i.e., exposures for 30 or more days per
year exceed 0.1 f/cc as an 8-hour TWA, or 1 f/cc as a short-term excursion). For RCF
medical surveillance details, contact local HSE and medical staff.
VIII. Waste Disposal

As RCF is not soluble or leachable by water, its waste should not cause ground-water
contamination, and, therefore, can be disposed of and buried in most waste landfills,
including sanitary ones.
However, precautions should be taken to minimize air emissions when transporting,
storing, and disposing of RCF waste:
A. Dispose of non-friable scraps and debris of before-service RCF products without
bagging as, generally, they present minimal inhalation hazard.
B. Dispose of scraps and debris of the friable after-service RCF in sealed plastic bags
or other closed containers.
C. Affix labels to containers of friable RCF waste and:
1. Indicate the presence of RCF.
2. Convey the danger that RCF is a lung disease hazard.
3. Warn against creating dust.

Resources
Cheng, R.T., et al. Exposures to refractory ceramic fiber in refineries and chemical
plants. Annals of Occupational Hygiene. 31: 731-754. 1992.
Davis, J.M.G., et al. The pathogenic effects of fibrous ceramic aluminum silicate glass
administered to rats by inhalation or peritoneal injection. In: Biological Effects of
Man-Made Mineral Fibres, vol. 2, pp. 303-322. Copenhagen, Denmark: WHO/IARC
Publication, 1985.
Refractory Ceramic Fibers. Loss Prevention Guide No. 13. Chevron, December 1991.
Material Safety Data Sheet No. 2917 - Refractory Ceramic Fibers (Generic). 6. Chevron.
Refractory ceramic fibers/animal inhalation research study24-month interim results.
TIMA Inc., October, 1990.
Smith, D. M., et al. Long-term health effects in hamsters and rats exposed chronically to
man-made vitreous fibers. Annals of Occupational Hygiene. 31:731-754. 1987.

Chevron Hse Guidlines

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Chevron Hse Guidlines

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Health, Safety and Environmental Guidelines Table of Contents: Safe Operations

Safe Operations: Safety

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. June 1999

Safe Operations: Health

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. June 1999

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.1 - 1 November 1997

I. Isolation and Containment

November 1997 SO.1 - 2 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

II. Labeling and Packaging

III. Safe Handling and Use

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.1 - 3 November 1997

IV. Fire Protection

B. Liquid Storage Restrictions

November 1997 SO.1 - 4 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

C. Fire Protection and Control

D. Transfer and Dispensing

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.1 - 5 November 1997

First aid procedures for chemical exposures

November 1997 SO.1 - 6 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Confined Space Entry

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 1 November 1997

November 1997 SO.2 - 2 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

B. Recognized Exposure Limit (REL)

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 3 November 1997

d. Oxygen deficiency (<19.5 percent) or enrichment (>23.5 percent) exists or

November 1997 SO.2 - 4 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 5 November 1997

b. Validating with the supervisor the classification (general or special) of the

C. Personnel Involved With the Entry

November 1997 SO.2 - 6 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

IV. Pre-Entry Considerations

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 7 November 1997

November 1997 SO.2 - 8 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Fig. SO.2-1 Safe Entry Permit Front Back

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 9 November 1997

Fig. SO.2-2 Special Entry Permit Front Back

November 1997 SO.2 - 10 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 11 November 1997

F. Pre-entry Atmospheric Testing

November 1997 SO.2 - 12 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 13 November 1997

d. Taking the following precautions if entry is required to conduct the initial

November 1997 SO.2 - 14 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

V. Entry and Standby Requirements

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 15 November 1997

2. For Any Entry

November 1997 SO.2 - 16 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

D. Safety and Protective Equipment

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 17 November 1997

When carrying out hot work in a confined space,

VI. Post-entry Requirements

November 1997 SO.2 - 18 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 19 November 1997

Guideline SO.2 Appendix

Confined Space Entry

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 21 November 1997

Employees/contractors Hazards are identified

Proper isolation &

Personnel Entering Space

Comply with all

November 1997 SO.2 - 22 Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc.

ENTRY PERSONNEL GAS TESTER STANDBY

PERSONAL PERMITTING ISOLATION/ VENTILATION CLEANING ATMOSPHERIC

Chevron Overseas Petroleum Inc. SO.2 - 23 November 1997